3-0002584-groundwater treatment and soil vapor extraction system

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SCANNED
Remedial Systems, Inc.
GROUNDWATER TREATMENT AND
SOIL VAPOR EXTRACTION SYSTEM SUBMITTAL
for
STERLING SUPPLY SITE
to
ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCTS & SERVICES
Project # SYS-10-2193-MA
December 3, 1993
-
&~aa
-
l4Ctc,
l<
-tN~,Jfli
-
I I
I I
(Ca
IL
t
L,
IL
g
2
-L
n
: F-- I~
I
L
U)Lf
Za:
Er 0
o
L,-.-
T
z6dz
e
-
C
aa
(fD~Lf
<0~
(n
~
LJ
E-~r
L2
j
:
USjDH
29
9
1
LiL
2
Jz-J
L6 r
a:a
E
SPECIFICATIONS & DIMENSIONS
ENVD}NENOTAL PRODUCTS & SERVICES
SYS-10-2193-MA
D
C
MODEL
A
B
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
A'
B'
C"
D'
E"
85.5
45
20
12
78
GPM CFM
RTS-60-4
0-60
1200
A
OP
GHIPIKO
*EGH
WIG
500
,TET
2200
ATE IR
r
W
s
2.5
0AIR
'e
6
22
FLOW RATE 5D (PM
BTEX REMOVAL o 65' F
100
99.9
&4
9 TRAY
99
TRAY 4 3
98_
/ REAOVAL
97
95
____
90
r 2
_TRAY
80
75
TRAY
.
'
1
O70
FLOVRATE
12
24
I -PI
ACXEL
35
45
60
s
RTS-60
Remedial Systems, Inc.
C
.
C. p
..
7
,
11R
, t
tp
,'r
-.
-
, "
I
I
.
1
-1
.
LOW PROFILE AIRSTRIPPER
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL
1
DRAINAGE SUMP
304 STAINLESS STEEL
2
HOLD DOWN LUGS
304 STAINLESS STEEL
3
EFFLUENT
$04 STAINLESS STEEL
4
AIR INLET
$04 STAINLESS STEEL
5
MODULAR TRAY
6
GASKET
7
LATCHES
304 STAINLESS STEEL
NEOPRENE
ZINC PLATED STEEL
8
REMOVABLE PLATES
SD03-H14 ALUMINUM
9
WATER TRANSFER TUBE
10
DEMISTER
304 STAINLESS STEEL
POLYPROPYLENE
11
12
COVER
DISTRIBUTION NOZZLE
304 STAINLESS STEEL
PVC
TEMPERATURE PORT
1/2' NPT
14
SUMP PRESSURE GAUGE PORT
1/4' NPT
16
DRAIN
1" NPT
SIGHT GLASS & LEVEL SWITCHES
PVC, BRASS, PLYURTHNE
BLOWER'FLOW SWITCH PORT
1/4' NPT
1
1
17
Remedial Systems, Inc.
56 Leonard StrAAt
Foxboro
MA 02035-2929
(50A)
U:-'rO e f
Y-
'r
r
'r
-
Remedial Systems, Inc.
56 Leonard Street
Foxboro, MA 02035
(508) 543-1512
(508) 543-7485
Low Profile Air Stripper
Design Calculation
Project: Sterling Supply - North Reading
Customer: Environmental Products & Services
Model
Water Temp
Air Temp
A/W Ratio
Air Flow
Water Flowrate
RTS-60-4
50
'F
50
'F
180
1200
VN
CFM
50
GPM
Influent
Effluent (per tray)
Removal
Contaminant
(PPB)
Tetrachloroethylene
30,000
%/tray
|
94.50
# 1
# 2
# 3
# 4
(PPB)
(PPB)
(PPB)
(PPB)
90.8
5.0
1,650.0
|
|
0.3
Total
lbs
Rem %
Day
100.0
18.00
0U
422
L
>
C
14
a
m
Ci
a
i
uJj
Lp
H
7- u
U<
CD 0D
o
LD
P z
Li
-
N
LOC
wfa.
C
\
M
z S
LJ
U
a
C
F--
C')
-Z
(L
oL
Li
r)
C<
Wi>LLJWQ Vl
-i <
j I I
(3vv(
-J-2--
M,
- LI
vr)
9
0
z
Lii
C3
CA
llC
1"Mil
I-
0-
F-J
Ln
u
1.
m
CL
LiJ
O-
0
(T)
n
LI
0
U
LLI
-
T
'p
ITw
1i
1
it
*
W0161
NntoItUW]V
hA C
i I1hI
21
Cincinnati Cast Aluminum Blowers are a smart
ATTRACTIVE
buy now and for many years to come because
Aluminum's natural aopearance is desirable. No other metal
accepts a greater vanety of finishes.
Aluminum is:
NON-SPARKING
Cincinnati Cast Aluminum Blowers are AMCA Type 3
spark resistant. With the addition of a non-sparking shaft,
they meet AMCA Type A requirements. See Page 5.
CORROSION FREE
No painting required. Maintenance free in moist environments.
LIGHT WEIGHT
Aluminum is 113 the weight of steel and, therefore, less structural support is required.
NON-TOXIC
Aluminum is friendly to foods, beverages and medicines. Cast
Aluminum Blowers are used in many food processing applications where cleanliness is important.
STRONG
Aluminum's strength is exhibited in products such as highway
guard rails, truck trailers and baseball bats. In high speed
blower wheels, aluminum is alloyed with magnesium and other
metals for greater strength.
It can be brushed. buffed. colored by anodizing and has excellent paint adhesicn.
NON-MAGNETIC
Resists magnetism even in magnetic fields making it ideal
in electronic applications where prevention of interference
is very important.
WORKABLE
Aluminum can be machined by every known metal working
process. This makes future modifications easier.
NOT AFFECTED
BY COLD
Unlike many materials that become brittle when super cold,
Aluminum alloys can actually become stronger. Cast
aluminum blowers are used in many sub-zero applications.
AVAILABLE
Approximately eight percent of the earth's crust contains
aluminum making it the most common metal on earth.
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATIONS FOR CAST ALUMINUM BLOWERS
Blowers shall be cast with commercial grade 319 cast
aluminum, having a 3/16" minimum wall thickness. Housing
halves should be attached with tapered lugs having a
minimum 45 degree taper from centerline for additional
strength. Inlets and outlets shall be round for convenient slip
fit of duct work or hose. Blower sizes 14A and larger shall have
a reversible housing that is rotatable. Blowers shall be AMCA
type B spark resistant or better. Blowers shall be performance
tested per AMCA Standard 210.
Fan motor and bearing cap vibration levels shall not exceed 1-5
mils displacement at 3450 RPM.
All fan bases shall be a minimum of 12 gauge steel.
All motors shall be continuous duty type.
lntet cr outlet flanges (if requireC) shall be 319 cast
aluminum and shall meet ANSI bolt circle and outside
diameter dimensions (see dimensions on page 20).
Blower wheels with tip speeds up to 13,000 feet per minute
shall be 319 cast aluminum. Blower wheels with tip speeds
over 13,000 feet per minute shall be 356 aluminum with a T6
heat treatment. Wheel hub shall be an integral part of the
wneel casting. Wheels shall be locked onto the motor or fan
shaft with two, knurled, cup point set screws with a locking
patch or nylon insert. Set screws shall be 90* - 120' apart
with one over shaft keyway. Up to 13" diameter wheels shall
have 5/16-18 set screws torqued to 100 inch pounds. Wheels
over 13" in diameter shall have 3/8-16 set screws torqued to 155
inch pounds.
Balancing shall be accomplished by removal of material only
- no additional weights are to be used in the balancing process. Wheel diameters up to 13" shall be statically balanced.
Wheel diameters above 13" shall be dynamically balanced.
All fans & blowers shown have
rotating parts and pinch
points. Severe personal injury
can result if operated without
guards. Stay away from
rotating equipment unless it is
disconnected from its power
source.
Read operating instructions.
HOW TO SELECT A CINCINNATI PB SLOWER
A word about ratings .
.
Thirty years ago Cincinnati Fan manufactured one size blower and one size wheel. Today
we stock eight sizes of blower housings and fifty-seven wheel sizes. Four of our eight
housings are each available with three different inlet sizes. By combining different housings, wheels and inlet sizes. we can offer you more standard direct drive pressure blower
ratings than any other fan company in the world. Because we have so many direct drive
ratings. chances are good that we can meet your requirements with a compact, costefficient direct drive Cincinnati PB instead of a heavier, more expensive V-belt driven alternative.
Your Cincinnati Fan Representative is a ratings expert who is ready to help you select
precisely the right PB blower for your application.
How to use the PB Series Direct-Drive Rating Tables
If you know the static pressure and CFM required for your blower application, you
determine which PS blowers you should consider by referring to the tables on Pages 8
9 of this catalog. To use the tables, follow these simple directions:
1. Reading to the right, find the column heading which displays the static pressure
you require.
2. Reading down that column, find the line(s) displaying the CFM rating(s) which
can
and
(SP)
will
satisfy your requirement.
3.
Follow the line(s) to the left side of the table, where you will identify the wheel(s) and
the blower housing model(s) used to achieve the CFM rating(s).
You may find that several ratings come close to meeting your requirements. Generally, the
rating with the lowest brake horsepower requirement (BHP) is the best selection (highest
efficiency, least noise). In some situations, other requirements, such as blower dimensions and/or specific inlet/outlet sizes, may overide the lower horsepower rule-of-thumb.
Your Cincinnati Fan Representative is available to assist you with selection and pricing information.
Some Do's and Don'ts
DO ..... consider that radial blades are self-cleaning in most applications. Backward
curved (BC) blades are not self-cleaning and may collect dust which can cause
balance problems.
DO .. . . . specify heat-resistant construction (steel wheel) for use with airstreams having
temperatures exceeding 200 degrees F (93 degrees C). BC wheels are not
available in steel.
DO NOT
use a steel wheel and/or a steel blower housing in any type of environment
where sparks could cause an explosion and/or fire. See Page 5.
DO NOT
use any blower with an unducted inlet and/or outlet without an inlet and/or
outlet guard. Severe personal injury could result. See Page 7 for guard
accessory.
16 DISCHARGE POSITIONS AVAILABLE. 45' DISCHARGE POSITIONS NOT SHOWN.
Discharges shown are determined by viewing fan from motor or drive side.
a
Clockwise Top
Horizontal
Discharge
O
a
a
Clockwise
Down-Blast
Discharge
clockwise
Bottom
Horizontal
Discnarge
Clockwise
Up-Blast
Discharge
a
Counterclockwise Top
Horizontal
Discharge
4
a
a
Counterclockwise
Down-Blast
Oischarge
Counterclockwise Bottom Horizontal
Discnarge
a
Counterclockwise
Up-Blast
Discharge
Type A- All parts in contact with airstream are of non ferrous material.
Blind bore in wheel and brass hardware in airstream. Maximum temperature 200F.
Type B: Standard on all PB's. Aluminum wneel and aluminum rubbing ring on motor shaft or fan shaft.
Maximum Temperature 200'F.
WARNING
The use of aluminum or aluminum alloys in the presence of steel which has been allowed to rust requires special
consideration. Research by the U.S. Bureauof Mines andothers has shown that aluminum impellers rubbing on rusty
steel may cause high intensity sparking.
The use of the above Standard in no way implies a guarantee of safety for any level of spark resistance. Spar1
resistant constction also does not protect against ignition of explosive gases caused by catastrophic failure or from
any airstream material that may be present in a system.
HIGH TEMPERATURE CONSTRUCTION
Standard Construction: Arrangements 1, 2, 4, 8 and 9 suitable to 150F.
I
15P-200*F Construction: Standard fan with heat slinger and slinger guard on Arrangements 1, 2. 4, 8 and 9.
Arrangement 4 also includes an external hub on the wheel or a shaft extension.
420100"F Construction: Standard fan with heat slinger, slinger guard and cast aluminum housing. Wheel is fabricated
steel. Arrangements 1, 2. 4, 8 and 9. Arrangement 4 also has a shaft extension or an extemal wheel hub.
401*-6*F Construction: Steel housing and wheel with heat slinger, slinger guard and high temperature shaft seaL
Arrangements 1, 8 and 9 only. Arrangement 9 also includes a motor heat shield. Check maximum wheel size
on page 22.
601*-750*F Construction: Steel housing and wheel with heat slinger, slinger guard, high temperature bearings, high
temperature shaft sea and high temperature aluminum paint inside and outside. Arrangements. 1, 8 and 9 only.
Arrangement 9 also includes a motor heat shield. Check maximum wheel size on page 22
TEMPERATURE - ALTITUDE CONVERSIONS
ALTITUDE IN FEET ABOVE SEA LEVEL
8000 | 9000 10000
1000 2000 [3000 |140% 5000 16000 7
JEGF0
0* .87
.91
.94
.98 1 101
1.05
1.09 1 13 117 122 126
40*94 ! .98 ! .02 ! 006 ! L.10 ' .14
1.19 ' 1.23 '1.28
1.32 1 .36
70'
.00 1.04 1.08
1.12 T1.16 | 1.20
1.25 11.30 1.35
1.40 1.45
80* 1 02| 1.061 1.10
1.14 1.19 | 1.23
1.281 1.33 1.38 1.43 1.48
100* 1.06
1.10
1.14
1.19 1.23 1.28
1.33
1.38 1.43 1.48 1.54
123
12,0* 1 09
1-141 1-18
.
1.28 1.32 1,38 1.43 1.48 153 1 1.58
140*
1.13
1-18
1.22
27 .32
1.37
1.42
1.48| 1.54
1.58 1.65
160" 1.17 | 1.22
1.26 1 1.31 j 1.36 1.42 1 1.47 1 153 1.59 1.64 1 1.70
Fan performance taoles are developed using standard
air which is 70'F., 29.9V baronmetrc pressure and .075
lbs. per cubic foot. Density changes resulting from
temperature or tarometc pressure variations (sucn as
higher altitudes) must .e corrected to standard condltions before selecting a tan based on standard perfor-
1800 1.21 1126
200* 11.25 ' 1.29
250 | 1134 1.39
>eiecz a 2-eit dnven PB-15 to deliver 1500 CFM at
8.6" SP at 2000F., and 7000' aititude.
STEP 1. From the table, conversion factor is 1.63.
STEP 2. Correct static pressure is: 1.63 x 8.6" SP
= 14" SP at standard conditions.
STEP 3. Check PB catalog for 1500 CFM at 14"
SP. We select a belt driven PB-15 and interpciation gives 3456 RPM and 5.15 BHP. STEP 4.
Correct the SHP for the lighter air 5.15 - 1.63 =
4
3.16 BHP. A 5 HP motor will suffice at 200 F., and
7000' but not at standard conditions. Special
motor insulation may be required above 3500 feet
altitude. Consult Factory.
AIR
300* 11.43
1.49
j
1.30
1.34
1.45
1.55
350* [1.53
159
1.65
400" 1.621 1.69
1.75
450* 11.72 |11.79
1.86
500* j1.1
1.88
1.96
550' 1.91
1.98 1 2.06
600* 12.00 I 2.08 | 2.16
650* 2.10 I 2.18 | 2.26
700" 2.19 1 2.27 I 2.36
750" 2.28
2.371 2.47
r.36 1 41
1 46, 1,52 1158 1 1.64
1. 40
1.45 i 1.51 1 1.571 1,63
1.69
50
I
1.561 1.62 1.68 1.74 11.82
I 1.61 | .67 1.74 1.80 | 187 1.94
1.72 I 1.78
1.85
1.92
2.00 2.07
I1.82
1.89 | 1.96
2.04 2.12
2.20
| 193 I 2.00 i 2.08 1 2.16 1 2.24 2.33
2.03
2.11 | 2.19
2.28 1 2.36 |2.46
2.14
2.22 1 2.30
2.40 i 2.49 2.58
2.24 I 2.33
2Ad2
2.50 1 2.51 1 2.71
2.35 1 2.44
2.54 2.63
2.74
2.84
F 2.46 | 2.53 2.65 2.75 I 2.86 I 2.97
2.56 | 2.56
2.76
2.87 I 2.98
3.10
1.70
1.75
1.75
1.88
1.81
1.94
2.00
2.08
2.14 2.22
2.27 2.35
2.41
2.50
2.54
2.62
2.68
2.80 1 2.90
2.94 1 3.04
3.06 I 3.18
3.19 ( 3.31
s2.77
mance data.
Temperature and/or altitude conversion factors are
used in making corrections to standard conditions.
EXAMPLE:
I
LS 2000 Level Switch
P-ArOC
dutance
probes
S
'
.ooitac
sitces
roatn
FEATURES
m Selectable fail-safe electronics
=U
ignores significant product build-up
U
Solid state, no moving ports
Simple installation and calibration
Modular electronics easily replaced
Probe length easily field modified
Explosion proof housing standard
Rugged construction handles
the roughest products
U
U
U
U
=
* LIQUIDS
* DRY/SOLIDS
pade
BABBITT INTERNATIONAL, INC.
U_,VW-L_
f Z1CQu( A&Y
ndvbaig
, , L,) t T-C I
wths
GENERAL OPERATIONS The LS 2000 can measure virtually any liquid, dry materiol or interface of electrically conductive or non-conductive products. The
proprietary radio frequency (RF) balanced impedance bridge has exceptional temperature stability,
thus eliminating the need to recalibrate the unit
from season to season.
When the probe is installed, it is calibrated in
absence of material touching the probe. When the
desired material comes in contact with the probe,
the LS 2000 is activated and cives the desired output
SIMPLE CALIBRATION All the necessary calibration
indicators are on-board so all you need to calibrate
Fly Ash
the LS 2000 is a small screwdriver.
Fail-safe electronics provide peace of mind. The
Acids
Cement
Plastics
Slurries
Flour
Fuels
Caustics
Powders
Sand
Grains
Wastewater
Oils
* INTERFACES
Oil/Water
Foam/Liauid
Carbon Black
Wood Chips
modular electronics make trouble shooting and
repair a snap. The entire unit is backed by our two
year warranty.
CONSTRUCTIONThe probe Ismade of solid 316 stainless steel rod: the Insulator ismade of UHMWPE(UltraHigh Molecular Weight Polyethylene). UHMWPE has
excellent abrasion and Impact resistance. The seals
are made with Viton "0"rings. All the electronics are
housed
crcr'
-
qn=r~.~(y
1
ffe
i-
mmmmmmemmm
-anma-A
'\!
U L
t
i-
t
'
W a
1UM
VU
K
L
il
tfl1
U1 b
C
a
I)
Arrangement 4
Arrangement 4
Arrangement 4HM
Flange mounrioorless moton
{Foot mounmea metorl
(Honzonta moung
(See pag. 17)
Arrangement 1
Arrangement 2
Arrangement 9
Arrangement 8
Arrangement 40
(oouoe Oower
uon(
BLOWER-WHEEL'S
CAST ALUMINUM B.C.
(Sacxwans Curve)
*OPTIONAL FABRICATED
STEEL or STAINLESS STEEL
AINweelshhave tvy.-et-screws, 90*-120" apart. with one being over keyway. Up to 13' diameter wheels are statically balancedWheels over 13" in diameter are dynamically balanced. Use steel wheel for high abrasive or high ternoerature apolication above
200*F. k9 3 " C). Stainless steel or coated wneels should be used in corrosive environments.
See page 22 for max. wheel size for steel wheels in steel housings.
6
C
I
Ill
- .A&
126-
ra
,*WWJ
''
jai
SHAFT GUARD
IN5TOLtJTLET FLANGE
Availacle in arrangement i and 9. Covers
oeanngs and snatt oetween fan nousing and
belt guarc- Mas extended uoe lines Meets
OSHA standards.
Cast aluminum drilled to
ANSI-125 Dound llange Dolt
circle dimensions it requested.
Outlet flange not amilsoe In
downodast contguratdon. Sa.
dimensions on page 2(L
TEFLON SHAFT SEAL
tra- nick teflon snatt
seal good to 400*F.
Ceramic fIber gasket
material with steel cover
plate aoove 400*F
Searing
side
is
GaivaniZea
31"4. NOT avilaole
unless Cincnnan Fan
mouts motor
enoased.
STEEL HOUSING
For high adrasive Or -lign
ternoerature aaotlcantons- Aiso in
304 or 316 stainless stee !or
corrosive environments. 10
gauge stl. Rotataole, rct rmversatle. See pe.
22 for dkrein
sane and max fteS si. Not
avatabe on model PSJ
SWIVEL OAMPER
HEAT SUNGER
Includes OSHA aoprovea spiraj
guard. Not suitaDle for duct
work inStailations'
incluces slinger, guara and snait
extension wrnen required for
151"F. to 200*F. in airstream. For
201'F. :o 750*F, see oage 5 & 22.
7
BELT GUARDSTANDARD ARM. 9
INLET FILTERS
Many ayerea tine wore mesn, Pteated.
pacer media availaole on some sizes,
*
DIMENSIONS and SPECIFICATIONS
Ul
Arrangement #4, Direct Drive
I
DIMENSIONS
,0
IN INCHES
FRAMOE
C 1
56
P.
E -F
1
3
56
14
1
et
1431.145T
1214
1%4
143e5T
5
ir-184T
12
w
3'M
12 by$ AIM
$l
414
517w4'
8.
5
15141
14
R
S
T
U
AAl
BBc
514
SPd
-1
1a
2M
4
174
See
6
716
1.
4
7a7
P'.e
1
Pa
PTh.
9
7".
%
8
g.
109
6%
1
TU
1
7fl
9 %n
6
Tk
.
64
1 T 14T
5,1
Ba
4%
AIA
14
81 9'.
1014
11&% 1014
1
4
%A
.
7(
I9"
182T-184T
1S
s
82s
414
7k
1V
s
lIt
13
11
1
4Pds.o
I4
64
19
81re
1
114
11*
20
Q t .217A
15
1.
2714
13
5&
4
2f
a
1
12
6
15 *.
8
15il..
11
181.
w. 13"'
*
1T7,b
7
9
5 1
W4t
12
2
'
12
16
25%4
'a 2". i2* 133 1 is|s 0
213T-21ST
23 20*
6
15% 11*
1614
12
w
I'-,
-o
1a2F1S4T
151a
2547-2W6
19
SA@ 8k
19lip~
2w-w
22
213T-215
1
%
107h.l 77I
M0
7
a
12.
2414
25T-259T
P9-15I.
1C1 7 -4
m8
A
22
ts 2157-215T
PB-I5
ls-3--
18M4 147
21u.
15:
151r
1j "
r
1414
14
7
7
70
129
8he
4.
a-iJJ
FW
M4
1
3*1
1
Sw
5
176
2r
_m
9h
4
4
I£e
5
3*
CCIO
121
5
~
143T126
182T-1j4T
P-
P
41a
N
Whf$
Ca3bo5.
44
Aro
S *.Za.
se
P -14A
M
2S
314
41
56
PS-12A
3 0
12.Au 621A 37e
5612
I'd
J
e5
1 5 3*
414
IA1^
1sPS-ida
H
G
123
12%1 14
PS-4
%*.
-
1
24
1 325i
Sb.
6
9'4
a
11
12t4 1430 111"
15
1-
" P8.4A ALSO AVAILABLE WITH 6" AND B" INLETS.
1 PB-15 AND P8-18 ALSO AVAILABLE WITH 6" AND 10" INLETS.
3 P8-i8WA ALSO AVAILABLE WITH AN 8' INLET.
ALL MODELS. DISCHARGE FLANGE NOT AVAILABLE FOR DOWN BLAST POSITION
DIMENSIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
1
61u.
10
18
.-
2'As
E
-......
16
1w
s
31 "d
to arrangement
pertain
KK & MM
on page
17 only.
#4HM
13 1
u
m
C3
in
-
Z
-
So
N
CnO 0I1
co0 - 0 I
o
--
-4q
1--
0
Q, 0
-
O <m )
a_
---
11111
-
LZIZILI2I2I
1 -
iii
II,'
I
~-
*t~i-+41-t1~-L~--I:~I7
II
LHHt
liFT
I 1
H->
l
I
I
I
-~
I-
.1
I
TI~
*
_
!L
I
-H
I I I I
II
ITh+~-Th tEEThI
ThATHli;
a
B
_
I
1-i~
i-Fjr.,
-Hr
I
+H1
1,11.
4U
II
'Iii
1-KILt
~
t~L 2-p
L
A
U
I-i
.iu-
4'
0
FL
~#ti ph
Ifl~/
I
iJII
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I -l---~-4-I4-4--4--4-4+-4--'--4---$--t-
-NtH
IT%
+
F-
-
-
LULL)
-I-
L IL-NFI
IA I
IL
----
-h
-T-F- - -
Cu
LLI I
ill
-
1~
-I
I-I I-
-I-
:Lii
A
I I I I~ I
(0
S
/4
-
I
I1I I I
4--
-1*
_________
I
'LI
WI
A i-I
K
4~4-44
-t hr
7~
Li
-II
11
7=1I
:1111
I-
4-P-vt
II
Ii
-I-.4
I
___VhI[±iE[I~ aSfE3t7~
V,1
r
I,,
iv
41
ii
I.
4
*1-
SL L1 _
-I
Cu
14
-7
..z.l...z.Z.z.
.i.l.
..r.:.
.
r.t.
11th
4
TI
==0Il
-
L
\
I
SW
t~.t.
!fri±~
WE
i
I
-
, -
-
F0
0 F
LI
Z
uUI
U)
OL LLI -) Ld
. I
z 1-u< u~
0-cm - U) 0 0 IL
I
- --
-I
- -
--
I
-
_j _
z
r
o
-
L
aO V\i
.. - o
r-
I-i-
m
0
1-B
0) 1
-1
I-
Z
.
(0
oD
cL
u
LL
<
In
-
L
LIA in-..
< q>-
-
3
x
z
dH8
1)
rn
S.
~---~
T -i F 1
--
-- ---
-
- -
T.
- -
r
N
CD
CI
Cu
CD
'NM 1-%Vd S
co
N
u
cn
dHS
(El
u
Du t
N
LI
Z
-4
2
>
In
-
N
:3: m O0
z
<Z CL >Cl-
*Ui
0.
. O < U.
I-
z
m
i
if
LCTTr
4-
II
11.1
f. ~~1 -4
I
_______
11111
_______
Ii
4
:LtL
A,
It
fr.
i-i-i
iI
-L
C
.. 0
z
U, W
H
L < u
0 0 CL
-
-T-
~~
ii
rt
-mi-rn
-
Go'
-.
L-
-
-
tt1~z±tt-
Ii.Il~
Z
i
~T
-
it
ksi
-L4-
~
r
-h
0
t N~
t* :-
4
1
4
~-i---r-&---------+
ff1
+1-i-
~-~---~
(0
-
2 .. j _I U Wa'
O T -J
'-4 OC~E z
0.
a* *I
C3
I
C
1-
rm
1f
4,r
-i-I---:
-4
N
C
0
N
-
LL
i
.
I
I
N
o
3-j0)
O J C) mI
0
m 1l-
SW
0
-.
(0
C
0
~4.
LW.
ti
:7T
-4
I
777[
:1
-0 (-)
I
4:4KV V
Ii
I.
-i
19
-1
-~
'II
if:-
j-
T
X
-I
ill
ii
t
lii
I
I
l
I1
tI
______
If
It
I
44
f
LV
t
(N
-Wi-i-
1
-/~f-i-
Ii
1i-I
IL
-v-li
II
4F
.4
Lii:-
-4
:LFt
1I
a!
i
-T-
CC)
lenT j I
A-i
II
I.-,
FE 1
-4
77-1 -F
1~
1
i
I
I-
IM
N
-F
a i 1 1 1e
1 1
--
1 1
it
I
0o
mN
-
'A
N
LM
,-
-
'N I -*
S
c)
cD
IM
c3
O
7-
-3
13
Li
a'
0
EL
m
A
0
F-K Lu U
0
-LJ
-j
C0 -J
Lu
(Y) 0
Li
z
LU :D
C-
'LZ
70
0
EL
0
J
J
z
0
Li
C7
H'
-
J
I
oszmo0
<
2
ry)
<
::3
01 i o
IL, '
oom
- <m
i
<ILn
U F
U
CU)>
-o
I- U t F-m -> mU
-Q
ml>
Lu
z u
0
OM U2 LU
1-
LL
7cc-
0
U2-<
<ma
C UJ
ZUD
Ct' [ L 0 l -
II
0
U)
mmov-
II
0
IL
CL
: LId
<
o
z
LLJ
II
<y
D:CL Li LL
H
D
uj
w
z
0
Z
-UDO
LL (J r
P
i
J
F-L
LL
Co
cnZ
-
-
am)
1<
I
CO
7L
Goulds
CloseCoupled
Centrifugal
Pumps
RL5
3642
Ulvty
(LLSQ
Motor:
APPLICATIONS
C
* NEMA standard
* Open drip proof, TEFC, or
(explosion proof three phase
only) enclosures.
* 60 Hz, 3500 RPM
- Stainless steel shaft
- Single Phase: %-2 HP TEFC.
Built-in overload with automatic
reset.
- Three Phase:
.%-2 HP: ODP, 208-230/460V
%-2 HP: TEFC, 208-230/460V
A-2 HP: expl. proof, 230/460V
* Overload protection must be
provided in starter unit. Starter
and heaters (3) must be ordered
separately.
Specifically designed for the
following uses:
- Water circulation
- Booster service
- Liquid transfer
- Spraying systems
- Jockey pump service
- General purpose pumping
SPECIFICATIONS
Pump:
. Capacities: to 110 GPM
-Heads to: 118 feet
- Pipe connections:
MODEL
1xl%-5
SUCTION
DISCHARGE
1%"NPT
1%x'1-5
1%"NPT
1"NPT
1%"NPT
- Maximum working pressure:
125 PSI
Teniperature: standard seal 212 0 F, (100*C) maximum.
- Rotation: right hand i.e.; clockwise
when viewed from motor end.
01992 Goulds Pumps,
Inc,
TQ-)U'
FEATURES
Compact Design: Close coupled,
space saving design provides easy
installation. Flexible couplings and
bedplates not required.
Mounting: Can be mounted in
vertical or horizontal position.
Construction: Available in bronze
fitted (BF), all iron (Al), or alrbronze
(AB). Bronze fitted means bronze
impeller.
Impeller: Enclosed design for
high efficiencies. Threaded directly
on motor shaft. Stainless steel
locknut on three phase models
requires no clearance adjustments.
Balanced for smooth operation.
Casing: Volute type; cast iron or
bronze construction. Back pullout
design. Discharge can be rotated in
eight positions. Vertical discharge
standard. Tapped openings provided
for priming, venting and draining.
Mechanical Seal: Standard
carbon/ceramic faces, BUNA
elastorners, 300 series stainless
steel components. Option seals
available.
Motor: Close-coupled design._
Ball bearings carry all radial/axial
thrust loads. Designed for
continuous operation. All ratings
are within working limits of the
motor.
-
* -
-
CC)
Goulds
4
CloseCoupled
Centrifugal
Pumps
3642
M7
370
371
PARTS
MOTORFRAME
Material Code
Item
no.
e
Part Name
k9 te ),
100
101
108
123
304
Casing
Impeller
Adapter
.
Water Deflector
Impeller Nut*
351
Gisket-Casing
1001
- 1102
1001
-
370
All
Iran
Bronze
1001
1102
- 1001
1102
1001 .
1102
Rubber or Micart-P
Stainless Steel
Composite
H.HD Cap Screw
Adapter to Case
-%
K H Ca
Adapter to Motor
Mechanical Sea
-z *.
I Order Service Rotary Stationary Elasomers Metal Parts
SfS 1 General
Ceramic
383
Douy___
0
10K18 Opt
V
10K24
ODP
3 Phase
ODP
TEFC
48
-
W-2
6
W/-2
.
K
L
-
-
M-2
%./2
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
P
A B D E F H L 0
xr
6K57A 4A 2% 5 %-
W
w xYr zZ ci'Maim
C Fuame
(ft.)
-13A
-48
55
IA
56
67
2%2% 15%
56
688
7%,%
3%7
1%x1M4-5
WL
X
dimensions are ininches and weights intb Do no use orconsrudion purpose)
(All
BUNA
I
*
Motor Frame
Pump
Stee
Pipe Plug YVent
and Drain
3
1 Phase
All
3Dty-SERIES
HiTemp. Carbon
Ceramic
300
S
EPR
CPApprox.
411@
Approw.
~CAPACITOR I
.(Sinple Phase),
+
-
21
Von
P408
iipe
nIngl
Y; PT
-
Brass
oMx.
'Impeller nut fumished an 3 phase unit onfy
L
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
'.
Material Code
1001
1102
--. Engineering Standard
-
A
F --
IP
+
Cast Iron ASTM A48 CL 20
Bronze ASTM B584
SEECA FALLS NEW YCK 13148
SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
-
<-
4
I
C.-
- - -.
.
-
-
co
a
..
* ,.- .~.
CD
CL
co.
4; 00
4
-
KJCUI
- ~
-
-
-
A IA A
ur
C)
J
=J
LITH
-U
a-
Cm,
to
E
"It
C-
Ev
Cv)
\*
-W
e
110
0
CDj
1*CE)
C
0C
C-)
CCD
mr
0
8n
8
bv
-P0
L
Q
0_
0
LuI
LU
c
0
Cvj
C0
0
0
o0
cn
-
0
C2
Lu
0
0'
Cvl
UV3H TVJO.
o0
I
0
r
%
0
N
Goulds
CloseCoupled
Centrifugal
Pumps
-.
3642
Ln
Motor:
APPLICATIONS
Specifically designed for the
following uses:
- Water circulation
- Booster service
" Liquid transfer
- Spraying systems
- Jockey pump service
- General purpose pumping
SPECIFICATIONS
Pump:
- Capacities: to 110 GPM
'Heads to: 118feet
'Pipe connections:
-
MODEL
1x1%-5
1'Ax1/-5
SUCTION
1%"NPT
1%"NPT
DISCHARGE
1"NPT
1%"NPT
* Maximum working pressure:
125 PSI
* Temperature: standard seal 212 0 F, (1000C) maximum.
Rotation: right hand i.e.; clockwise
when viewed from motor end.
@ 1992 Goulds Pumps Inc
'NEMA standard
- Open drip proof, TEFC, or
(explosion proof three phase
only) enclosures.
60 Hz, 3500 RPM
-Stainless steel shaft
- Single Phase: -2 HP TEFC.
Built-in overload with automatic
reset.
- Three Phase
%-2 HP: ODP, 208-230/460V
%A-2HP: TEFC, 208-230/460V
%A-2HP: expl. proof, 230/460V
'Overload protection must be
provided in starter unit. Starter
and heaters (3) must be ordered
separately.
-
SC-h\ 5{ L&"£- 'Ourvf
FEATURES
Compact Design: Close coupled,
space saving design provides easy
installation. Flexible couplings and
bedplates not required.
Mounting: Can be mounted in
vertical or horizontal position.
Construction: Available inbronze
fitted (BF), all iron (AI), or al bronze
(AB). Bronze fitted means bronze
-impeller.
Impeller: Enclosed design for
high efficiencies. Threaded directly
on motor shaft. Stainless steel
locknut on three phase models
requires no clearance adjustments.
Balanced for smooth operation.
Casing: Volute type, cast iron or
bronze construction. Back pullout
design. Discharge can be rotated in
eight positions. Vertical discharge
standard. Tapped openings provided
for priming, venting and draining.
Mechanical Seal: Standard
carbon/ceramic faces, BUNA
elastomers, 300 series stainless
steel components. Option seals
available.
Motor: Close-coupled design.
Ball bearings carry all radial/axial
thrust loads. Designed for
continuous operation. All ratings
are within working limits of the
motor.
Goulds
CloseCoupled
Centrifugal
Pumps
(
19ODE
3642
370
371
MOTOR FRAME
PARTS
Material Code
Itemr
No.
Part Name
100
101
Casing
Impeller
108
Adapter
123
304
351
Water Deflector
Impeller Nut"
Gasket-Casing
Plug 1WVent
Pipe
and Drain
38DE
370
. H.HD
.Mechanical
Onr
Sf
10K10
Std.
-10K6
10K18
V
10K24
3
IMATERIALS
U
All
Iran
IFte
All
Bronze
Motor Frame
1001
1001
1102
48
Opt
%
%-2
E
A B 0
6
1Y1%-5'
asterers Metal as
F
H
P
L 0
W x
-- 7
3% 5A 41&2%
5 %-
7% %
4
I3%-
4
Y 2 CPMWL
Frame (Ibt)
13
2w. 3%4
15
2
2%2zw15%
48
.55
56
5
56
67
- 68
(Al d
a inkches and wehts in bs.Donut use for constmeton purposes-
BU
5
474'
Hi Temp. Carbon
EPH
it
Ceram
-im4CPApprox.
SS
n
Steel
W Pip
MpPmg
M-Z~
2:
''2
7%
Seal
Service Ray Stationary
General
Ceramic
Duty
%4-2
Brass
0 Max.
Impeller nut fuaosn on 3 phase unMonaP
Material Cede
(
-
<-.-g
Chem.
PL
.i
1x1%4-5
-
ETEFC
-
1%
-2
Pump
Heavy
Duty
I DP
TEFC
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Stainless Steel
Composite
3 Phase
UP
1001
1102
.--1102
1001
Rubber or Micarti
Cap Screw
383
0
1 Phase
Bronze
1102
1001
-
Adapter to Case
371 HD Cap Scew
371
e:t Moto
'dpteeo
N
.
OF CONSTRUCTION
EE -
Standard
-Engineering
1001
.
1102
Cast Iron ASTM A48
-L
F
P[-
AB
-
20
SL
CBronze ASTM 8584
r'
C FAS EW
0SPECIFCATIONS
ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WrTHOUT NOTICE.
'
r
,.
A
.
CD
ra.
-
CD
--
An
w
_-
U,
C.
cLj
US
to
<4
aN
I cc
O7ot-4
U
4T-
N
LO
p.
--
-'
LU Xcc
un-
u
_j
CL0
2a
CL
An
2 L
U
5
_-
0C
I
o5001E
I f T_ 0.
I IT
C,
-
n.:
ooooo
N
0
-
o.O
-
-
Z
0 e4osQ
C-
I-1--t-t-r
C)
in
-
-
C)
T- t
-0
14
1
4-
-
C-
-ft
S
to-
I
I-
'~
i
-1
F-
t
rr-i--t-
ItIan
ALC 7
ZI
to
_t
I
-r
$
-
11
I
_4
i
~
-4
(N
S
~~
J- . -
;-r
£Z2~rj'h.
eQ.
=
cxJ
r
£ £K. U I-Cl H
0
3
'I-
3
S.
-
V
t4-4.
-t
0;
>"
+ - IA 4 .N - 1-4-. 74..
-==T
q4
IP if 'I,-4-- -4-4-0-1
-
J.-..c'
J. - ± £I It 1I
~.,\t.
.- h
if.A
00
1*]-
'3
c0
LI
4
0.
0
U
4
C)
4-
-n
~4t
14
t0
I-t-t--
T 1 1
0.-
T-7-W Tr F- F-
Ne
0
FL
-
o
0~~
S
_Ij
0
Cvj
E
I
I
(0
a)
m
I
LACA-D
__LU_
ro
0
ILL
Cv
F
0
0
0)
CD
r
0
0
Co
0)
C\
co
CM
}-
LU
-4-
4
UCV3I- lY1OI
~00
U,
Specifications
SIGNET intelek-ProTM
Power Requirements:
Series of Controllers
mox
a Signe Compok stsmitter. Or utilize
the wide range frecuency nput (0- -:oconect
c inrelek-Pro is a precision
90.. !>x.w
based s:'
s designed for use in a wide
a Industrial control appcations.
oH and ORP lntele-Pro
- .o7
Operating Temperature:
32 to - "FrQ C5 C
Enclosure Materials:
ABS pl<
IF
:1x (IF
65) Imon NE /M >: IP 65;
rUng
.
-
pero
a
vilh
t-
m
patterns and standard
specialty flow sensors Intelek-Pro offers
compatbility for o- easier system
configuic:
,j;
Intelligent Software
A the hoax>ore :=rements are
!iven sortware lico
supponeo uy m:
will guide you thrc-qn tme necessary
cafibration noorameers. usinq the alpha-
.nstaoionn
Dimensions:
3 5§
Liquid Crystal Display:
43
.
-iq
,;i
-i
lupp' a1. m.1
Input Frequency Range:
Optional Input:
4 !,
'-'t-
Isolation:
2-Relay Output Card:
2 5<,
4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA
Output Card
Response time:
Modular Hardware System
Max. Loop Resistance:
425 £
0 to 5 or 0 to 10 VDC
Output Card
Response Time:
?.
r
Min. Load Resistance:
I Ks)
Display Accuracy:
Pa
The
.,:. :
a madu a
a:divvaie
system utizng plug-in cords to
ii
n
iC sverf co ifiguratian Removing
Iat"'
Canvi a ws access 'a -he
_ eu
:
emoIte-c
'~
Dpe 'i're
connie cai
Complete Sensor Compatibility
hoose a Sol
m p seu
n ors toopete
ohangu
e ap hange the
uc:'J
pen
m-contr
ineiT.
su
CS
numeric display 'omplete front panel
lece 'eaure flexibil t
your fingertips
calioral n ,:!l
Variety of Outputs
Ilerchaieocle c
v nei: 'o. - '::. -
- cards offer a
optons These
cords Cie anolvzeec ao: the software's
unique multiple pc, - nearizer, iesulhinj
in a fully compernscd performance
curve, ao
org r-edaccuracy with
any cura
reiq, vo: a autpur card
e
SIGNET 9010 Intelek-Proli
Flow Controller
The SIGNET 90 10 intele-Pro Flow
Controller was enginFerd For quid
Flow measurement and col
in
process pipes.
2' KHz offers
frequency range of C
the opportunirv ko conne
meters and hia
her fow
mines to
:e
the 90 10 controller
Modular Design
The modular des
*nielek-P o
offers the advantoe o e panding a
cord into he
system- by pugg
mair
.~
naTB
rive
compete sero nc
ad usok by
sucl
'n-:
acatlons
-
The o sing cc-
oseuscc of
propc.onoa ce
or
and
-ro
famY
rneter.q our: -
OrderingIn ormation.z
-
AlsoK
al)Ob2
-
Coh
Parf
0a i
3-9010.1 11
'Basic'
-
aN
t N.
ripion
jD~i ~ n ' ' %67
F
nrlle w hfrequency input.
F1dxVate toralrzb 90.to 132 VAC
I6oS3dVDCI'
See - SKc.nstrumentotor t
nFor-a-
-
cc
3901"3 9 10 21 Flo Icontroll with frequency input.
(Flow rate tolizer) 180 to 264 VAC
- (Y166'30 VDC
oliytica
uirther
.,Cr~d~
.3
90104003
kr~Ca& ,s~sr30
5 9
C
upj
-"-
4 to 20/0
NV0C0nput to 20rmA input isolated
solo edl
0A4016
0
t50-3
60-
'''4c V200 20;
noionlafed te
0 to 10 VDC non isolated
4 to
to 20 mA isolated
±~4W~4v~
.9(~~
cessones~~~
O
00Q~ 395?
40 0 -
cr
l
$
St
INEA
X (1P6Sirearf cover
Fuse, 1/4 arnpfasiblow
33
K
SIGNET 515 Rotor-XTM
Flow Sensor
Creating
0
fl 0
ion 'ig o
contolling system is srnoe with
SIGNES I S 2oto-X Flow Sensoi
v a matched
S niti
Combine the
and a Signet
sensor insrollai ;.iting
flow meter or controller. and nave on
opeiational fl.'; 'non ung systern in
minutes.
CD
0
, vith
ronge, lhe
full
of
5%
0
a
repetability
opiaven in
51 5's perfornorce ha ber
p.hppcctons
thousands of liqud
worldwide
C
L. ro:
Linear to +1% o* uH
Reduce System Downtime
rnce nouis
The 515 conveits rnar'
simple
and
quicd
into minutes w h
installation. There is o. one moving
poit, and replocng 4es only
downtime
seconds, reducing sv
substantially.
'
7-,
standord 2
i
e cani
exiended 1o allow piocement of the
netei up to 200 feet a ciy without
signal amplificoon
Rugged Construction For Long Wear
AvaIlable in a choice o chemicolly
resistant, nonconiomlarinong housing
maerials, the 5 15 stonds up to the
harshest fluids. For processes
containing acids and solvents, the PVDF
(polyvinyldene fuoride) housing is a
[Luorocarbon highly resistant o
og
more severe fluids, such as acids and'
solvents
Specifications
Output Signals:
Output Frequency:
Flow Rate Range:
Linearity:
a
oFui
.
Repeatability:
=0 5%of K
n
Maximum % Solids:
Standard Cable Length:
25 feet
Simple, Accurate Flow Measurement
The 515 works on a simple, yet
precise, electromechanical principle.
Four permanent magnets, embedded in
the rotor blades, spin post a coil in the
sensor body. Fluid flow causes the rotor
to rotate, producing a sine wave pulse
directly proportional to the flow rate
The rotor's patented "open cell" feature
ensures a linear, repeatable output up to
20 fps resulting in minimal head loss
and no
'
..Q.
aC.;r j
be combined with on intrinsic safety
barrier for use in hazardous
environments
Quick, Easy Conduit Installation
Designed to allow optional conduit
installation, the 5 15 complies with local
codes requiring conduit protection.
Pulling off the 0.5 inch plug on top of
the sensor exposes a 0 5 inch (F)NPI
thread. The conduit con be connected
easily using on optional conduit adopter
fitting kit.
An optional instrument back-cover kit, or
a specially prepaied NEMA box wil
provide everything necessary for quick
conduit connection to a meter or
controller. Adopt 'o either rigid or
flexible conduit, protecting the system
hookup from harsh elements and
mechanical damage.
Ordering Information
Part No.
P51530-PO
P51530-Pl
P5 1530-P2
Housing
Material
Polypro
Polypro
Polypro
Shaft
Material
Tionium
Ttanium
Titanium
Pipe Size (in.)
0.5 to4
5 to 8
10 - up
P51530-VO
PVDF
Hostelloy C
0.5 to 4
P51 530-VI
P51530-V2
PVDF
PVDF
Hastelloy C
Hasielloy C
5 to 8
10 - up
Potented (lowthrugh "rotor design
ensures linear output in a wide dynamic
range.
Sensor Installation Fittings
515/2530/4500/8500/8516
Mariol?
i & 80-
Pipe
Size
Part No.
i /2
PvB00
3/4"
P
OPV
8 TQ0 7
1"
PV8T010
1 1/4"
PV8TO12
-
u a
Stainless 316
Part No.
Part No.
Part No.
N/A
PM1005
tk41005
SFMTAn7
N/A
PPMTn07
C4/T407
CPV8TO10
SFMTO1O
N/A
PPMTO1O
(P41010
CPV8TO)2
SFMTO I2
(32)
N/A
PPMTO J2
(32)
CR4TO12
SFTO15
FPTO15
PFMTOl5
CR4TO15
CPV8TOO5
1005
)
(25)
CPV8TO15
i 1/2'
Poly ropylene
, (mrin(
Part No.
Part No.
CLLPS1
Fiberglass
PVDF
CPVC 80
PVC 40
Pi
15]
(25)
(40]
(40]
2
PvITO
Pv85032
SEE
IR5020
SFMTO20
:50
FPT020
PPMTO20
:50;
CR4T02O
2 1/2"
PV8TO2S
SEE
SMTO25*
N/A
PPMTO25
'4W025
PV8SO25
IR8S025
PV8TOJC
PvS03C
SEE
030'
FPS030
PPM1030
C-1v4WO30
PVSTOAO
PV8SOZO
SEE
40'
FPS040
PPMT040
I-
5'
SEE
SEE
6
PV8CO
SEE
R8S060
8-
PV850
SEE
R8S080
(200)
10'
SEE
SEE
N/A
FPS100
N/A
W100
12"
SEE
851 20
SE E
I85 120
N/A
FPS120
N/A
V120
3'
4'
565)
0(80)
5R8S030
'/
|R8SO40
IR8SS
73
/050 '
138 101
PPMT050
v050
SMT060
FPS060
PPMT060'
C4WO60
(125)
(150]
0
F080PM080
830
V080
(2001
PiR5100
4
J
A
N/A
2
iRS50
040
(100)
I00
- -
1"R,
Part Number Description:
Fitting Styles:
PVC, CPVC and hiberglass hove sip ends, PVDF (incite) his sockei inds, coppel
(For copper and brass iubing] has "swearon" ends, [ron, brass, ccjrbon steet, cind
sioinless sieel have threaded ends
do,
uble snaun u '
"Cement-on" or PVC, CPVC, and fiberglo
S = Saddle
Specify wall tnickness and 0 D. [or fiberglass, and pip whedule o. PVC or orn
V =VWeloler Weld Io exisling pipe, please specidy prpe schedule
Braze to exisnrig pipe, peose specify pipe sciedule
B = Braizole
=
PV 8 T 020
--
hpe b'Z.-
Slyle
Schiaedluo
-Motrnol
or Tylpe
"TEE"
Installation Guidelines
Once the appropriate insertion sensor for
an opp icoion hos been selected, the
addition of a matched instolaion fitting
easily adapts the sensor into the pipe
Figure 1. Flow sensors, inciuding
Signet insertion types, generally
rkmend onn o "fully develooed
uibuleni flow profile" for maxirumT
1id5x
id
linearity and accuracy. To achieve
this, the sensor must be located in a
straight run of pipe with at least ten
pipe diameters of uninterrupted straight
jpipe
upstream of the sensor, and a
minimum of five pipe diameters of
uninterrupted straight pipe
downstream. Major obstructions such
as pumps or throttled valves will require
runs.
I xid
ru
staih
longer siraight
;C% 'I
i5 XrId
9I0* e
20xid
- -
Figure 2. In horizontal pipe runs
vith no air pockets or sediment
present, mount the sensor/fitting in
he 12 o'clock or 6 o'clock position
sediment or air pockets are
present, tilt the sensor/fitting at a
maximum angle of 450 to over-come
+ese
Ii
obstacles. Any sensor/fitting
oosition is acceptable with vert col
runs Vertical pipe runs with
downward flow must be pressunzed
to ensure a full pipe, upward flows
ore preferred.
REYNOLDS NUMBER = D x U x P
P
The simple steps below show how to
reduce sensor installation time with the
use of a SIGNET PVC TEE fitting
Figure 3. Knowledge of the tow
profiles below are important for
rooer caklibrorin
nd
niacment
of a fow sensoi : a pipe. The
most common how profile found in
industrial applcclons is developed
turbulent flow, precisely what
Signet sensors ore colibrated for.
The second type of profile,
disturbed turbuleni flow, is less
stoble and occus when the flow is
inerrupted by a volve, elbow, or
other internal obsruction By
running 10 diarr eers of straight
pipe ohead of We sensor,
disturbed turbulen; flow can
achieve a well developed turbulent
profle 'wvhich car ihen be
accurately measued
Finaly, laminar flow occurs with
highly viscous fH :s or with luids
which travel at exremely low
velocities.
type of low
exists in a particular application,
the fluid velociry is needed (Uk
specific gravity JP), viscosity (p)t
and the pipe diameter (D) This
information is expressed in the form
of a REYNOLDS NUMBER.
Typically, a fuid with a
REYNOLDS NUMBER greater than
4,500 is developed turbulent, and
less than 2,000 is laminor.
To determine v:[
NEMA 4X WATERTIGHT PRESSURE SWiTCH
FOR HA RSH OR CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS
ff (L EV tU
L
JwIYTt
* Low Pressure Ranges 30"
Hg Vac to 150" H20
* High Pressure Ranges 15
to 3000 PSI
- Buna-N or 316SS
Diaphragm
" IOA SPDT Switch
* Tamper/vibration resistant
setpoint adjustment 20 to
100% range
* Fixed or Adjustable
deadband
II
Ideal for use in harsh and corrosive
environments, the PSW-300 Series
Watertight
Corrosion Resistant
NEMA4X
Enclosure
Neoprene
Gasket
Pressure Switches feature stainless
steel or Buna-N diaphragm-sealed
piston or diaphragm actuators that
provide repeatability of +1% of range.
Standard design allows easy access
to switches. For versatility, single
setpoint with fixed deadband, single
setpoint with adjustable deadband or
dual independently adjustable
setpoints may be chosen.
SPECIFICATIONS
h
SWrin
g
Diagram
3/"
NPT Conduct
Screw
Connection
Terminals
Easy to Ready
Setpoint Scale
Setpoint
Adjustment
H-11
Approval: UL listed, CSA certified
Storage Temp: -20 to 150 0F
Ambient Temp. Limits: -20 to 1500 F.
Set point typicaly shifts 1%of range per
5O*F of temperature change.
Enclosure: NEMA, 4X watertight and
corrosion resistant
Setpoint Repeatability: ±1% of range
Switch Output: 1 or 2 SPDT switch may
be wired "normally open" or "normally
closed"
Electrical Rating: 10 A: 125/250 V ac; 0.5
A, 125 V dc, 0.25 A. 250 V ac, 15 A:
125/250 Vac
Enclosure: Epoxy coated aluminum,
gasketed
Weight: 2 lb
Electrical Connection: 3/4NPT female
Pressure Connection: 1/4 NPT female
for vacuum to 600 PSI: 1/a"l NPT MaleI'/A
NPT female for 1000 and 3000 PSI
Connection Material: Vac through in.
H20 ranges; carbon steel: All PS1 ranges;
316SS
Oxygen Service: Specify Option X6B foi
special cleaning.
a
(I)
a
See page H-13 for differentialpressure models.
C)
Toiodei
MODEL
(Specify Moel Number)
PR!CE
PSW-301
PSW-303
$ PSW-304
PSW-305
PSW-306
_ PSW-307
PSW-308
PSW-309
PSW-310
PSW-311
II
P
PSW-321
PSW-322
PSW-323
PSW-324
PSW-325
PSW-.326
PSW-327
PSW-328
PSW-329
PSW-330
PSW-331
SSW-3
PSW-346
PSW-348
f
ADJUSTABLE RA NGE
ENGLISH
METRIC
DEAD BAND
PROOF
ENGLISH
PRESSURE 1
I UNITS
H
SWITCH
-6 to -30 IN Hg Vac
-20 to -100kPa
6 to 24
250 PSI
6 to 30 IN H20
12 to 60 INH20
1.5 to 75 kPa
3 to 15 kPa
4 to 27
5 to 54
20 PSI
20 PSI
30 to 150 IN H20
3 to 15 PSI
6 to 30 PSI
7.4 to 37 kPa
20 to 100 kPa
40 to 200 kPa
18 to 135
2.5 to 13
3 to 18
20 PSI
500 PSI
500 PSI
10A SPDT
10A SPDT
10A SPDT
20 to 100 PSI
40 to 200 PSI
140 to 700 kPa
10 to 90
1000 PSI
280 to 1400 kPa
18 to 180
1000 PSI
10A SPDT
10A SPDT
80 to 400 PSI
200 to 1000 PSI
.56 to 2. MPa
1.4 to 7 MPa
600 to 3000 PSI
4.2 to 21 MPa
45to360
160 to 900
400 to 2600
2400 PSI
12000 PSI
12000 PSI
10A SPDT
10A SPDT
10A SPIDT
6 to -30 IN Hg Vac
6 to 30 IN H2 0
12 to 60 IN H20
30 to 150 IN H20
3 to 15 PSI
6 to 30 PSI
20 to 100 PSI
40 to 200 PSI
80 to 400 PSI
200 to 1000 PSI
600 to 3000 PSI
-20 to -100kPa
15 to 7.5 kPa
3 to 15 kPa
7.4 to 37 kPa
20 to 100 kPa
40 to.200 kPa
140 to 700 kPa
280 to 1400 kPa
.56 to 2.8 MPa
1.4 to 7 MPa
4.2 to 21 MPa
.7 to 1.8
.7 to 1.4
.7 to 1.8
2.1 to 4.2
.7 to 1.4
.7 to 2.1
1.4 to 3.5
1.4 to 5.6
6 to 11
10 to 42
42 to 98
250 PSI
20 PSI
20 PSI
20 PSI
500 PSI
0PSI
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
2400 PSI
12000 PSI
12000 PSI
TWO
TWO
TWO
T WO
TWO
TWO
TWO
TWO
TWO
TWO
TWO
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
1SA SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPOT
3 to SI 15
6 to 30 PSI
20 to 100 PSI
40 to 200 PSI
20 to 1OOkPa
40 to 200 kPa
140 to 700 kPa
280 to 1400 kPa
.7 to 1.4
1.7 to 2.8
2.8 to 5.6
4.2 to 11.2
500 PSI
500 PSI
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
TWO
TWO
TWO
TWO
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
15A SPDT
Pressure Switch ( io NIs:
(Add Suffix to Part Nu..je r) Hermetically Sealed SA 125/250 Vac Switch for Extra Protection in Severe Environments.
-P Single Set Point $75.00
-PP Dual Set Point $150.00
316 Stainless Steel Welde d Pressure Activator -S 15 to 600 PSI Only
$54.00
H-12
10A SPDT
10ASPDT
10A SPDT
9
StNI BY:L-unt MlOSS Go. ,
Inc,
;12- 1-93 ; 15:U0
; Accounting Dept. #-
1
bU0 542 7485;P 7
Goulds
A%
Su bmersible
Suwmp Pump
MODEL
LSP03
APPLICATIONS
Specially designed for the following
uses:
* Basement Draining
e Water Transfer
s Dewatering
Motor:
e %/3HP, 115 volt, 60 Hz, Single
phase, 3400 RPM.
e Built-in thermal overload protection
with automatic reset.
* Permanent-Split-Capacitor type.
- Amps: 2.6 maximum.
- Class F insulation.
a
Stalnless steel shaft.
SPECIFICATIONS
Cor rosion-resistant construction.
304 Stainless Steel motor casing
and fastners.
Glass-filled thermoplastic impeller
and volute.
Bali bearing construction. Both
upper and lower bearings are
greased for life.
Motor is permanently lubricated for
Pump:
extended service life and is powered
for cont:nuous operation. All ratings
are within the working limits of the
motor.
303 Stainless Steel shaft.
Separate float switch is attached to
" Discharge size: 1 W"NPT.
" Capacities: to 40 GPM.
" Maximum head: 21 feet TDH.
Power cord:
. Heavy duty 3-wire 16(3 SJT with
NEMA 5-15 P 3-prong grounding
plug, 115 volts.
. Power cord length: 10 feet.
* Temperature: 1041F (40*C)
maximum liquid temperature.
FEATURES
the pump at the factory. Float switch
a Separate Float Switch is
supplied with pump.
* Heavy duty 3-wire 16/3 SJT
electrical cord with NEMA 5-
15P 3-prong grounding plug
Series-connected ("Piggyback" type).
- Switch cord length: 10 feet.
Is adjustable for various liquid levels.
Easily removed for direct pump
operation or switch replacement.
Cor-plete unit is lightweight,
portable and easy to service,
,OZN I
DlI'LUII
k(,
101000
I L;,
i
fII4-
|-40
,
10,
[l , ACCOUnlR9 uepE
4
#i1
U
1 000
a %Lor
D44z
7400 4 b
"0
a
:12
,
I.S
MODE
LSPO3
S
I PARTS
E
fam No.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Padt Descriptin n
Horsepower
Voltage
Amps
Phase
RPM
1Caulng
2Impeller
Suction Straine r
3
%
115
2.6 Max.
1
3400
9
4
5
Saf Seal with Cover
Motor
6
searing
(All dimensions in Inches and welghts in Ibs. Do
7
Capacitor
to sea2l
8
0-RIng
9
Float Switch
Weight (lbs.)
01
not use for construction purpoges. Drawing is not
I
E
PERFORMANCE RATINGS
Total Had-F. t*
Ballona Per Hour
20
15
INSTALLATION
10
5
300 1200 1740 2220
(In gallons per hour)
'Vertical diatance from water
tevl to high-st
point In
diflharge- plus pipe friction,
Maximum pump submergence l 10 ft.
TETHER LENGTH.
0-2'' MN. 3 1/2" MAX.
APPROXIMATE
- ON-OFF LEVELS:
A&6" TO 11"
)TTOM OF FLOAT
1"MIN. TO BOTTOM
OF PUMP
UL.
UC-
1'. . ->Dr
4
1.
Cartridge mluster Models
to Remove he Entire $et
of Cartridges at One Time
I
4
I
C.
NOTE: InNh fow appi-
cdons, two or more cartridge cluster models
may be installed in
Parallel to tale advantage
of Harmsco's unique
U
cartridge cluste design.
I
HIF.7?
yrT
HIF-14
HIF-IQ
HI&21
HIF-24
90-105
24
8 triples
2'
37' (94 cm)
13x13' (33x33 cm)
58" (173 cm)
50 lbs. (22,6 kilos)
Flew atS (taI Ina 6PM)
No.f sid. zaka tridge
Aliuttw length cutridge
PIp aIz(NPT)
Ffter height
Floor spieaqt uir d
hrvice height clamrnge
up to 30
7
single only
1
19.5" (49.6 cm)
13X13" (33x33 cm)
36" (89 cm)
30-60
14
7 doubles
114
25' (71 cm)
13x13' (33x33 cm)
48" (122 cm)
80-75
1B
8 doubles
2"
28' (71 cm)
13x13' (33x33 cm)
48" (122 cm
75-90
21
7 trIples
1A,
37" (94 cm)
13X13" (33x33 cm)
8'(173 Gcm)
3hpping Weight (approx
29 lbs. (13 kos)
39 lbs. (178 dlos)
39 lbs. (17.8 idios)
50 1ls. (22.8 kios)
Large Capacity Filters
G
with Cartridge Lifters
for Easy Cartridge
Removal
---
--
HIF-20-FL
ms'
- 1-
HIF42
18"-
--
-
20-
HIF-78
-
20'
HiP.28
18"--
dill
Flow rts (range in APM)
No. of s. sI Carridgee
Alt aio, ;ydgeIle
Pips s3ze (N1
height
HIF-28
10-125
28
:t
'1a
Shipping weIght (apprm)
r P 1pus
2"
2"
30'
7i
75cm
40"
107 cm
1Ix 18'
48 x 48 cm
x 18
loaruperequid18
4. x.46 cm
SonIc. height oisortnCe
HIF-42
125-176
42
48" (122 cmi
79 lbs.
38 kos
68" (173 cm)
100 lbs.
46.3 Idlos
HIF-46
175-225
56
HIF-150-FL
400.800
150
3"
3"
42'
107 cm
20 x 20"
51 x51 cm
52"
132 cm
20 x 20'
51 X51 Cm
4" flanged
48"
122 cm
28 x 28"
71 x 71 cm
4' flangeo
Sal
147 cm
28 x 21'
71 x 71 cm
70 'f78 cm)
187 bs.
75.7 kils
87" (221 cm)
188 10s.
86 kios
76' (193 cm)
274 lbs.
124 kIlos
93" (236 cm
321 lbs,
155.0 kilos
20Ve$
blts
50
127 cm
li"
18 X
46 x 48 cm
87' (221 cm)
129 lbs.
58.5 MI0s
HI 00-FL
600-800
200
HIF100
300-400
100
'0 do &
HIF-75
225-300
75
50
"Ples
10
Standard illars: Standard lilters are 304 Stainless steel. Alm gaskets an too seals are EPDM. Bottom seals for large capacIty illers are nature$ gum NObt. O.rlings fowzurr
filters are1uns-.Other options avallable
ended sollds and length of fiter run desired. Rates shown are-or
NOTE: Flow rates are guidelnes only. Flter selecton isInfluenced bytne cartrdge to be used. viscosity Bus
between three to si gallons per sediment cartridge.
otean water at ambient temosraturt. Flow fates vary and tyPically range
aremanufactured under ono Of more of the following patents; U.S. Petents #3720322 and #4187179, Canada: 0977893. Great Britain: #1372014,
Putnts: Harrnsco lidustnl FIlters
West Germrny: #22618707 France: #724S864, 14urrictne #5174896 Other patents pending.
0
0<A
rcn
8
-®
0f
aa
Dii
<-_
"Li
-w
<
0-
0
c
0
CD
Ol
V
0,
CY
CCO
-
-@
C
c0
cu
H-
R
z
co
LJ
Z
LD
cc
5
>0
Li
H
8
@
Z
£0
a-
o
L
C_2
Li
z
><
a
O
C
:,Y<
-
t
O
0
GI
0
0
9a
9
LLI
Co
(-D
CC
O
CU
__J
Eu
w
Cu
LLJ
-J
a[]:
CL
-OC
I
wC
o
-
e
a3w
_0
sc --
-t
-
~
o
~'
ca
2-.-
-
E
fn
c
E'
E
-
a
-
-
-
--
n'
-3:C
Co TO
0
P
->o
a
-- ,
E
"
-
-
-SZ-E
Z;
aE -a7
2
e
-
-c
c
Eo
cc
o
2 wn
= c
pc-
c - Z
ca
E
o co
.
-
W
E0
i<
aU)2
c--. -r
C
o
)
c
-
aT
p
--
1!4:C
-
z-ru-
0 (D
-
-
E
Er
--
2
En
an
aa
a
->
JE
caC
I
Ci
-C
o
CU
0
- 0),
En
0
E
C
--
)
a
E
icile
cto
z
fl
E60
~
50
c
-
o
C
Ca
0
o
E
.
eaE q J-e 2
(D cl. o 3 C
co
a
-a
ca
-
-
(n
I
orx
--
~
c
0
E -T
~>E
-
E
E
ca
o
x
0U
>c
-c0
mc
)
Ea
2
-D
0
[,a
0 r:
tCri
Liz
7ii
a
-r
I.
.
so.L -oono
CC
z6
M
e
am
-,
15-
-
I:v
Cl C
r-o
c3e
cDc
-
~~
a o
' \~
O
.
-
2t~~F-
e-
i-
-
-VE
z
Z07
irc
a
E
aE
C
e-3
:
.-
=
a
3
:
-. c>c i
a
-
a.
OQC
co
*
. c
.C
- > --,tE
Co
cu
c
L.c
Co
Ot
:g
0
E
0
1/
--
a- -a--O
t
..
cC
-
6-
c
0-
-
r
m
o
0C
r>
C&2
0
>
0- E
Io
<
-
CC
CfC
-
0
C) o
N.a
t
4Z <
(((CE
too
C15CD
C - -)
NN
---
0o
.
a: _ _
--
--
-<
e
cn O
cr--
.- CL
co6a>
_
E o
C:.~
.a
C1
i
ai
e o
Z
Z
i
O
LL
Et
C
2
o
clO
CL
cW
cm
o
n
EEE
--
coo
C
0-
§
I;
-t
zo
.
-E
w
a
0Z
<
>>
E
ol4
0
mci
C
O6 cD
E
e
e~~~.. o- ,... y
o-
e
oC~
Q)-
c
o
CC
Remedial Systems, Inc.
56 Letrord Street
Ph [508) 543-L512
Foxboro MA 02035
FAX: (508) 543-7485
Drawing Name: SKID MUNTED SOIL GAS RECOVERY UNIT
For: SYS-10-2193-MA
Drn by BJ (BAB)
Date 12/3/93
Fie None: SGR-1153
F--l
AIR FLOW PROBES VILL SUPPLY A 4-20 mA
SIGNAL TO A DIGITAL DISPLAY WHICH WILL
BE CALIBRATED TO READ IN CFM. EACH PROBE
MAY BE SELECTED FOR DISPLAY THROUGH A
4 POSITION SVITCH ON CONTROL PANEL
MOISTURE
KNOCKOUT DRUM
TEMP. GAUGE
VS-1: SET FOR 30' SVC VAC
CONTROL
r- PANEL
PS-5 SET FOR 10' SWC
SOLENOID VALVE
230 V. N/O
SYSTEM MOUNTED ON A 3'x5'
CARBON STEEL SKID
SCAE: NTS
CONTROLLER VILL BE MONTED IN A NEMA
4 ENCLOSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH OR VACUUM SWITCH WILL
CAUSE SYSTEM SHUTDOVN. POWER DOWN
TO RESET.
MOISTURE SENSOR WILL SHUT DOVN SYSTEM
AND OPEN SLENOID VALVE SYSTEM
VILL RESTART AFTER 10 MIN DELAY.
ALL SVITCHES. CONTACTS. RELAYS. ETC. IN
CONTROL PANEL VILL BE NEMA RATED
TO
VAPOR
PHASE
CARBON
FILTERS
Rev:
12
EGrG ROTR.
ATINGmo (
EN 707
Explosion-Proof Regenerative Blower
I
W
LEC-
FEATURES
- Manufactured in the USA
* Maximum flow: 280 SCFM
I Maximum pressure: 85" WG
*Maximum vacuum: 87" WG
* Standard motor: 5.0 HP
Blower construction - cast aluminum
housing, cover, impeller & manifold;
cast iron flanges
* UL & CSA approved motors for
Class I, Group D atmospheres
Sealed blower assembly
" Quiet operation within OSHA standards
*
U
iOFTIONS
TEFC motors
" 50 Hz motors
International voltages
" Other HP motors
e Corrosion resistant surface treatments
e Remote drive (motorless) models
e
I* Explosion-proof motor starters
IACCESSORIES
Moisture separators
I
& inlet filters
.Inine
C
Vacuum & pressure gauges
e
Relief valves
External mufflers
BLOWER PERFORMANCE AT STANDARD CONDITIONS
AIR FLOW RATE (M3/MIN)
1.0
100 -
3.0
0
4.0
5.0
7.0
I
N
-14 0
-
90
0
0,
-
- -
/
-
|L
|
-
8-0
|
SUTION
-A----
SUCTION
200
-
-
-
40 -
-150
-
-
150
-
40
-
8
-
----
20
-
-----
-
100
100
..-
30---
20----
-
50
0
40
80
120
16P
AlLOW RA
to
200
240
280
cc0
w
0
4
50
-
_
to__i_
40
80
120
160
200
240
280
AIR FLOW RATE (SCFM)
(SFM)
/
25
-
20
030!IL
0
|
-
I
-
0z'
-
1
50
AIR FLOW RATE (M3/MIN)
20- 3-0
4.0 5.0
6.0
7.0
M-
-
60--
1.0
8.0
I
Ir~ ... I~--r L.
~--I~lIIIIPREESURE"
h-h-II
rT-t-ttA
-MAX PRESSUREI
I/
POINT,
1
30
0
6.0
-
0.
1.5
3.0
70-
2,5 0 2.0
0,
2.0
00
8000
000
8000
4000
2000
200
0
3.Ut
1
1
1
1
21
5
00
25
0
40
80
120
160
200
240
210
0
40
80
120
160
200
240
280
EN 707
Explosion-Proof Regenerative Blower
,ROTATION
DIRECTION
DIMENSIONS:
1C
IN
TOLERANCES: .XX
(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
0.75' NPT CONDUIT CONNECTION AT 12 O'CLOCK POS1ON
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL
Part No.
Motor Enclosure Type
Horsepower
Phase - Frequency
Voltage
Motor Nameplate Amps
Maximum Blower Amps1
Inrush Amps
Starter Size
Service Factor
Thermal Protection
Bearing Type
Shipping Weight
EN707F72XL
038181
Explosion-proof
5.0
Three - 60 Hz
460
7
7.9
48
0
230
14
15.8
96
1
1.0
Pilot Duty
Sealed, Ball
174 lb (79 kg)
BLOWER LIMITATIONS
Min. Flow @ Max. Suction
Min. Flow @ Max. Pressure
'Corresponds to
the
85 SCFM @ -87" WG
150 SCFM @ 85" WG
performance point at which the blower and lr motor temperature rise reaches the limit of the thermal protection in the motor.
Specifications subject to change without notice. Please contact factory for specification updates.
-.
I.
11
Blowr Mode Rfrenc Key
I
A063, CR101. 0R202
B-DR068,
j
0 - UH313. UM404. UM454, UM3U3, UH31J UM5..,
FM;
"J,
UMDD
tm
F-ORB. CR9. CR808. CR85
G3-DRi0R11.DR12.DR13
H - LH14, DH15
*
J
r
niet Filter (Single Connection)
SPECIFICATIONS:
niet Filters protect the blower and the air distribution
stem from dust, and other airborne particles and contaminants. Normally used in pressure systems.
HOUSING-Steel
MEDIA-Polyester
EFFICIENCY-97-98% (8 to 10 micron particle size)
FILTER ELEMENT-Replaceable (see filter elements)
NOTE: "Z" MEDIA (1to 3 micron particle size) available
LI
M
-a-a---
477411
*
Z Media Filter
Part Number
FOR DR BLOWER MODELS
FOR SPRAL BLOWERS
Peflnce
477411
Inlet
Ml
Bkww
Dimensions (Inches)
Conneetaon
A
B
4.56
3.25
506
D
E
Fliter Element
2.00
5 5
1.00
1.75
271078
6.00
7.00
3.757
6.50
Outet
C
517609
S16466
517865
B
2.00 SO
0.75 NFT
1.00 NPT
515122
515123
515124
517066
517687
517868
C. 0
E
E
1,0NPT
2.00NPT
2.00NPT
8.00
775
10.00
850
7.25
12.25
1 50
2.00
2.00
515132
515133
515134
515125
515145
517869
517870
F
0
2.50 NPT
3.00 NFT
1000
10.00
12.50
13.00
2.50
3.00
515134
.515134
515151
516511
517347
517871
517872
H
H
H
4.00 NPT
6.00NPT
8.00NPT
10.00
16.00
22.50
14.00
15.00
23.00
400
515135
516515
517348
A
6
1
1
517612
515132
8.00
800
lnline Filter (Dual Connection)
SPECIFICATIONS:
Inline Filters protectthe blower from harmful dust and other
particles that may be drawn into the blower through the air
distribution system. Normally used in vacuum systems.
IF
A
HOUSING-Steel
MEDIA-Polyester
EFFICIENCY-97-98% (8 to 10 micron particle size)
FILTER ELEMENT-Replaceable (see filter elements)
NOTE: "Z" MEDIA (I to 3 micron particle size) available
R
RD
FOR DR BLOWER MODELS
271200 FOR SPIRAL BLOWERS
EPert Nurnber
a586
515256
516483
F
Slow Model
A
&
A
271200
517610
517890.
517891
517892
4
inlet
175
SOl
B
C. D
0.75 NPSC
1.00 NPSC
1.50N PSC
F
200NPC
F
G
H
H
2.50 NPSCa
3.00 NPSC
4.00 NPSC
6.00 NPSC
H
nakOmso
(inches)
Connection
Reference
Z Meda FIlter
800NPSC
4
Outlet
A
C
B
SO
200N
.OOSO
0.75 NPSC
1.00NPSC
1.50 NPSC
2.00 NPSC
7.25
17.00
8.00
8.00
1 14.00
J
4
14.00
18.00
4.00 NPSC
6.00NPSC
8.00NPSC
6.50
8.50
'
22.00Cd
LIVi
10.25
1025
26.50
27.00
28.00
38,00
-2.00
0.75
1.00
1 1.50
2.00
2.50
nu
8.00
1
_
1.75
L0..7
_.
1.75
271078
517813
1.00
1.50
2.00j
2,50
3.001
516434
4001
6.00
515135
516515
8.00
517348
516434
516435
516435
515135
N
/
/
/
With our moisture separator, you can protect your remediation system
while making the removal of hazardous vapors and gases more efficient.
As it becomes imperative to remove
known environmental hazards from
soils and below dwellings, the explosion-proof Rotron regenerative blower
has become a valuable tool in the
vapor extraction process. Our new
moisture separator is used in conjunction with the Rotron blower to make
vapor extraction methods safer and
more efficient for the entire process.
By separating and containing
entrained liquids which are extracted
during the removal process from the
gas flow stream, Rotron's moisture
separator helps protect the blower
from corrosion damage caused by
excess moisture and protects the
end treatment system from further
contamination. The moisture separator is positioned between the blower
Product Features.
Product Options.
o
o Site
Large capacity ranges from
10 gallons to 40 gallons.
" High efficiency cyclonic separation
o
for all models.
El Inherently safe collection design.
E Many sizes available to suit appli-
o
o
cation (see chart).
O Moisture separators are sized
to blower.
E No routine maintenance, except
and vacuum gauges read fluid
levels and working vacuum point
available.
Automatic draining systems
available.
Private labeling is available.
Insulation blanket available to
winterize separator.
to drain liquid.
TOP VIEW
C
SIDE ViEW
E Epoxy coated interiors.
E Outfitted with drain for convenient
removal of fluid.
E Two safety features include a relief
valve and a liquid level float.
o A vacuum relief valve protects
the blower from overheating by
detecting blockage in the line.
Selecting the right
moisture separator.
For Rotron
Blower Model
o A float system containing a cage,
float seat, and stainless steel ball
automatically seats to protect
the blower from flooding when
the moisture separator is full.
MODEL
and the extraction well and contains
two safeguards that help protect
your system during the vapor extraction process. Rotron can offer application assistance when installing the
moisture separator* For more information, contact our Application
Engineering department.
A DIA.
CFM
MS200D
-)MS300D
2.00
2.50
200
300
3.00
MS3508
MS500B
3.00
350
| 6.00
MS6008
4.00
500
600
L
C DIA.
14.88
ID
Select Moisture
Separator Model
liquid-hotding
capacty
DR404. DR454, OR505.
0R513. OR523, DR555
DR606, DR6, DR707
MS2000
10 gallons
MS3000
01808
MS350B
10 gallons
40 gallons
DR8
M5500B
40 gallons
DR12
MS600B
40 gallons
I
F
G DIA.I DRAIN IWEIGHT
3.00 124.661 36.78
3/4' NPT 30 LBS
4,50
46.50
23.44
6.50
5.00 134.37
1" NPT
54.501
65 LBS
6.63
Hazardous Location Policy.
components. Sealed units should never be
EG&G Rotron will not knowingly specify,
design, or build any product for installation
in a hazardous, explosive location without
utilized where local, state, and/or federal
codes specify the use of explosion-proof
equipment. Division I & 11, Class 1, Group
the proper UL or NEMA enclosure. EG&G
D; Class 2, Groups F & G requirements are
Rouron does not recognize sealed components as a substitute for explosion-proof
met with thcsc srandard explosion-proof
blowers.
'EG&G Rotron offers general application guidance; however, the suitability of the particular
blower selection is ultimately thc responsibility of the user, not the manufacturer of the blower.
Notes:
Dimensions: inches
Tolerance: .XX t .25
6.25
Specifications subject to change without
notice.
ci
GENERAL PURPOSE PRESSURE SWITCHES
NEMA4 ENCLOSURE
\b\,uG
RANK; -
swrcWT-(
-,\
Ranges From 3 to 3000 PSI
- SPDT Switch Output
internal Reference Scales
and Adjustment Lock
f: 205-2600 UP.
[R
* Safe, Easy Wiring Access
54
LISTED 'IND
CONT EQ
9
--
Omega's affordable, general purpose
pressure switches offer distinct
advantages over most similar style
switches, including calibrated
reference scales and DPDT or
adjustable deadband switches, as
well as a wide selection of adjustable
ranges from 3 to 3000 psi.
SPECIFICATIONS
Approval: UL listed, CSA certified
Storage Temp:-65 to +160"F
Process Temp: SS 0-160WF; Buna-N
0-150*F
Ambient Temperature: -40 to +160*F,
(except models PSW-107 to 117; 0 to
160*F). Setpoint typically shifts less than
1%of range for a 50*F (280 C) ambient
temperature change.
Shock: Set point repeats after 15G, 10mS
duration
Vibration: Set point repeats after 2.5G.
5-500 CPS
Enclosure: NEMA 4 Classification
Set Point Repeatability: PSW-107 to 1?
and 129 to 131 +1%of adjustable range;
PSWI18 to 129 and 132 to 133 ±15% of
adjustable range
Switch Output: 1 SPDT. Switch may be
wired "normally open" or "normally
closed"
Electrical Rating: Std. 15 amp
125/250/480 V ac Resistive
External Manual Reset: 15A 125/250 V
ac Resistive
Double Pole Double Throw: 10A
125/250 V ac Resistive
Enclosure: Die Cast Aluminum, (max.
0.06% copper). Light grey aluminum
lacquer finish, gasketed
Weight: Approximately 2 lb
Electrical Connection: %" NfT (2)7/8
diameter knockouts
Pressure Connection: %/ NPTF (excep
Models 118 to 126
NPTF).
Re
U n
2 YEAR
MADE
IN
WARRANTY
IN-I
1~ i*
'(S2i
IDEAD
moe9*-
ADJUSTAB LE RANGE
-
MO DEL
IPRICE
ENGLISH
BAND
ENGLISH
METRIC
I
UNITS
PROOF
PRESSURE SWITCH
Buna-N Diaphraqm, "0" Ring and %" NPTF Brass Pressure Connection
600 PSI
PSW-107
1.to 2. PSI
20 to 210 kPa
3 to 30 PSI
70 to 675 kPa
1. to 4. PSI
600 PSI
PSW-108
10 to 100 PSI
m
ADDED
FEATURE
15A SPDT
-
15A SPDT
-
C:
m
4
PSW-109
10 to 100
PSI
70 to 675 kPa
-
600 PSI
15A SPDT Externals tanual
PSW-110
10 to 100 PSI
70 to 675 kPa
4. to 10. PSI
600 PSI
10A DPDT
# PSW-111
10 to 100 PSI
70 to 675 kPa
0:5 to 12. PSI
600 PSI
15A SPDT
dab
5 PSW-112
30 to 300 PSI
205 to 2000 kPa
1. to 5. PSI
600 PSI
15A SPDT
-
A PSW-113
30 to 300 PSI
205 to 2000 kPa
0.5 to 16. PSI
2500 PSI 15A SPT
# PSW-114
50 to 500 PSI
340to3400kPa
2 to 8 PSI
2500 PSI 15A SPDT
PSW-115
50 to 500 PSI
340 to 3400 kPa
1.5 to 24. psi
2500 PSI 15A SPDT
I PSW-116
50 to 500 PSI
340 to 3400kPa
PSW-117
316SS DiapPSW-118
PSW-119
SPSW-12
PSW-121
*_PSW-122
PSW-123
PSW-124
PSW-125
sPDmpher Bi
PSW-128
PSW-129
316 SS Bello
PSW-130
PSW-131
PSW-132
303SS Pisto
PSW-133
*xygen Clean: Opt-
H
DPDT Switch
duabe
-
dabn
2500 PSI 15A SPDT External Manual
___________________________Reset
3. to 20. PSi
0.7 to 6.89 MPa
100 to 1000 PSI
" NPTF Pressure Connection
5 to 30 PSI
42 to 210 kPa
1.to 3. PSI
5. to 12. PSI
6 to 30 PSI
42 to 210 kPa
10 to 100 PSI
70 to 675 kPa
3. to 5. PSI
3. to 6. PSI
2000
kPa
205
to
30 to 300 PSI
205 to 2000 kPa 100 to 850 PSI
30 to 300 PSI
2500 PSI 15A SPDT
-
1 and
30 to 300 PSI
205 to 2000 kPa
10 to 85 PSI
2500
2500
2500
2500
2500
PSI
PSI
PSI
PSI
PSI
15A
10A
15A
15A
10A
SPDT
DPDT
SPDT
SPDT
DPDT
2500 PSI 15A SPDT
50 to 500 PSI
340 to 3400 kPa
4. to 7. PSI
2500 PSI 15A SPDT
200 to 1700 PSI
1.35 to 11.7 MPa
10.to2.PSI 2500 PSI15A SPDT
Bellow and %" NPTF Brass Pressure Connection
30 PSI 15A SPDT
1 to 2" Hg
30" Hg Vac too
-100 to 0 kPa
30" Hg Vac too
-100 to 0 kPa
3 to 6.5 Hg
30 PSI 10A DPDT
250 PSI 15A SPDT
1 to 4. PSI
140 to 1350 kPa
20 to 200 PSI
id /" NPTF Pressure Connection
140 to 1350 kPa
1 to 3: PSI
250 PSI 15A SPDT
20 to 200'PSI
1.5 to 5. PSI
575 PSI 15A SPDT
50 to 500 PSI
340 to 3400 kPa
2500 PSI 15A SPDT
7 to 11.7 MPa
9 to 23.PSI
100 to 1700 PSI
and %" NPTF Pressure Connection with Buna-N O-Ring
40 to 180. PSI 10000 PS I15A SPDT
3.5 to 20.7 MPa
11 | 500 to 3000 PSI
X68" -SS modelsonly, add $35.
H-10
-
DPDT Switch
-
DPDT Switch
abe
Ad
m
-
-
DPDT Switch
-
-
4
-
4
-
4
-
4
(
DRYBULKSOLIDSDETECTION
LIQUID LEVELCONtROL
SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
Power
120 VAC ( 15%) 60 Hz, 2 watts,
standard (24 VDC optional)
Output:
1 Form C contact SPDT relay,
10 amp resistive at 125 VAC,
8A250VAC, 5A30VDC
Fail Safe:
Selectable high or low level
RF Frequency:
Approximately 1.3 MHz
LSM WoM 10' 314- PeMO
ENVIRONMENTAL
Hazardous Area:
Class I,Group C, D, Class 11,
Group E,FG, Class II1
Temperature:
Probe: -30*F to 180*F
Electronics: -30*F to 170"F
WARRANTY The entire unit is warranted for two
years against defects in material or workmanship. See owners manual for complete details.
Pressure:
Probe 250 psi @750 FNote: at
180*F pressure should not
exceed atmosphere.
Distributed By:
Construction:
Probe: All wetted parts 316 SS,
UHMWPE and Viton.
Electronics: Housed in cast
aluminum explosion proof
enclosure.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
APPLICATION PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE Ifwithin 60
days of purchase, the LS 2000 does not perform
according to our claims and was properly installed in
an approved application that does not exceed the
stated performance specifications, the LS 2000 may
be returned for full credit.
COPYRIGHT
LS200-asA
4968by LABNT INTERNATIONAL INC.
(
DI
G
I
T A L
P AN
E L
M E T E FR
PROCESS
CONTROL
a
POSSO
41/ DIGIT
Microprocessor-Based
with SS
a Microprocessor Power with Analog Simplicity
* Easy Single Button Scaling (SBS)
* Steady, Accurate Display to ± 199,990
a
4% Digits + Extra Zero
4 Alarm Points with LED Status Indication
* NEMA 4 Front Panel
* Isolated 24 V Transmitter Power Supply
* 4-20 mA, 1-5 V, 0-5 V or 0-10 V Field Selectable Inputs
Multi-point Linearization option
* 2 or 4 Alarm Relay options
* Isolated 4-20 mA Transmitter Output option'
* 2 or 4 Relays and 4-20 mA output available together
PRECISION OIGITAL
CORPORATION
Model P0690
Microprocesor-Bsed Digital Process Meter
I
SIMPLIFY LOOPS WITH P0690's 24 V SUPPLY
The PD690 is ideal for loops that consist of a transmitter and
HIGH-PERFORMANCE/EASY TO USE
Precision Digital's Model PD690 puts the power of micro-
a digital display because the PD6g0 provides the 24 V to
processor technology to work in a high performance, easy to
power the transmitter. This standard feature saves time and
money by simplifying wiring and eliminating the cost of an
use, industrial grade digital process meter with the features
customers want:
external power supply. In addition, the isolated power supply
Single Rution Scaling
can be used to power 3 and 4 wire transducers with either
* tiolated 24 V Transmitter Power Supply
e
current or voltage output. The 24 V power supply has a
NEMA 4 Front Panel
ripple of less than 0.01 V pp that is ideal for powering smart
transmitters.
* Steady, Accurate 4W Digit + Extra Zero Display
* Multi-point Linearization
- Powerful Options
SINGLE SUTTON SCALING (SBS) MAKES SETUP A SNAP
Single Button Scaling means the P0690 can be completely
programmed using only one button. And you only do one
thing with that one button: press It once when the meter
displays what you want. For example, press the ENTER
button to initiate an automatic scan of the various
programming routines: CAL/b, dEC Pr, ALArS, outPut and
no. PtS. To enter one of these routines, press the ENTER
button as the routine name is displayed. Once In the routine,
press the ENTER button when the meter reads the desired
values. It's that simple!!
Setup Instructions On Meter
NEMA 4 FRONT PANEL PROTECTION FOR HOSTILE
ENVIRONMENTS
Wet, dirty and dusty environments don't bother the PD690's
NEMA 4 front panel so it can be installed in almost any panel
In the plant. That means plant operators can have the
important process information right where they need it most;
on the shop floor. And the NEMA 4 front panel does not
restrict access to the setup buttons.
5IG, BRIGHT. STEADY DISPLAY FOR BIG NUMBERS
The PD690s 4/2 digit plus extra zero display is great for
displaying big numbers: like the volume in a 100,000 gallon
tank. And the PD690's large display does not sacrifice
>s-.-bt
uc
qCfl
--
3
t
ej.
*
A,
4
Iltaf.TM-
391&.s~
tA
-.
Ilh
0.s
'
-p
stability for resolution. Even when displaying large numbers,
.1TA
the PD690's display Is steady and quick responding.
Operators will appreciate being able to display process
Oq.W.p
III.
variables with such stability and resolution and they'll have
confidence in the smooth, steady display.
The P060 is so easy to calibrate, the Instructions are printed right or?
top~ ot Me meter/l
One Button Does It AII!!!
To Cambrate: Press ENTER when meter
reeds CALI.
To Program Alarme: Press EN rE
meter reads ALArS.
when
To Program 4-20 mA Output: Press ENTER
when meter reads ourPur.
2
Model P0690
Microproceaor-Baed ODgital Process Meter
POINTS STANDARD
The P0690 comes with 4 independent alarms, Each alarm is
4 ALARM
easily programmed for high or low set point and 0-100%
deadband. Front panel LEDs Indicate alarm status and
assist in set point/reset point programming, Options are
available for 2 Relay and 4 Relay outputs.
Simple Alarm Programming
Pressing the ENTER button when the display reads ALArS
Initiates a scan of the alarm set and reset points. First, the
display flashes Alarm #1 Set Point and indicates this by
lighting up the #1 LED and the "S" LED. This Set Point may
be changed using the ENTER button. Next the display
flashes Alarm #1 Reset Point and indicates this by lighting
POWERFUL RELAY, RE-TRANSMISSION&
LINEARIZATION OPTIONS
The PD690's wide array of options satisfy even the most
demanding applications. And, unlike many competitoM
there are no restrictions on the combination of options a
meter can havelll A fully loaded Model PDO90.3-12-17 has a
24 V transmitter power supply (standard), NEMA 4 front
panel (standard) 4 relays, isolated 4-20 mA output, and 11
point linearization.
Relay Output Options
The P0690 is available with 2 or 4 relay outputs. The SPDT
relays are rated at 5 Amp at 240 VAC and can be
programmed for automatic or manual reset. The relays can
up the #1 LED and the R LED. This Reset Point may also be
also be programmed for 0-100% deadband.
changed using the ENTER button. The remaining Set and
Ieolated 4-20 mA Signal Output Option
The P0690 can be equipped with an isolated 4-20 mA output
signal option that can be programmed to produce a 4-20 mA
output for virtually any input. The 4-20 mA output signal can
be powered either by an internal or an external power
supply. If the internal power supply is used for the 4-20 mA
output, it is not available to power the transmitter Input. The
4-20 mA output provides 500 VDC or peak AC, input-tooutput or input/output-to-power isolation.
Reset Points are programmed in a similar fashion.
Multi-point Linearization Option
Displaying the volume in a round horizontal tank or
measuring flow by extracting the square root from a DP
transmitter is a snap with the multi-point option. The user
PD690 Alarm #2 Set Point is Sagted to 80000.
can input up to 11 calibration points and corresponding
displays to handle a wide variely of non-linear signal
applications.
4--M mA Lvw
LJ M Le
The PD690X-12-Z processes
level measurements as made by
pressure, float, sonar, etc inr a
round horizontal tank to display
PD69o Aarm #2 Reset Point Is adjusted to 20000.
Alarm Status Indication
When an alarm occurs, an LED will illuminate to indicate
which channel is in alarm. This LED will stay Illuminated until
the meter returns to the non-alarm state.
the volume of material in the
tank in engineering units.
OPTION CARD PIN-OUTS:
Pin Function:
1
Transmitter +
{
j2
PD690indicating thet Alarm #2 is in alarm condition
The PO690-X-12-Z takes the
squam root of the pressure
ditterentiae across an orifice
plate to disp(ay 17ow in
engineering units.
2
Transmitter -
2
3
Relay #1 Common ~
Relay #1 NO
Relay #1 NC
P7
P0174
Relay #2 Common
5
Relay #2 NO
PD178
_
Relay N2 NC
8
I
Relay #3 Common
P0177
2
Relay N3 NO
Relay #3 NC
3
J3
4
Relay #4 Common
5
Relay #4 NO
6
Relay #4 NC
Note: Alarm acknowledgement terminals (ACK and COM)
are located on the meter main board.
4
V.,
Model P050
Microprocessor-Based Digital Process Meter
SPE CIFICATIONS:
-
ORDERING GUIDE:
POM PfN
Power: 117 VAC (- 3); 230 VAC (- 4)
Calibration: 2 Point (- N); Multi-point ( - 12)
BASIC METER
INPUTS: Field selectable, 4-20 mA, 1-S V. 0-S V, 0-10 V.
DISPLAY: Bright. Large, 0.58" (14.2mm) high efficiency red
LED. 4W digits + extra zero; ± 19999(0), (0) may be
switched on to display 199,990.
FRONT PANEL: NEMA 4, panel gasket provided.
CALIBRATION RANGE: 4 mA (1V) input may be set to
display anywhere in range of meter. 20 mA (5V) may be set
anywhere above or below 4 mA Input.
LOOP POWER: Up to 20 mA at 24 VOC regulated. Noise less
than 10 mV p-p. Max loop resistance of 1200 ohms. Available
for either signal input or 4-20 mA output, but not both.
HOLD READING: Connect terminals HLD and COM.
ACCURACY: 0.05% of calibrated span.
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Voltage ranges, greater than
100 Kohms; Current range. 100 ohms.
POWER: 117 VAC or 230 VAC ± 10%, 50i60 H2, 10 VA.
ENVIRONMENTAL: Operating temperature range: - 10 to
+ 65*0,
Storage temperature range: -40 to + 85C.
Relative Humidity: 0 to 90% non-condensing.
ENCLOSURE: 118 DIN. ABS plastic,
CONNECTIONS: Removable Screw terminal block (provided).
ALARM POINTS: 4, any combination of high or low alarms.
ALARM STATUS INDICATION: Front Panel LED.
ALARM DEADBAND: 0-100%, user selectable.
---
=
PD690-X-Y-Z
()
()
OpUons: None (- N)
2Relays(-14)
Isolated 4-20 mA Output (- 15)
2 Relays + 4-20 mA Output (-16)
4 Relays( - 17)
4 Relays + 4-20 mA Cutput -18)
Example: A P0690 powered from 117 VAC. with 2 point
calibration, and 2 relays would be: PD690-3-N-14.
PD174
P0175
P0176
PD177
PD178
WARRANTY: 1 year, parts and labor.
BIDE view
FRONT vIw
-
r
I 5Treckneea
-
.DO.3c
1 52mrn &34mm)
( 9mmrn[
.575"9
{14 6rrn)
Mounung
Dimensla"
NOTES:
1. Panet cutout requered - 1.772" x 3.62W (45mm x 92mm) 1/8 DIN
2. Panel thickness- .0t.250
(1.52mm-6.34nm)
3. Allow 6 inches (152mM) benlnd parnel
4. weigh - 12 oz, or (340 g)
RELAY OUTPUTS
RATING: 2 or 4 relays; 5 Amp SPOT (form C). The contacts
are rated at 5 Amp @ 30 VDC or 5 Amp @ 250 VAC resistive
load; 1/14 HP @ 125 V1250 VAC for NC contacts and
1/1OHP. 125/250 VAC for NO contacts, inductive load.
RESET: User Select.
1. Manually at any time (via user supplied switch or front
panel ACK button). Manual reset resets all manually
resalable relays.
2. Automatically when the input passes the reset point.
FAILSAFE OPERATION: The relay colls are energized in
the non-alarm condition. In the case of a power failure, the
output relays will go to the alarm state.
AUTO INITIALIZATION: When power is applied to the
meter, the output relays will always reflect the state of the
Input to the meter.
YOUR LOCAL DISTRIBUTOR 1:
ISOLATED 4-20 mA OUTPUT SIGNAL
CALIBRATION RANGE: May be set anywhere in the range
of the meter.
OUTPUT LOOP RESISTANCE: 1500 ohms max. using an
external loop power supply. 1200 ohms max. using the builtIn loop power supply. Available for either 4-20 mA output or
signal input. but not both.
EXTERNAL LOOP POWER SUPPLY: 35 V Max.
ISOLATION: 500 VOC or peak AC, input-to-output or
input/output-to-power.
ACCURACY: ± 0.25%.
PRECISION DIGITAL CORPOR ATION
4
493 Esciin AP0135
Made in USA
Series 640 Air Velocity Transmitter
- Four field selectable ranges from 0-200 to 0-12,000 FPM
- Linear, 4-20 mA output signal
±2% accuracy at an affordable cost
-
i
'
Rugged steel NEMA
13 housing with 12"
stainless steel probe
on 6' connecting
cable. Liquid light
cable entrances.
-
2
r.
3/6
- -
'AW- k
O
TY 4
Ptnt No.
*
-
6,54A
83
The Dwyer Series 640 air velocity transmitter is ideal for
a wide range of HVAC measurement and control applications, particularly in complete building control and energy
management systems. Designed for use in reasonably
clean and dry air streams, applications include multi-point
-air velocity measurements, supply and exhaust fan tracking, industrial hygiene and clean-room systems, air pollution studies and manufacturing or process control systems.
The Series 640 brings r 2% accuracy (including linearity,
hysteresis and repeatability) to these types of demanding
applications at a surprisingly low cost. With four field selectable ranges of 0-200, 0-1000, 0-3000 and 0-12,000 FPM,
this single transmitter can be supplied off-the-shelf for a
variety of different air velocity measurement applications.
The Series 640 transmitter is easily installed with the
mounting hardware supplied, including a split flange for
securing the sensing probe in the duct. Requiring only 1824 volts AC or 22-2Z volts DC for powver and having a twowire, 4-20 mA output, electrical connections are made
quickly and easily by means of a four-wire cable to a plugin terminal block through a liquid tight cable gland. The
NEMA 13 housing is suitable for all indoor industrial,
institutional or commercial installations. An optional probe
extension is available for larger duct sizes.
The central components of the Series 640 transmitter are
the velocity and temperature sensors located in the tip of
Sflthe probe. The velocity sensor is a constant temperature
thermistor which measures the air velocity, referenced to
standard conditions, by sensing the cooling effect of the
moving air passing over the heated sensor. The power required to maintain the velocity sensor temperature, as provided by the control circuitry in the electronics package,
is a function of the air velocity. The velocity sensor is rugged enough to tolerate particulate contamination and still
provide fast response to changes in air velocity. A temperature sensor in the probe tip compensates for a wide range
of air stream temperature variations. Each transmitter is
individually calibrated at our factory in a computer controlled wind tunnel. During this calibration procedure, the
inherent non-linearity of the thermistor velocity sensor is
automatically corrected by appropriate programming of an
EPROM in a linearizer circuit of the electronics package.
SPECIFICATIONS:
GENERAL
Media: Air
Ranges: 0-200. 0-1000. 0-3000. 0-2.000
F
(field seleclaole: reterencec
to standard conditions)
ELECTRICAL
Power Suppry: 18-24 VAC. 22-28 VDC
Output signal: 4-20 mA DC
Loop Resistance: 0-300 Onms
Current Consumption:
250 mA Maximum
Warm-up Time: 3 to 5 minutes
PERFORMANCE
Zero Output: 4 mA
Full Span Output: 20 mA
ACCURACY: (% of F.S.)
0-200 fpm range
t5% @ 32-180IF
±9%0 0-32CF or 18O-200OF
0-100 03000 or 0-12,000 fpm ranges
±2% @ 32-180OF
±6% @ 0-32 or 180-200OF
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temoeralure Ranges:
- Dry Air Stream 0 o 200 ?
- Operating - 32 to 160'F
- Storage - 0 to 200"F
MECHANICAL
Weight: 3 lbs.
tincludes probe and cable)
Proce length: 12 insertion depth
Cao.e length: 6 feet
Range adlustmenl:
protected switches
Durable thermal velocity and temperature sensors are mounted within
Vi" dia. stainless steel probe with etched 12" insertion depth scale.
Simple field ranging
by means of circuit
board mounting DIP
switch. Easy electrical connections
made by means of
tour-wire cable with
plug-in terminal
connector.
SRernedial Systemsinc.
56 Leonard Street
Foxboro, MA 02035-2929
(508) 543-1512
FAX (508) 543-7485
WARRANTY CONDITIONS:
This warranty is a limited warranty;
notwithstanding.
anything in the warranty
Implied warranties for particular purpose and
merchantability shall be limited'to the duration of the express
warranty.
The manufacturer expressly disclaims and excludes any
damages for breach of any
of consequential or incidental
liability
express or implied warranty.
Remedial System's equipment is warranted as to workmanship,
material, and performance when properly installed, used, and cared
Should any part or parts prove defective within twelve
for.
(12)
months from date of purchase, it will be replaced F.O.B.
destination without charge, provided the part (or parts) is
returned transportation charges prepaid. Exception to this
warranty will be hoses and pump seals; these items will be subject
to the same warranty except for a period of six
date of purchase.
Remedial
System's
equipment is
warcanted as
(6) months
from
to workmanship,
material, and performance when properly installed, used, and cared
represent actual
for, provided that the original design criteria
field data at the time of operation.
No allowance will be made for labor, transportation, or other
charges incurred in the replacement or repair of defective parts by
the customer. This warranty does not apply when damage is caused
by sand or abrasive materials pumped with the fluids,
handling, improper
improper voltage supply, careless
improper well design,
stray electric
interference,
lightning,
installation,
or due to
substances or factors that were unknown to Remedial Systems at the
time of purchase.
Buyer shall have no claim, and no product or
part shall be deemed defective by reason of failure to resist
erosive or corrosive action, nor for problems resulting from
buildup of material within the equipment.
This warranty applies
only to seller's
equipment,
under use
and service in accordance with the seller's written instructions,
recommendations, and ratings for installation,
operating and
maintenance, and service.
All claims for defective products,
parts, or work under this warranty must be made in writing
immediately upon discovery and in any event within one year of
purchase.
06/93
REMEDIAL
SYSTEMS,
INC.
GROUNDWATER TREATMENT AND
SOIL VAPOR EXTRACTION SYSTEM
CONTROL PANEL SUBMiT TAL
TO: ENVIRONMENTAL
PRODUCTS
AND SERVICES
FOR: STERLING SUPPLY SITE
SYS-10-2193-MA
REMEDIAL SYSTEMS INC
56 LEONARD STREET - FOXBORO, MA 02035
TEL (508)-543-1512 * FAX. (508)-543-7485
ll
a
N-
frit
-.
in
a)O
]
-
Fo
C
115
CL
Li
-
0
N<
N in
~ rsT~I'
CA 6I
C
15(0
0
ri
3
%
<
.
S
c
cn
0,0
64,i0-i
W
Li
I.
nn
8Z
(CLi
"
-
01
<
6l
U1(o L
)
J-
C3
aa
ao
C.5
f
om0
In
Z
-
D
c-
-
L
.-
<Q
a
n
~
>~
LT
Do
ul
m
iA~ft3-
-
m
-
i
a&
Q w- F-F
RI-,
lu
.
zTi
=Sl
=
7-)LL,
-
-
I
=aci~j
w
Lf~P
I9
0aa
-r
0CL
El
a
-
>
5j
9o><&Nl
e
INPUT POWER: (Refer to "BACK PLATE" drawings)
Controller enclosure:
115 VAC, single phase, 60 cycles
Motor starter enclosure:
Source #1 - 230VAC, single phase, 60 cycles
Source #2 - 230VAC, three phase, 60 cycles
Source #3 - 230VAC, three phase, 60 cycles
Due to varying local electrical codes and the varying distances between the main
circuit breaker panel and the LRS-103, the licensed electrician must size the input power
conductors.
Power to the control panel should be fed from dedicated circuit breakers.
Due to uncontrollable transient electrical spikes, RSI recommends surge suppression
on all electrical power feeds.
OUTPUT POWER: (Refer to diagram "BACK PLATE")
Well pump #h. 230VAC, single phase, 60 cycles (4A)
Well pump #2: 230 VAC, single phase, 60 cycles (4A)
Transfer pump #1: 230VAC, three phase, 60 cycles (2.8A)
Transfer pump #2: 230VAC, three phase, 60 cycles (2.8A)
Transfer pump #3: 230VAC, three phase, 60 cycles (3.6A)
Blower motor #1: 230VAC, three phase, 60 cycles (15.2A)
Blower motor #2: 230VAC, three phase, 60 cycles (22A)
Due to varying local electrical codes and the varying distances between the main
circuit breaker panel and the LRS-103, the licensed electrician must size the output power
conductors.
~00~
75
LJ
7
L,
w
Li
CK
L<
I- O
Li
i
w w
Iu
L
clEDU.
Li,
Cu
L,
4cm
F-7f C
MLI
Cua
N
'C
L]
N MI
ZI
C
o
4 <u
LAA
4
LID
Z
r
LI Li
LI
OCc
47
a4
La
_J
_J
m
II
n o
<E<
z7WU
Li T)I
4Q
Z~
1
L'
:3E1
C
_
_
_
_
_
_
)t
x:)FLiJx
CU
ae
_
CIL_
T~~
_
a-_
0
-l
coQ
_
_
_
_
_
U,
-
Li(I
_
0 D.
0 i
-
_
co
we
Q' -
"I mi
c__________
1
(UW
coV~
0l -it?0E
a-
)]D.
__m
io
O
i
<
W
m
-i
0
0j
inrnSla-MY)f
--
s
jbvds
-(D
(Dv,-e
L.I =
PH 0
~3,d
C)~~
iuw
LLJU
.ME
o
l
0
U*
0
9-0
ICi1ol®0~o~
r>
|
-
Lj
_
)Y-
0
A)(U
1
lidYSt
__
mb~aluuu
Q-
0
eeI
r
0
31WL
<
blvi
uss
9
,n
T
0
-
C(
W8
a~~d&WSQ
1
G
-
_
9
-A
- - -G---
Q_
G|
I'm
fm
0
0~
~
C
2-
L
-3
I 3N1
as
_
z
3 m as
(_)D
4
Sdmas
l-
13Nis
Ho
0
0]
Jl
- --
-T
i r
re
0
z
n28
" I
0
M62
MI
- 'x
Liu
m
rT
6o
..
z
<
Iz
1.mJ
|-,CZ"
z
7
U]
U] U]
Li
LL
Z
L
i-
ZK
13
U
F-
Ij
c_
-i
j
II.
1
rT-T--1
z
I- Q
Li
CQ
Cim
LO
a-
C
r
4"
0~
0
z
zz
zz
CA'
C
U'
sm
I
I
CA
IA
LI
C
7-
C
U'
1C
:
0
-z
I
z:
LI
C
Us
C/i
LI
Li
CL
z:
2
cli
CU
Li
LZ
a-
2
:'r,-.
W4O
C
0
7L
z
K~
Z
N
C
Izz_
Z
U-
GD
H
I~I
10.1
17
9
E
FO
r0
Ed
EA
@
@@ @@@
In-
®
CA
2:
.4-v
-
GD
Li
V)
_
CA
n
rt
Li
E
M
CN
z
C
it)
wV)Q
mas-
m'
L-
C
LU
a-
oZ
C
z
Cu
e.
14]
-J
1...
2'
z
Z
O
<[
Z-
C2
D
>-
D-
CU
C
Ci
-
Z
ED
LJ
(4
El IIU71PDI E
cob-
!>
Ld
D,
I
@1@@@ 9@@ @@@@
on
I
Sr
1)
-_
F-
Li
Li
I0D
C-)
FmI
C
ci
ru
L5i
I3aVdS
F
(S
3;VdS
3jvds
c3C,
I- 0
>x
-M
LI)
LIl
:2J
Li
Zi
3dVdS
Cu
3dudS
T3adS
(
S
iD
0N009
-I
&IDI~
9
U
rJIN]
3
D13* l
vV190
I
GNin-
j2
1X0/N
)S
(/N)
2-SdG
[0/N)
-Sd
DOV-El)
(HIES 0 lSU 3dd
flNnnf?4
T11I10
ONfOdl Thviil]
1HJIIAS
N]I
D
-
I
LI
I
k-v
Y
0
71
9
I
&18
AJN3d3
O/N/HDI
Li
69
g;
VJ10
l / N) 3S
>1V13D
&Y
-
-
6-I
Z
C
0
D{:18
I- ditJS
UN-181
(0
[0/N) IVO
38_IDIH
A
o
Afdl,
d3
IF
(>k~
-----
rm
_N3 __W
L-
F1NlOIdg
W®
0
C)
1
WIN 2'1NB-lsoNI
IlN)NGF
A ~ llIN
K
(9'9 vi
(37 nl
I fl U)dr
[AN-3r03VTl]j
(FUN)
P911] NWdl
ocflflNI
([]/N) P9)U 3] fddfl0
NNV(G0)dN
k-U?)
-(
LII
'
0
w
&
Li
-I
(u
-
-
-
-
(AA
IW
cu
I
1
--*-
-u
o
L
4
n,
EDa
x
L
w
a-
C o J Z,
CA
A
-
JV_> r
C->
-
v
-L
ED
C
Lv
J
(4Z-
-
AU~
27
z
L
Li
D
AZr
~~
_ J
LJLJ
,wi
Lbb_L, _L b L _ L
m
1
Do
L
1_
)-
eL .
L-L
7S
L i
Ld
dt
.J
z-)
W LL
I7VVtLt7t6Vj0SI IS
z
._
_J
_J
zLz
_
'un
U .- L L,
33
_
o Li
J
Ln
L LtL
E9 IS
LB
4_
.
L
.
z
L
WL 1 L
S 99- LS GS GS 05
aan
-V
(A
2a
C
z
END-
~S-d
y
L.-J
n--
37 0
L
ld
5
(D3
-
]NL
a
D(
<
47
a
LLA
z
s
F-
Li
0
[]N
Lx.
u
Mo
C
i'-~a
Lr
C(UG
~r
-
0
_
__]N
3
0
ax
2
L
v)
j~00/0 <0 0 00 0 00
iL
L:3
E
(Nt'
I
0
>
,
zC
c3
ruN
Cu
L'i
ta
V)
0*
a0
<IC
-- IJ
..
0
",
0Li
Li
011
Fv
Ln
LIj
0
~1
LD
Li
0
U
El
L)
nCt
L)
Lul
ci
.13
CL
I
Lil
(-1
0
Li
ED
00
Cu
C
Lni
5
0
LQ &
0
<C
-1123
?3v
-
o103
+jd~II
{
0D
0
0D
WN] ]YIIflSK
Ia 23407 18
I-2
C
0
2 ry nIJd
o
a -3
dnd SNV
L
CRC
--
--
---
2" dkind stiv
01
1103D JlYIS _I2
-
0D
i
1'!4
N
,
NI
d ifld 7 1 20A
Ivd
wNd -H3
-71
I LW
Cu
un
YE7N
I IN I 7
K.
i#
I NIT
z
V)
L2.
-_J
ads
G'
V
12 SNV,'i L.
I#n
1102i2
____
K
K
<I
n3N
I NI
-
-K
01
I
IU3N
SN i I -IN
1 I I
nd
1-Sn
-
I
0-
C2-
E' I
NIIIno
z
LLJI
]
I
-r
Lj
e_
Li
CLJ
-
Li
LiLi F-f)I
< (I-
LiL
Z)
L Li Lme Li
21
[-13
ak(Y)
r-
e
u JLd
D<
ZL Ll
iJ
Cl) Li:D
<L E
Ld
'1E
La
Li
_j) L'
cc
M
J
3i
Dccc
M cm
V)
C C)
7
C3t
I
r
6
IC
Li
cci
C)
H
LI)
[a[H
'~it~:
U
A
Li
9 [I'
C--n
Li
b
C
it:
co
-I--i
CA]
L!~>
j
~~cc
-i-fl
Carl
II - t-
'C) -J
1
-J
Li
~Li
nl~~
6
C
en
<C
z
w
Dr
sC
Li
Ct 1/
C)
C) Li
Ni
F-
Li
Car
F(/2
0
Li
F-
Li
*
21
-~2
-I-.C)
>21
0~
II, ID
z Li
-'N
21 i~
Li~
VA
-j
Li
0
Lu
-
(AC)i
0
1--
C-
L 0 0
LT
<E
Zr
C EJE-
<b-k-k
0
'a04
CD
C
C0
0
(U
0
0
C-
LD
m-
CEu1
aD-A
ConGo
Cu m N
L
Li)
0A
U) L
COO
kClO
0 Lu
A 0
0 0~
0 0 0
vj
(An
S
0
kC
0
0
Li
Lu
0
0
0
NU(1) T Ln 0 F
V ( ( (A A(
11
L
L3
Li L L L
Crz CCD C C CC
LiJ
0 0
SC
.20
Li
0
O
M3-3
31114L
,
n
I 31w 0102
&-41
1'"
,
F
I.
30C
9"E
o
d3Ad
13N3]-N
s
10
3
321]4~
333N1
2>--
- 2
2
411]
W
1341
- Y rt"'
C
3-1
2
wAd
s
VPJNA002
MlD
1T
2-
341n
103
2
BVAOF2
B~
U
-J
.-
am aosIN
p
7Th
Q
2-nJ1
-,f
2
.
~S
i
-J
'--I
- n3N
|3Kj
d ,S _
n3N
-
--
o
0le
01
07
MDD
23J
.35
.2.
i2
2)41
--
0
a
3 M -302
id
3-3
3%11. 315
4ST 2113W
131I/I
1)
Lii
GE
'-ii
H-
LU
<1~
(7)
GE
I
W
m
z
Remedial SystemsInc.
56 Leonard Street
Foxboro, MA 02035-2929
(508) 543-1512
FAX (508) 543-7485
WARRANTY CONDITIONS:
This warranty is a limited warranty; anything in the warranty notwithstanding. Implied warranties
for particular purpose and merchantability shall be limited to the duration of the express
warranty. The manufacturer expressly disclaims and excludes any liability of consequential or
incidental damages for breach of any express or implied warranty.
Remedial System's equipment is warranted as to workmanship, material, and performance when
properly installed, used, and cared for. Should any part or parts prove defective within twelve (12)
months from date of purchase, it will be replaced F.O.B. destination without charge, provided the
part (or parts) is returned transportation charges prepaid. Exception to this warranty will be hoses
and pump seals; these items will be subject to the same warranty except for a period of six (6) months
from date of purchase.
Remedial System's equipment is warranted as to workmanship, material, and performance when
properly installed, used, and cared for, provided that the original design criteria represent actual field
data at the time of operation.
No allowance will be made for labor, transportation, or other charges incurred in the replacement
or repair of defective parts by the customer. This warranty does not apply when damage is caused by
sand or abrasive materials pumped with the fluids, lightning, improper voltage supply, careless
handling, improper installation, improper well design, stray electric interference, or due to substances
or factors that were unknown to Remedial Systems at the time of purchase. Buyer shall have no
claim, and no product or part shall be deemed defective by reason of failure to resist erosive or
corrosive action, nor for problems resulting from buildup of material within the equipment.
This warranty applies only to seller's equipment, under use and service in accordance with the
seller's written instructions, recommendations, and ratings for installation, operating and
maintenance, and service. All claims for defective products, parts, or work under this warranty must
be made in writing immediately upon discovery and in any event within one year of purchase
06/93
HReniedot S ystems.' Inc,
AIR FLLOV PROBES
56 Leorird Sireet
Ph (508 543-1512
cx6bro MA r035
FAX: (508) 543-7485
Druwng Nome: SKID IMOUNTED SOIL GAS REWVERY UNIT
For: SYS-10-2193-MA
Drn by BJ (BAB)
Dote 12/3/93
Rev;
SCALE: NTS
Fte None: SGR-1153
CCNTROLLER VILL BE MOUNTED IN A NEMA
4 ENCLOSURE.
PRESSLRE SVICH OR VACLN±1 SWITCH VILL
CAUSE SYSTEM SHUTDOVN. POWER DOWN
FILTERS
TO RESET.
MOISTURE SENSOR WILL SHUT DOWN SYSTEM
AND OPEN SOLENOID VALVE. SYSTEM
WILL RESTART AFTEP 10 MIN. DELAY.
ALL SWITCHES. CNTACTS, RELAYS. ETC. IN
CONTROL PANEL VILL BE NEMA RATED.
AIR FLOW PRUBES VILL SUPPLY A 4-20 mA
TO
VAPOR
PHASE
CARBON
SIGNAL TO A DIGITAL DISPLAY VHICH VILL
BE CALIBPATED TO READ IN CFM EACH PROBE
MlAY BE SELECTED FOR DISPLAY THROUGH A
4 POSITION
MISTURE
KNOCKOUT DRI
TEMP GAlU
WNTRUL
SWITCH ON CWTROL PANEL
VS-1; SET FUR 30' 5
PS-5 SET FOR 10' SVC
PANEL
VAC RL
\I'Iv'E
1
I
EZLENOID VALVE
230 V. N/O
SYSTEM MOUNTED EN A 3'x5'
CARBON STEEL SKID
12'
BLOWER
-
-
LRS-103
The LRS-103 is a multi-purpose panel capable of controlling up to eight (8) loads
depending upon system configuration. When the panel is used with it's proper input sensors, the
LRS-103 can control a variety of pumps, such as water only pumps, total fluids pumps, transfer
pumps, and product recovery pumps, as well as various other loads.
The LRS-103 controller features 8 inputs and 8 outputs, and is programmable in Boolean
Logic, which allows it to be utilized to perform a variety of site specific functions associated with
the remediation process.
Your controller has been programmed according to system requirements. Please consult
the factory if any system modifications are desired.
Specifications
SPower
00000000
0
0
+12VDC +/- 5%
.5 AMPS
0
0
O)UTPUJTS
+5VDC +/- 5%
@ .5 AMPS
I
LOGIC INPUTS:
All inputs are optically isolated and internally pulled up to IOVDC. All eight (8) inputs
are internally debounced, minimum pulse width is 25ms. LED indicators are active low.
INPUT SIGNALS:
Inputs are active when they are connected via a low impedance switch to digital ground.
OUTPUTS:
The LRS-103 features eight (8) open collector transistor outputs - 200mA, 25VDC
maximum.
SENSOR INPUTS:
Each input on the LRS-103 sends out a low voltage intrinsically safe signal that may be
interfaced with a variety of input sensors. When an input is shorted to digital ground by the
means of a switch closure, an LED on the front of the LRS-103 will light.
WARNING: The LRS-103 inputs operate off of low voltage signals. Therefore the
wiring associated with these inputs should never be located in the same conduit as the high
voltage wiring. Care also should be taken in not placing these wires close together unless the low
voltage wires and the shield is connected to earth ground. If these precautions are not observed,
induced voltages from the high voltage wiring may cause the LRS-103 to receive false input
signals.
SENSOR CLEANING:
Due to the harsh environment that these sensors are forced to operate in, a regular
cleaning of these sensors is vital for the proper operation of the system. Remedial Systems
recommends that for the first month of operation of the system, that all sensors should be cleaned
on a weekly basis. During that period, the operator should observe the sensors to determine when
cleaning is necessary.
WARNING:
If all the sensors are not cleaned on a regular basis, Remedial Systems will
not be held liable to any damage that may occur,
INPUT POWER: (Refer to diagram "BACK PLATE")
230 VAC, three phase, 60 cycles
Due to varying local electrical codes and the varying distances between the main
circuit breaker panel and the LRS-103, the licensed electrician must size the input power
conductors.
Power to the control panel should be fed from a dedicated circuit breaker.
Due to uncontrollable transient electrical spikes, RSI recommends surge suppression
on all electrical power feeds.
OUTPUT POWER: (Refer to diagram "BACK PLATE")
Solenoid - 230VAC, single phase, 60 cycles
Moisture sensor - 11 5VAC, single phase, 60 cycles, (via internal control transformer)
Blower motor - 230VAC, three phase, 60 cycles
Due to varying local electrical codes and the varying distances between the main
circuit breaker panel and the LRS-103, the licensed electrician must size the output power
conductors.
en
7
60
Li
CA
In
6-
0
L1
V)
en
to
0
0
a- Z LJ
-j
z
Li
C4~
-) LionLL
D'
>
<
'LD
LJ
GIW
Of
0
fu :0
> Crrr
if
or
r
'Li
Lia
Li
Li
i w
d<
L-i
<n
-C
0(1
C- ~
ID
C
'I
a
F.T
101
0O
CD
no
LF
Kr
IC->
S
U])
71
-jl
ii
Li
----1Y
1 m
sm[----rr
rn
n
Hr
._J
LiJ
CJ
2a
o..
-J
lIE
Li
m
ru
Cu
ZLi
CIC
..
LI 73r
N1
0
Li
G
LJ Li
-I
d Z11 7Jcf
7
IF
i
-
0iZ
Li
L
N
L
0
E-D
U
Lu m
N.
N
Ci
-0
cU
1
o Cu
-0z
I-oz"
LiLi M
0101010'0101010L0e0e0e0e000000 0 0
10 11 12 13 | 4
000
15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
000000
I{ee
dM e
23 24
25 26
27 28 29
000
CF-N
-jcnr
b
-- l01
~~
9
o
0
i<F
0
~
-
G G
\
1
N>l'
2 IN
-n
OU
3Nk1
o
ONO-3
ID C <I
0
0
F-
Q
c0I
Do
ot
2 IlN -
0
0
0
o
ND-3
I 3NI1
0
<L
(D
(
3
r
g
O
q,
2 NIT
CD-
j, 4
O-
0
.i
z
in
n N
7i
z o
r_j
13
w
LotoO
uLi U
sx
0
(A
-J
C
r
IL O
Li
o
Cl
i0
zi
-- -
12*0
L<
-
LiL
U-
m
(A
c>
L i
0
c
Li
M
-J
L4-n
Va
Fiz
- Q.
-J
Li
N0
-j
In
C
ass
0
-J
Li
Li
C
~
4
Cu
0
CI
(A
\
/
'Li
A
Dz
a -~
'dir
-
Air VeIociW Measurement
Introduction
In air conditioning, heating and ventilating work, it is
helpful to understand the techniques used to determine air
velocity. In this field, air velocity (distance traveled per unit
of time) is usually expressed in feet per minute (f.p.m.).
By multiplying air velocity by the cross section area of a
duct, you can determine the air volume flowing past a point
in the duct per unit of time.Volume flow is usually measured
in cubic feet per minute (c.f.m.).
Velocity or volume measurements can often be used with
engineering handbook or design information to reveal
proper or improper performance of an airflow system. The
same principles used to determine velocity are also valuable in working with pneumatic conveying, flue gas flow
and process gas systems. However, in these fields the common units of velocity and volume are sometimes different
from those used in air conditioning work.
To move air, fans or blowers are usually used. They work
by imparting motion and pressure to the air with either a
screw propeller or paddle wheel action. When force or pressure from the fan blades causes the air to move, the moving
air acquires a force or pressure component in its direction
of motion due to its weight and inertia. Because of this, a
flag or streamer will stand out in the air stream. This force
is called velocity pressure. It is measured in inches of water
column (w.c.) or water gage (w.g.). In operating duct systems, a second pressure is always present. It is independent
of air velocity or movement. Known as static pressure, it
acts equally in all directions. In air conditioning work, this
pressure is also measured in inches w.c.
In pressure or supply systems, static pressure will be positive on the discharge side of the fan. In exhaust systems, a
negative static pressure will exist on the inlet side of the
fan. When a fan is installed midway between the inlet and
discharge of a duct system, it is normal to have a negative
static pressure at the fan inlet and positive static pressure
at its discharge.
Total pressure is the combination of static and velocity pressures, and is expressed in the same units. It is an important
and useful concept to us because it is easy to determine and,
although velocity pressure is not easy to measure directly,
it can be determined easily by subtracting static pressure
from total pressure. This subtraction need not be done
mathematically. It can be done automatically with the instrument hook-up.
Sensing Static Pressure
For most industrial and scientific applications, the only air
measurements needed are those of static pressure, total
pressure and temperature. With these, air velocity and volume can be quickly calculated.
To sense static pressure, six types of devices are commonly
used. These are connected with tubing to a pressure indicating instrument. Fig. 1-A shows a simple thru-wall static
pressure tap. This is a sharp, burr-free opening through a
duct wall provided with a tubing connection of some sort on
the outside. The axis of the tap or opening must be perpendicular to the direction of flow. This type of tap or sensor is
used where air flow is relatively slow, smooth and without
turbulence. If turbulence exists, impingement, aspiration
or unequal distribution of moving air at the opening can
reduce the accuracy of readings significantly.
Fig. I-B shows the Dwyer No.A-308 Static Pressure Fitting.
Designed for simplified installation, it is easy to install,
inexpensive, and provides accurate static pressure sensing
in smooth air at velocities up to 1500 f.p.m.
Fig.1-C shows a simple tube through the wall. Limitations
of this type are similar to wall type 1-A.
Fig. 1-D shows a static pressure tip which is ideal for applications such as sensing the static pressure drop across
industrial air filters and refrigerant coils. Here the probability of air turbulence requires that the pressure sensing
openings be located away from the duct walls to minimize
impingement and aspiration and thus insure accurate readings. For a permanent installation of this type, the Dwyer
No. A-301 or A-302 Static Pressure Tip is used. It senses
static pressure through radially-drilled holes near the tip
and can be used in air flow velocities up to 12,000 f.p.m. .
Fig. 1-E shows a Dwyer No. A-305 low resistance Static
Pressure Tip. It is designed for use in dust-laden air and
for rapid response applications. It is recommended where
a very low-actuation pressure is required for a pressure
switch or indicating gage - or where response time is critical.
Under field conditions, air turbulence in a duct or plenum
often makes it impossible to quickly install and align a rigid
static pressure sensor to take accurate readings. Under
these circumstances, the Dwyer Trail-Tail* Static Pressure
Sensor (Fig. 1-F),can be quickly inserted through a small
hole in the duct and will trail into automatic alignment with
the air stream. The pressure sensing holes in this device are
thus presented at a 90* angle to actual air flow assuring
quick, consistent, accurate readings.
Measuring total pressure and velocity pressure
In sensing static pressure we make every effort to eliminate
the effect of air movement. To determine velocity pressure,
it is necessary to determine these effects fully and accurately. This is usually done with an impact tube which faces
directly into the air stream. This type of sensor is frequently called a "total pressure pick-up" since it receives
the effects of both static pressure and velocity pressure.
bD'igm the tip'properly. When the Pitot tube is co
Tglined. the pessure indication will be maximun
cause accurate readigs
ute
a
annot be taken ina turbulent
theui
be
ouldbe
Leasureme
___
U1WArt
STATIC Amq
f.O rOR
-
*e
Ta7iL fttIR
esoms
G TYS OF PRESSRE MEAS
-otap
How to take traverse readings
p
eal sita ons
e velocityof the air
riiff'th
crcs "sgien$detF
TOtTIM
no
wL
EIid
oTAT VSoA{WV
0
tip;The
pressure
Spessur
Sconnei
I
W1
'velocity
EcI~an
oUCT
I
FIG.4 - TRAVERSE
GMROUND
ANDSCUARE
O0CTAREAS
K
L
LEtcentern t iequial'ciicezitii
as At lea
,hould be 'iken alonswoiater's:in'eci
Summum of 1i and amanmumof 6rea
1~Ee6~if0s~,eqYiiingulaT areas.ifii
arEa arecalculated from individe
~'i lflw97the-94 inca
veio
FR.3 - PTOT
TUBE
SENSES
TOTAL
ANDSTATIC
PRESSURES.
PRESSURE
VELoCITY
MEASURES
MANOMETER
(IFFERENCE
BETWEEN
TOT
ALANDSTATIC
PRESSURESl.
Calculating air velocity from velocity pressure
Manometers for use with a Pitot tube are offered in a choice
of two scale types. Some are made specifically for air velocity measurement and are calibrated directly in feet per
minute. They are correct for standard air conditions: i.e.
air density of .075 lbs. per cubic foot which corresponds to
dry air at 70*F , barometric pressure of 29.92 inches Hg.
To correct the velocity reading for other than standard air
conditions, the actual air density must be known. It may be
calculated if relative humidity, temperature and barometric
pressure are known.
proportionately to the square of the flow rate. Figure 5
shows a typical filter and a curve for air flow versus resistance. Since it is plotted on logarithmic paper, it appears as
a straight line. On this curve, a clean filter which causes a
pressure drop of .50 inches w.c. would indicate a flow of
2.000 c.f.m.
Most manometer scales are calibrated in inches of water.
Using readings from such an instrument, the air velocity
may be calculated using the basic formula:
=4004.4 Vh for.075lb/ft3dry air]
h,
V d t @ 70"F, 29.92 in. Hg Baro.
J
Where:
V=Velocity in feet per minute.
h,=Velocity pressure in inches of water.
d= Density of air in pounds per cubic foot.
To determine dry air density, use the formula:
;4,
d=1.325Where:
d= Air density in pounds per cubic foot.
r Barometric (or absolute)static pressure
in inches of mercury.
T = Absolute temperature (indicated
temperature in *F plus 4600).
With dry air at 29.9 inches mercury, air velocity can be read
directly from curves on page 5 in this bulletin. For partially
or fully saturated air a further correction is required. To
save time when converting velocity pressure into air velocity, the Dwyer Air Velocity Calculator may be used. A
simple slide rule, it provides for all the factors needed to
calculate air velocity quickly and accurately. It is included
as an accessory with each Dwyer Pitot tube.
To use the Dwyer Calculator:
1. Set relative humidity on scale provided. On scale
opposite known dry bulb temperature, read correction factor.
2. Set temperatuie under barometric pressure scale.
Read density of air over correction factor established in I (above).
3. On the other side of calculator, set air density
reading just obtained on the scale provided.
4. Under Pitot tube reading (velocity pressure,
inches of water) read air velocity, feet per minute.
Determining volume flow
Once the average air velocity is known, the air flow rate in
cubic feet per minute is easily computed using the formula:
Q= AV
Where:
Q=Quantity of flow in cubic feet per minute.
A= Cross sectional area of duct in square feet.
V=Average velocity in feet per minute.
Determining air volume by calibrated resistance
Manufacturers of air filters, cooling and condenser coils
and similar equipment often publish data from which approximate air flow can be determined. It is characteristic
of such equipment to cause a pressure drop which varies
For example, assuming a manufacturer's specification for a
filter, coil, etc:
Given Flow Q (ft1 /min.) = at differential "h"
(inches w.c.)
To determine flow at other differentials the formula is:
Q, (other flows)= Q Fh h.
Where:
Q= Quantity of flow in cubic feet per minute
h=differential in inches water column
h,=differential (other flow conditions)
Dwyer Air Volume Kits No. 170VT, 171VT and 172VT are
designed specifically for this type of field test work.
Other devices for measuring air velocity
A wide variety of devices are commercially available for
measuring air velocities. These include hot wire anemometers for low air velocities, rotating and swinging vane
anemometers and variable area flowmeters.
The Dwyer No. 460 Air Meter is one of the most popular
and economical variable area flowmeter type anemometers.
Quick and easy to use, it is a portable instrument calibrated
to provide a direct reading of air velocity.
A second scale is provided on the other side of the meter to
read static pressure in inches w.e. The 460 Air Meter is
widely used to determine air velocity and flow in ducts, and
from supply and return grilles and diffusers. Two scale
ranges are provided (high and low) with calibrations in
both f.p.m. and inches w.c.
To check accuracy
Use only devices of certified accuracy. All anemometers and
to a lesser extent portable manometers should be checked
regularly against a primary standard such as a hook gage
or high quality micromanometer. If in doubt return your
Dwyer instrument to the factory for a complete calibration
check at no charge.
ART
-
-1-LI~~~
P
*
.
1 dl
S
r'
424
& Q u a A 4 4 44 &
6
- >
..
4
toiti
r.
4
4
'A
I~4
-y
It
4&A
'A'
-4$
a
-
-At
" -ki
t 1:
144
1
41
4
_
I
,Ii
4 Pt
d
4
C
rf
42
1
-
f-
-6
-a-
4
a
44%4
-Iitiw
~
a
4 Iw r
u
4'
'4
-w
4
lit
-4
I
<'"
3J
4 1
~
A
I -
'A~ 4)
t
14.14!L
4
A.
V4A4
A1L4
4 -,4 4.4
.
I
4
4
-4
-4
-4
--
-
-
t
-
-
-L-I-
-
<I
-L2L
jji'
r AF.I
Al hi ~1-Z
:~l -at-dI'4I~
41~l J-31-i:
-i
4 }P
1
Ist.I 1-{.'1i12Pi~~
-I&fY
I
t!1
A
a~
r
t;j.~[4rj'j
34
7
Aplp
4~F4&t~L~VAT{
z 3
t
-L
74vl
i
1T
Till
a *11
a
RI 2.ldVI t l
Ia4
*
rr-vrr
It-P
-?
4/1
It
Th
44
WV
t
-at
SDX
~j
.
SI
de
A
1-trt-rw
2I
a
-g#g
-9-i--~P-+-4-I-4-9---b-+4=-.-4-~J.
4Chd-..&-..
t-tL---rI~t--rHv't*- aL-I--r-4tL-4--fl~tLL4--u4--ttzL-I
q-+r9--+-44-4-4-+4~-4-4tS~S-.JcI~.L...tn
T1ItTT1PtI*~
-'
I)
-
T
At4
*2i
-r
U
0
2t-4--{4-1 es~§7
-
-
-
tLA1 t -tz$4
~A3J
-t
W-
fL
o yF
a b%|-2) .4 4
MOISTURE SEPARATOR INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Thank you for purchasing an EG&G Rotron MS series moisture
separator. When installed and maintained properly, this
separator will effectively and efficiently remove moisture and
particulates from the airstream. To insure good results, please
take the time to read these instructions before starting the
installation of your moisture separator.
Installation
Before installation remove the protective cardboard packaging and
the cable ties from the screen assembly inside the unit. Figure
1 shows the moisture separator in a typical soil venting set-up.
It is attached to the system'piping with flexible couplings.
This minimizes the stress incurred by rigid system piping, and
allows easy removal for maintenance purposes. The connections
should be airtight, but not sealed with an adhesive.
The
separator will only work in an upright position as shown.
Typical Vapor Extraction System
AGAUGE
INUNE
FILTE A
FLOI.
VAPOR EXTRAC7ION
SYSTE M
TO TREATMENT
SYSTEMS
FIGURE
Note:
1
A moisture separator is not a substitute for an inline air
filter. A Rotron inline filter should be used to remove
particles that pass through the separator.
The relief valve should be adjusted before using the moisture
separator.
First back off of the relief valve adjuster until it
can easily be pushed in. Then while measuring the motor current
adjust the valve until the motor current is 90% of the Max Blower
Amps printed on the nameplate. Once adjusted the relief valve
setting must be fixed.
I
.r
Turn off the~init and remove-the relief
valvyeassembly.
Then use a center punch to peen the relief valve
jadjustment nut into the slot of -the relief valve stem.
This is
to prevent'the -valve fro'm losing"its adjustment.
Finally,
reinstall the valve into the piping.
several draining options are available to automatically remove
Contact your local representative
the-liquid.-fromathe separator.
foriore information.
',
.7-
Appropriate steps should be taken to prevent the unit from
reezing in the Wintertime.
Operation
moisture-laden air enters the separator through the tangential
inlet.
Cyclonic action removes the moisture from the airstream
-- and allows the air to discharge through the top of the separator.
.,When the separator is full the float valve shuts off the airflow
through the separator, and the relief valve opens to limit the
vacuum of the blower.
KTo drain the separator, turn off the blower and open the ball
valve at the bottom of the separator. Caution: The liquid
contained in the separator should be analyzed before it is
released back into the environment.
hazardous waste in
It may be considered
certain geographical areas,
and require
special treatment/disposal. Once the liquid is drained, the unit
can be reset by turning the blower back on.
Maintenance
This MS series moisture separator has been designed to require
minimal maintenance. During normal operation a layer of sludge
may build up on the bottom of the separator.
As necessary the
top assembly of the moisture separator should be removed and the
inside cleaned out with water. Keeping the inside clean will
prevent the valve from becoming clogged with sediment. The
relief valve should be inspected upon emptying the separator.
should move freely when pressed.
It
OUTUNE AND MOUNTING DRAWINGS
PACE 3
A
C
D
WPUT
LAC
t
a
0
E
DC OUTPUT
ow (OPT)
.188 DA MTC. HOLES ('6
0
INCH*
A 1900
B )8.000
CC
C [ 0.50
D 487
nr
228.60
203.20
20
12O
25
19078
E
1
)
2$Ci
-2
FUSE AT: 2.0/7,0 AMP$ FOR 100-120/''20-740 Vt-
63.5
3.34
:3
OUTUNE AND MOUNTING DRAWiNGS
PAGE 4
CC CASE
W. 7 LWs.
T
c
v
DE
o
C
H-
AC
MPUT
a
'tP(OPT)
0
.188 OAT.
HoLES (16L)
FUSE AT: 2.0/1.0 AMPS FOR 100-120/220-2 40 VAC
HCCS12: 3.0/1.5 AdS FOR 100-120/220-2 40 VAC
I.
TOTAL FLUIDS PROBE:
THEORY OF OPERATION:
The Total Fluids Probe is a normally open three float probe that is capable of determining the
difference between water and air, so that is can control a total fluids electric or pneumatic pump.
The two lower floats are normally wired in series so that if a float sticks due to mineral build up on
the probe, the second float will assure that the pump will turn off.
WARNING: This probe should not be used in a well that contains product that may damage
sensitive cleaning equipment, unless special precautions have been taken.
PROBE CLEANING:
Due to the harsh environment that these probes are forced to operate in, a regular cleaning of
these sensors is vital for the proper operation of the system. Remedial Systems recommends that
for the first month of operation of the system, that all sensors should be cleaned on a weekly basis.
During that period, the operator should observe the sensors to determine when cleaning is
necessary.
WARNING: If all the sensors are not cleaned on a regular basis, Remedial Systems will not be
held liable to any damage that may occur.
cc
-j
Li
Li
IL
CA
hi
:3t
>u2
Li
r
Li)i
zi
~
LU-
D
0
>- n
C>
20 I
Li
LiJ
if
CD
Lx
ox
-A
_
m
Li
0
_
-u
--F-c
E
,I_-Q
O
Z
a/
i
J
w o Zc
rC
s
Li
LJ
w
m
u
"- FL
I(-3
I--L Q_
dra
U-
(7)
LI
U-
-zzL 3
-
Li
F- 0tuA
zC
zI
L_
(u CA ]
Z.3
,
S2
0
zD
0
=D
nCA
I
Ucc
Lb
:3
IILJI
-1
i
'sJ
C
7-
M z
CA
LI
CL
-0
'i
CA
~LiU
3]
I-
C
L- c- El m
C-A
]
c
U)
o
5
L- (-)
4>
m
I-
oT
Wo
!,
Li
-Li
D
u
a_
CDE
01Z
-Et>2L
NCL
8L
<Ego
A-
LLLi
U_
a~
[I
'~cC
z
TM
E
0
Li
--
Li
P
ap
Li'
a
-'I
&
LiJ
f:zi
UC
Li
0
N-
-A
KU
FLI
H-
I(if
Ita_
Di
H'II
ED
-J
U-
0
0
U-
CDI
-U
EA
-i
11111111 IIItIIII'''III
-J
bullet n
#4,
0
-Y
Construction
L
I"
I
mill
I
I
Application
Designed to house electrical and electronic
controls, instruments, and components in
areas which may be regularly hosed down or
are otherwise very wet. Suitable for use in
dairies, breweries, and similar installations
Also suitable for outdoor applications
(optional drip shield is recommended)
4k
116 gauge steel bodies and 14 gauge doors
on all sizes through 24.00 x 24.00;
remaining (larger) sizes are 14 gauge
* Seams continuously welded and ground
smooth, no holes or knockouts
* Door and body stiffeners in larger
enclosures for extra rigidity
Rolled tip around three sides of door and
Zeiisides of.eicl6 e opening excludes .
liquids aqd contaminants
* Stainless steel door clamps on three sides
of door for watertight seal
- Door removed by pulling stainless steel
continuous hinge pin
- Hasp and staple provided for padlocking
* Data. pocket is high-impact thermoplastic
' Oil-resistant door gasket attached with
oil-resistant adhesive and held in place with
steel retaining strips
* Collar studs provided for mounting
optionil panels
* Grounding stud on door
Finish
ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating
inside and out over phosphatized surfaces.
Optional panels are white enamel. An
additional protective finish may be necessary
if the enclosure is located in a corrosive
uutdoo seting.-loffnai cai supply CUstom.
finishes based upon environmental
reqirements. Consult factory for details.
A-,
Accessories.
Page
Corrosion Inhibitors.................. 469
Door Stop Kit....................... 429
Drip Shield Kit.................
433
Electrical Interlocks ..... ...........
440
Enclosure Stabilizer ......
........
443
Fast Operating Clamp Assembly ........ 4 3 5
Floor Stand Kit................ ....
442
Lighting Kit. .
..........
... .426-428
Lock Kit .........................
434
Panel Support Kit ................
448
Panels (See table)
Rack Mounting Angle Kit ....... ..
473.474
Swing-Out Panel Kit ..........
...... 448
Terminal Kit Assembly ........
....
456
Window Kit ............
....
430,431
W iring Duct ................
IS..450
Need More ilnformaition?
Page
~
VCherni
R
e
493
Cross Referenceto Hinged Cover
Type 3R Medium Enclosures .. ..
388
Industry Standards.
483
e a...............
Price List ..
. ..
487
9
We can modify or customize this enclosure
toyour specS.Se pa2d O0fdr~ cfr
information
Industry Standards
NEMAIEEMAC Type 3. Type 4,
Type 12,and Type 13
UL 508 Type 4
JIC standard EGP4lt1967
CSA Type 4
IEC S29, IP66
.............................
,...
*.~
.- :.
ie(
Phone: 6 12-42 1-2240
77
I
A
SECTION Y - Y
NOTE:
K
. Large data pocket furnished ifA=30.00 (762) or more and B=20.00 (508) or more.
2. Maximum spacing between door clamps is 15.00 inches (382 millimeters).
3. Panels have flanges along sides which are more than 21 00 inches
(533 millimeters) long, except A-24P20 has flanges on two sides.
.91"
23
1.35*
.56"
.751
c25"
32PANEL
C487-4
i9
MOUNTING
FEET
I
J
SECTION Z - Z
SECTION X - X
-.............
Inch
Milimeter
''
aPy
Phone: 612-421-2240
6)-
-SFa6
dr<-
U
I
I
I
U
U
-------N
il-Sinele-Dobr TYne 4 En closures
BuljetinA-4
@ J993 Hnffrmo Fntnr
-Waf
I
Single-Dlor Type 4 Enclosures
Encure
Number
EncsurePanel
Size
AxBxC
A-16Hi2ALP
16 00x1200x6.00
A-16H16ALP
6 0
A-20H16ALP
I
- -0HU
Catalog
AxBxC
A-24H16ALP
2 0
(5
#
6
4. 0xf2.00x 00
2
A
A-24H24ALP
24.00x24.Ox6.00'
A-301-20ALP
A-30H24ALP
,5)
08
13.00xl3.00
A2PI6
.0
3.00
~6
(76)
4d
0
5
0
A-12P24
A-24P;6
21.00x1 .00
(533x330)
21.00xl7.00
21.00x21.00
27_00x17.00
5
..
(762x5O8x152)
A-30P20
30.00x24.00x6.00
(76 x6
2
0
5
1
l4x610x
.
-
, 27.00x21.00.
-A-OP24
2
52)
30
A-36P24
33.00x2L00
A-J6P32
! 300x9.00.
17.O0xl
A-16HI12BLP
t 6.092.
A-20H II6BLP
2000xl6.01x8.00
(50&x406x203)
A-20P16
A-ZOH20BLP
20.00x2O.00x8.00
(508x508x203)
A--20P20,
A-201-24BLP
20.00x24.00x8.00
( 08x61 x203)
A-24P20
A-24H20BLP.
24.00x20.Ox8.0
(6lOx5O8x2O3)
A-24H24BLP
24.00x24 00x8.00
A-24H30BLP
2 .OOxD.OOx8.0
l0x61 0x2 0 3)
76 2 3
(610x 2x 0 )
A-30H20BLP
3.OOx20.Ox8.00
(762x508x203)
A-30H24BLP
30.00x24.x8.i
A-30H30BLP
30 003
46
IL9
3
30,00x20.00x6.00
8
0
--(43
(432x330)
i)
A-24T
(
4
.. -ti2(3
9
(22 x533)
A-24P20
6. 0x 4.00x6.00
(76)
00xi
9 00 2
, x .00
5
9
300
17.0Wx3.00
2
Stiffener
Door I Body
0)
2§~dnb
(6lOx O6x15 )!,.
2
3
A.-20P16
(6 0xM6052)Y
0
(3300
I 2
5
Number
ofClamps
I..0
(610x 08x152)
3
F
x406x152)
50E5
4
-
DxE
016P2
0x9.
A-16P16
(6l0x30 xlS2)
4.OOxI6.00x6.00
24.00x20.00x6.00
6x406xl52)
(406x0
20.00xl6.00x6.00
O2M
A-24H20ALP
A-36H24ALP
(
6.OOx2O.OxdoO
.0002.0x
A-24H12ALP
40
Size
DxE
Number
(406x305x52)
6
l . 0xl .OOx6.00
A-[6H20 .AL
-
3
-
0
0
1.25 (32)
0
0
(76)
(533x432)
3.00
(76)
5
0
0
(533x533)
3.00
(76)
5
0
0
(686x432)
3.00
(76)
5
0
0
00(76
5
6
(68 x533)
8
( 38x
53 3
.
.
3.00
)
-(33.0229)
-
..
25
5
0,-
3.00
(76)
-
5
0
0
,
(32)h
4
TOA
.00
(432x30)
3.00
(76)
4
0
0
.00
(43 x42)
3.00
(76)
4
0
0'
21.00x70
(533x432)
3.00
(76)
4
0
0
A-24P20
21.Oxl7.00
( 33x432)
3.00
(76)
5
0
0
A-24P24
21.00xO00
(533x533)
300
(76)
5
0
0
2700x21.00
(686x533)
3.00
(76)
7
0
0
A-30P20
27.00, 1700
(686x432)
3.00
(76)
5
0
0
(6x61x03)
A-30P24
27,00x21.00
(686x533)
3.00
(76)
5
00x8.00
(762.762x203)
A-30P30
27.00x2 7DO
(686x686)
3.00
(76)
7
0
A-36H30BP
36.00x30,00x8 00
(914x762203)
A-42H430BLP
42.00x30.O08.00
(1067x7 2x2
A-42H36BLP
42 00x3600x8.00
(1 67x14x2
A-48H36BLP
A-601436BLP
A-20H16CLP
4
3
0
5
(
0
6
6
-A-3oP24
A-36P30
0 3
7
-7.00x
-
33 002700
39
00
2
5
A-
(838x686)
3.00
(76)
7
0
(991x686)
3.00
(76)
8
I
1
)
A-42P36
39.00x33.00
(991x838)
300
(76)
8
1
1
.OOx8.00
(1219x l14x203)
A-48P36
45.00x33.00
(43x38)
3.00
(76)
a
I
I
60.00x3600x8.0O
(1524x914x203)
A-60P36
57.00x33 00
(1448x836)
3.00
(16)
9
1
46 00 36
x
.
20 0
00
. 0xI6.00i0c.
0
)
03
9
A-42P30
.00x27
(508x406x254)%:^'-
A-20Pl6
1700x13.00
(432x330)
3.00
(76)
4
0
A-24-20CLP
24 0Ox20.00.1000
(61050Sx25i)
A-74P20
21.00x7 .00
(533x432)
300
(76)
5
0
0
A-30H24CLP
30.00x24.00x10.00
( 62x6l
A-30P24
27.00x21.00
(686x533)
3.00
(76)
S
0
0
A-36H30CLP
.36 .Ox3O.00x1000
(914x762x254)
A-36P30
3 300x27.00
(838x686)
3.00
(76)
7
0
I
A-481-30CLP
8.00x3000xl0.00
(l219x762x254)
A-48P30
45.00x27.00
{l143x686)
3.00
(76)
8
9,
I
A-48H36CLP
48.00x3600x10_00
(12J9x914x254)
A-48P36
45.00x33.00
(IM3x838)
3.00
(76)
8
I
f
A-60H36CLP
60,00x3600x10.00
(1524x914x254)
A-60P36
57.00x33.00
(448x38)
3.00
(76)
9
A-30H24DLP
3000x24.Cx 1l-00
(761x610305)
A-30P24
27.00,01.00
(686xS33)
300
(76)
S
C
0
A-36H30DLP
3
0O
xl?20
(838x686)
3.00
(76)
7
0
A 48HJ6DLP
48.00
,,l300
A-361-OFLP
36
A -481-6FLP)
48.00x36.00x1600
6
00
0
6
x3O.OOxI.00
00
6
IPanels
A-60H3264LP
68 0x)6.
Millimeter dimensions
x1 .00
()are for
7
5
0
x254)
05
( lx762x2 )
A-36P30
230,00
0
A-48P36
45.03DL3.00
( 'ISBJ)
300
(6)
8
(914x 62x346)
A-3630
33.00x27.00
(838x686)
3.00
(76)
7
0
(l2J9x914x406
A48P36
45.0I30
(IT42e838)
300
(16)
8
1
1
(1524x914x406)
A-60P36
5700.33.00
(148438)
3.00
(76)
9
I
1
(l209s9140lO)
7
0
reference onlyrdo not convert metric dimensions to inch.
must be ordered separately.Optional aluminum panels also available for moost sizes. See Accessories.
Data subject to change without notice
-
900 Ehlen Driv e
Anoka, MN 55303
INTERNAT10NAL SERIES DESCRIPTION
The INTERNAllCAL SERIES is a hig
sIppl*s designed to Operole
found worldide.
reakoAity rNe of open-kore power
from tAe wide range of AC pow
sources
CC.
This feature greatly simplifies your inventory ond service considerations
by cllwing the use of on* stondord power Yupply regardess of destination.
1NTgRNA11ONAL SERIES
Additionally, these models are designed to meet domestic and
European regulatory agency requirementi.
you plan to distribute your products worldwide. obtoining necessory
agency approvls con be grnotly sinpified by specilfyinq PO*CR-ONE. INC.
If
AP
A
INTERSAPIONAE
SERIES.
POSAS
DC POWER SUPPLIES
DRAWING
NO.
REV. L
LI
A N DATA51281
SPECIFICATIONS AND APPLICAT10NI DATA
FFATURFS
VOLTAGE/CURRENT RATING CHART
- VDE transformer Construction
- Full roted to 50C
- Remote sense - most outputs
- ±.05% regulotion.
- T.C. burned-in to MIL-883 Lev. 8 - UL recognized/CSA certified
SINCLE OUTPUi
I
+
+
+
+
12
8
1.0
C
2-4
4.8
6.0
5.1
4.5
3.6
'~
3.0.
---
r-
15 1
1.5
1.0 or 0.E
1
.04 or 1.0 or 08
0" or
Li or Q3h
Q.
HAD15-0.4-A
1.7
88824-1.2-A
8B8512-A
HCC5-6/0VP-A
HCC15-3-A
HCC24-2.4-A
HCC512-A
3.0
or
-0.7 or 1.7 or 1.
1_
0.9
o;
1.2
09
6.0
3.4 or 3.C
6.0 5.5
HDO15-5-A
TRIPLE OUTPUTS
, ,
2J=
3.0
5.0
HTAA-1.6W-A
HKAA-40W-
A
HCAA-60W-A
HCBS-75W-A
-21
1.8Ir
2.4
CP131-A
Q4 or
H848-0.5-A
U
+48V
+120V
0.5
-
.0,4
+180V
El
3.0
-C- rquit
-ZV~e
prner -1~)
n PC
4.0
0.2
1-A M
925182OO0.12-A
minivrn.
(Voltoge nonodjsatOle an HAD models.)
a 10% line ichange.
4:05%
+
for a 50% lood change.
REGULATION:
OUTPUT RIPPLE:
-2
(+1%
for
HAD
modela.)
(41% for HAD modes.)
5.0mV PK-PK maxemum.
to 15v outputs:
24V to 250v oulpute 3.OmV+.02%Vout Pu-Pk maximum.
(HAD modelr
0.1xvout Pk-Pk moximum.)
for a 50
ac-a
TRANSIENT RESPONSE:
to 100% load change.
-.
SHOT CIRCUIT
ANO OVERLOAD
PROTECTION:
Aytomatic current lirnt/fo(dbOck.
OVERVOLTAGE
PROTECTION:
Suit-in -n oil Sv oulp1ts. Set at 6.2VDC ±0.4.
ONvraitoutt may use optional overvoltage protection.
REMOTE SENSING.
Provided on most models. ooen sense lead protection
built-in..
STABIUTY:
±0.3% for 24 hour period after I hour warm-up.
TEMPERATURE
D.APER A TURE
COEFFICIENT:
RATING:0*C 10 50-C full-roted. derated linearly to 40% at 70*C.
12 CYU forced cir cooling required to meet IEC 380/950
above 80% of total rWted output power.
±.03%/*C menium
EFFICmENCY:
AA (typical)
2V to 5V outputr 45%
12V and 15V outputs. 55%
24V through 28V & 48V through 250V Outputs:
AA VIBRATION:
SHOCK:
B
Per MIL-STD-l00Method 514.3.Category I.Procedure
Per ML-STD-8100.16ethiod 516.3.Procedure Ill.
B
8B
-10%.
- Tolerance for 230VAC coeration is +15.
spCacationS sbject to change without notice.
Note-
AA
AA
1.2 B8 WA8ANTY
POWER-ONE. INC. assumes no liabilities for the consequentiot
damages of any kind through the use or misuse of its products
by the purchaser or others. No other obligations or liabilities
are expressed or impliet
5.0 or 5.0
or 0.4 or0.4
or T'0 or 5.8
oZ~4
-0.4 or
-T. or
07 or
0.7 or
iI
1
HIGRI VOLTAGE.MODEL
5.
CC
O 5(
1.0 or Cd
1.0 or
c0 T7 or
12. 07 or
8.0 1.7 or
*408-105W-A
4.05% for
88 POWER-ONE. INC, worrants eoch power supply of its manufacture
CC that does not perform to published specifications. as a result of
CC defective materials or workmanship, for o period of two (2) full
Ec years from the dote of original delivery.
L.8 or 2.4 4CC
3.0
6.0
drawings.
UNE REGULATION,
0
0
0
0
0
0
E
E
E
E
E
E
N
N
N
N
N
90
3.0
~tjin4e
and mounting
See Votoge/Current Rating Chart. AdJstmnwt ronge
C
2.0
7.2
H885-3/OvP - A
H8815-1.5-A
00/120/220/230-240 VAC- +10Z -13%. 4 -631,11
output current 10% for 50 Hz operation.)
AC conectioon tooe under APPUCATION NOTES
Fuse information Is next
-Fiormation.
mpe
erate
DC OUTPUT:
C
C
C
9.0
HAA5-1.5/OVP-A
HAA15-0.8-A
HAA24-0.6-A
H A.A512-A
HAD12-0,4-A
.
C I LOAD
10.2
i
2 hour burn-in period
Foldbock/current limit
7
AC INPUT:
.. J
18.0
_ 1,0
-,
CVP on 5V outputs
cSPiFICAlTIrNS
a
B
6
4.0
DUAL OUTPUTS
e
-
.
-
Chossis notched for AC input
100/120/220/230-240 VAC
Industry standard L
-
-
0.5 o- 0.
H028-4-A
HE2-18-A
HE5-18/0vP-A
4E112-10.2-A
HE15-9-A
HE24-7.2-A
HE28-6-A
HN5-9/OVP-A
HN12-5.1-A
HN15-4.5-A
8824-3.6-A
H-428-3-A
LM
I
HA5-1.5/OW-A
Ja
I
HA1S-O.9-A
3.9 or 0.
HA24-0.5-A
H2-3-A
3.0
HBS-3/OWP-A
3.0
H812-1.7-A
1.7
H815-1. 5-A
.5
H824-1.2-A
HB28-1-A
HC2-6-A
6.0
HC5-6/OVP-A
6.0
3.4
HC12-3.4-A
HIC15-3-A
3.0
HC24-2.4-A
HC28-2-A
02-12-A
12.0
H05-12/OVP-A
12.0
H12-6.8-A
6.8
H015--6-A
6.0
HD24-4.8-A
HC48-1-A
ND48-3-A
a
ME48-4-A
88120-0.2-A
>y
1
+
I
1
L
co
t~~j W
+
MODEL+
+200V
10 or 1.0
7 or L5
1.7 or L5
17 or 1i
AA
BAA
0
CBB PRODUCTS RETURNED FOR REPAIR
Please follow this procedure when returning products for sertvcing:
131
1. Contact Power-One's Customer Service Department for
+250V
authorization to return products:
CASE
POWER-ONE. INC.
740 Colle Plano
Comorilto, CA 93012
USA
C
for-EV
or
8
8
2. A Returned Materiel Authorization (RIMA) will be issued and
must Oppear on all shipping documents and containers.
pMpOn
(21or -15V) requires
PCs for -5V.
t for t12V, refer to chossis sAkscreen,
0 for 150V, refer to chtsis silkscreen,
V 12V to ISV adjustable output
- lindiates no remote sense.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
PHONE: (805) 987-8741
(800) 678-9445
FAX:
(805) 388-0476
TwX:
910-336-1297
3. Products must be returned freight pre-paid.
Products returned freight collect or without an RMA number
will be rejected and returned freight collect.
I
60%
APPLICATION NOTES:
PAC
2
REMO2TE SENSE
GROUNDING
Remote sense terminals may be used to compensate for output line
Grounding cansioerotions in designing a power distribution uystem-ore
losses and provide for a remote point of regulation. Figure 1 shows
the proper termination for a power supply with remote sensing.
often overlooked but can have a significant impact an overall system
performance. A single point system ground should be employed where
possible to eliminate ground loops and improve regulation.
FIGURE 2
FIGURE 1
Load lines must be sized to prevent On excesi.vvoltage
drop from the
output to the load. Since the point of regulation is at the load, the
power supply must compensate for tine tosses. Excessive load line
losses may offect current limiting. AC line dropout point and OVP morgin (if applicable).
Leoads should be sized to drop no more than 0.5V..- the less the better.
Use of a twisted pair or shielded pair for the sense lines is recommended for noise immunity. In problem applications, the use of a small
AC decoupling capacitor (.1 to 10..) across the sense terminals is
highly recommended. In some applications there may be a tendency for
the power supply to oscillate due to odditional phase shift caused
by the series resistance and inductance in the load leads. The
addition of capacitor Co will reduce output impedance and provide
stability. The recommended value of Co is 100uf per ampere of 5OuF
per foot and can be the sum of the distributed decoupling capacitors
found in most systems.
Ail Power-One supplies hove open sense lead protection to protect the
load frorn an overvoltage condition if the sense leads are removed.
There is no need to strap the sense terminals to the output terminals
in the local sense mode.
FIGURE 3
Figure 2 shaws a simple but undesirable
at loads 2 and 3 becomes progressively
the finite wire resistance between loads.
connection system in which regulation is
connection scheme. Regulation
worse due to voltage drops in
Figure 3 shows on improved
maintained at all three loads
because wire losses ore not cumulative.
AC INPUT CONSIDERATIONS
Almost all power supplies use a capacitive input filter that draws
current only at the peaks of the AC input voltage. The peak to RMS
ratio can be very high, typically 3 to 1. When a supply is tumed on.
the input capacitor has a very low impedance and draws an initiolly
high surge current until it charges to its nominal voltage. The input
surge current con be, as high as 20 times the rated input current and
lasts for several cycles of the AC input.
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION (OVP)
AC CONNECION
An overvoltage protection circuit commonly refered to as a crowbar.
is used to prevent damage to voltoge sensitive loads such as TTL logicTrip point of the OVP is usuolly set at 1152 - 135% of the output
oltage. The OVP will short the output terminals upon sensing a fault
condition. The primary fuse of the supply wil blow if the supply is
The five wire input to the INTERNATIONAL SERIES provides four voltagz
not loldbock current limited. Nuisance tripping of the OVP is a common
problem. Noise from input line spikes or load noise can cause an 0VP
voltages are marginol. Inputs must be fused.
to fire. The INTERNATIONAL SERIES
hos 0VP
ranges- I00/120/220/230-240-. +10%
-13.
See chassis AC coinectior
table (Figure 4) for the jumpering requirements. For convenience the
jmper sequence from the Hi-Vol series is retained. Extended low line
tolerance provides additional drop out margin in areas where line
noise filtering to prevent
nuisance tripping and reduce tronsformer interwinding capacitance
minirni2e input line susceptibility.
COMMON-MODE LATCH UP
I
I
AND FUSINGe
to
I,
-
In certain instances dual power supplies can exhibit a problem known as
common-mode latch up. This occurs when the positive supply comes up
first and forces a reverse bias condition on the negative supply. The
negative supply latches up in a current limit condition, Power-One has
incorporated a unique
anti-latch
circuit into every dual power supply in
FIGURE
the INTERNATIONAL SERIES which will minimize this problem.
EMI/RFA
These linear power supplies have inherently low conducted and radiated
noise levels. For most system applications they will meet the require-
ments of FCC Docket 20780 for Class A equipment and
Class A equipment without additional noise filtering.
For special applications consult factory.
VE
0871 for
COOLING
AC INPUT, 47-63 HZ
j 100 1120 220 230/240
FOR USE AT VAC VAC VAC
VAC
Convection cooling is adequate where non-restricted air flow is
available. When operating in a confined area. moving air or conduction cooling is recommended.
SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS
The INTERNATIONAL SERIES power supplies were designed to meet or
exceed requirements for the following specificatios: lEC 380, lEC 435.
VDE 0730 Part 2. VDE 0804. ECUA-57. CEE 10 Part 2P, UL 1012.
CSA 2Z2 No. 143, CSA 22.2 No. 154. Specifically field termina to
terminal spacing is 5.25 mm with 9.0 mm creepagS to other metal,
leakage current is less than 5.OuA and dielectric withstanding voltages
are 3750 VAC input to chassis, 3750 VAC input to output and 300 VDC
output to chassis.
.
. 1 .
JUMPER
1
A2&4
APPLY AC
11&S
2&3
4&1
12&4
1&5S
2&3
4&tI
This product is a Cass 1 power supply and requires the chassis
to be connected to earth ground at end application.
-NOTE: Use 700-C iron for soldering input connections.
Varnish acts as flux and is solder strippable.
-- NOTE: Tolerance for 230VAC operation is +15&, -1%.
NOTE:
I
U
I
I
I
I
I
Transformers from 50 through 500 VA are supplied with an attached secondary fuse
block which also includes a fuse. The fuse block does not substantially increase the
area required by the transformer. Conserving valuable panel space and the labor time
required to mount a separate fuse block are the major advantages in using the transformer with the attached fuse block.
SECONDARYFSE BLOCK
-ii1r
Nuri&1
Cataog Nmaber :-
1
$18
,.
MWHZWO
1
Primary
Hz
240/480
Secondary
120V-60 Hz
208V-60 Hz
Secondary
120V-60 Hz
l497-N2
0 JAS;t'1
Primary
60OV-60 Hz
Secondary
<1
-6
497 -4298"
X3.4314N1
a1497-N2WE MVj '!tW1497N3M *9it
&'s1497-N16
#A J J497-N17E 4A
~r1497-NsE t
-- 1497-N6 B MF
.tU
~i skw4(r~
1#3 i
V
rWru
*NJbl1497-N
AM1497-N-N
11E t
1497-N12E a
Wi1497-N1B i h
1497-N19u
I T1497-NI20EtM
J#151497433 1 C
- 1497-N34E *
'T- 1497-N3SEW*?$
itWM.1497436 ; .
J 1497-N379i$%-: 4fr-:.1497-N3849L
%4i149749
1497-N404V4t;A -4 r1497-N41'&4t#;
-. 21497-N42
i5
1497-N
& "1497-444
1r
$0
75
'rd497-N271
Price
11
5 72
FO
.j
130
200
50
350
500
750
1000
1500
2000
BU Also
Also
t
Primary
50
DESCRIPTION - Control transformers
are used to provide reduced voltage for
control circuits in control panels.
--
W
k
Continuous
VA
-9
7.
90j9
11441497-N15JC:
N
1r1497-N4-56
E
192
216
246
366
408
6o0
780
rat ed 220/44AV Pnmary. 11 V Seconidar 50/60 Hz
rated 550V Prnmy. toV Seccndary 50/60 Hz.
APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS AND SHIPPING WEIGHTS
Dimensions in inches. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
--
(Whnmnd
-*
!
NOTE: These dimensions apply to transformers with single and dual primary voltages and/or single and dual secondary
voltages for 50 and 60 Hz only.
Transformers of 500VA and less are supplied with a 30A-250V fuse block and
fuse.
f].
-
C
SCatlg Numnbers-
vi
50
75
130
Secondary
Seond
Primary
240/440V50/60 Hz
Primary
600V-60 Hz
120V-60 Hz
120V-0 H
Secondary
110V150/60 Hz
Secondary
120V-60 Hz
110V50/60 Hz
497
-1497-8
41497-N
.1497-Nk15
Secondary
7.- -1497-W427
1
1497-N2I0
1497-?,N
: 1497-N164922
1497-N1.
200
71497-N4"4'
250
-;14973471 ?1497441I . 1497-N8
350
.1497-N10-1
W1497-N18i
_
750
70
1
2000J
I497-N I
aIr#E
4-=.J Z1497-N191497-N33 4 t
g
+-Asi 4 1497-;N34!/
497r7i
-1497-N39497-4j4Q 9
497N2% t497-N43
7173
1500
1497-NS'!
1497-N29-
550 -
1497-N64
*t1497-N9.0
-'1497-N11, r -_1497-N12'"4N
t$ x:Ss t
311497-N19'
1497-N20
452C42y
yM.4M%
.1 149747
'1497-N351Y
'TTM4f A1497-N38%
e1497-N414
KJW-.. a1497-N44 6
* Electrica clearance required to top of fuse block.
H Height is increased by 0.072' when furnished mounting plate is used.
Approximate
Shipping
50160 Hz
-4497-129
1497-N3 ~4 ',1497-N3W
1497-N17.4 41497-N17 ..
-1497-N5t
Dimensions In Inches
Primary
Primry
2401480V60 Hz
Cnnory
208V-0 Hz
Continuous
4,1497-N63?
4497-N12#%
A
B
C
3% 274
3
4'
4%
21
3%
2%
3
4% 2% 3l
5
5/497-Ni"!
3% 3 4
6
4
3%
|
6
4W
I1497-N20
64
4 - 4N
tMiGMi-.M
7%
5%
-'1497-N35'r
Y41W
d
-t'YN
27-4:t
8
7
8
10
t%
4%
4%
4%
5h.i
|
D
E
34
.2
33%
3%
G
'1.E 3%
|?16
21/a 0
7
h2
'(i& 3yis H
U
2'164 _n36
h 'j %
3$ 6
lh
H
3T!p
4
3'/2 0
3%U
5
7L
4yi6
10
4yW
11%
3226
4y
151
1T6
4
"Js
4N
42
42N2
20
3s
"he
4%
3
1he
4f
4%
4
41/2 hz
5% 3s
5/
iJ
5%4
S
Wt (lbs.)
F
5
6'
isi"he 5'/2
6% 53/1 6
'r
"1e 6
71
5
6 '1 1
"11 64
-
2
31__
31
-
35
-43
-
65
DESCRIPTION - Bulletin 509 starters
are designed for full voltage starting of
polyphase squirrel cage motors.
*
*
*
*
Meet NEMA Standards,
Easy to wire and service.
Simple to select.
Class 10, 20 and 30 overload protection.
* Broad range of NEMA sizes (00-9).
* UL Listed and CSA Certified.
These starters may be operated by remote control with push buttons, float
switches, thermostats. pressure switches, snap switches, limit switches, or any
other suitable two or three wire pilot
device.
All 3 Phase Bulletin 509 Size 00-9 starters are equipped as standard with 3 Pole
Bulletin 592 block type manual reset
overload relays which operate on the eutectic alloy and ratchet principle.
50 Hz COILS - Starters as listed in the price table are suitable for use on 50 Hz at
coil voltages listed below. For additional coil voltage information, consult your nearest
Allen-Bradley Sales Office, See Page 818.
Hz
60
50
Coil Voltage
115-120
230-240
46&-480
110
220
--
380 VOLTS, 50 Hz STARTERS - Listed prices will apply to starters for use on 380
volts, 50 Hz. When ordering, use the listed catalog number and replace the third letter
with the letter "N". The table below lists the maximum horsepower ratings.
INEKASize
Horspower
DOO 0
i',
Modifications - See Page 97.
Approximate Dimensions - See Page 41.
.nrF0
t
7-fl-r.'r
-',.rr~
1(2
5
10
3I
25
50
1718
75
150
300)
1 1
600 19001 1600)
UNILOCK ENCLOSURE FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS - Unilock enclosures are
made of cast aluminum alloy with a baked paint coating on the outside for extra
corrosion resistance. The V-band permits easy removal of the cover for inspection and
for making field modifications. Starters can be equipped with various modifications such
as selector switch, pilot tight, control circuit transformer, drain, breather or breatherdrain combination, Bulletin 700 relays or Bulletin 849 pneumatic timers A and Bulletin
1492 terminal blocks.
U Dne Catalog Nurnbe 1401-N4
-"
575-600
aclapier pNaie isrequired to ftrn apneurntcterer n a Buleli 509, Se 0-1-2
Overload Relay Heater Element Selection ..
..
-
. .
~
- -ar
r.
7C
"
--
"
See Page 238.
APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS AND SHIPPING WEIGHTS
Dimensions in inches (millimeters). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
BULLETIN 509 FULL VOLTAGE STARTERS
OPEN Type Without Enclosure
w
Size 00
"*I
Size 0 9
(t.4) UL.
wVa
nous
NEMA
Size
Dimensions In Inches (mm).
C
D
High
Deep
7V 1941
47 (114) I 7t (180)
4
9% 233)
(114)
| 6220)
2
3-s (90.5)
3' (100)
3
4
6-!s (157)
74178)
5 __
6
7
7__ (187)
|16!
29
161 (419)
32',829
19'/
(489)
34 873)
0-1
8
9
|
|
12N 3 16)
14:tib%3721
I
21
' ( 54 6)
34F864)
Apping
B
A
Wide
39' 10,031
5 3 (1264
6f'r (1681 W
7ye (198) I 9-
|
2( 70)
3:(601
Weight
in Lbs. (Kg)
47. (1 9)
5%'(2.6)
|
5
. 1401
6) (160)
15 (68)
23~h (10 6)
6% (160)
381)
17' (451)
35 (159)
160(72)
247 (t;21
?f575l i 20(5081
370(1681
E
I
(2201
2SO)
J 8-
217) j 14,) (380)
| 11% (304 |
; (432)
11% (304)
18 (470)
15~2j
(3S6
|
28 (711
22
-
I15
I
|
-
NEMA Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure
NEMA
Size
CO
0E
0-1
2
3
4
A
Wide
Dimensions In inches (mm)
C
Deep
0
6'P' (160)
9 )(233) | 4(!114)
6:(175)1
4' (1241 7:s (195)
4: (117)
57/ (143)
6$6 (173) 10% (270) 52t (145) 8'/' (210)
7's(186)
13 i (349) 5 %
10* (273)
2 (145)
10-(260) 207.e (513) 7'fi (202) 16 (406)
13 s (340) 29" (756) 9Pz (253) 1 257. (654)
5
16/s (410)
6-7Wall 257' (641)
c
I
a
High
6
Floor
8-9
B Three Phase.
* Single Phase.
42 (1067)
535. (1362)
107! (254)
14 (356)
[38 (965)
|52/' (1327)
Spping
E
E
F
Weight
in Lbs. (Kg)
2' (63.5)
-
4/4(1.9)
1W (47 5)
-
2'f (60.5)
27s(66.5)
3' (95.2)
i
f2 (71)
'/a (8.7)
4 (102)
6 (152)
10/' (261)
Consult your nearest Allen-Bradley
Sales Office. See Page 818
4 (1.8)
(5.5)
/2
(8.7)
"p. (8.7)
-
714 (3.4)
101P (4 7)
31 (14)
44 (19.8)
-
ENE
BULLETIN 500 LINE OF CONTACTORS AND STARTERS
-
OPERATING VOLT AMPERES
SFor Bulletin 500 Line (Bulletins 500 - 506 - 512 - 520 etc.)
Contactor or Starter Size
No.
Volt Amperes Burden for 60 Hz Coils
Motor
NoMtor
of
24 Volts
115-120 Volts
200-208 Vohs
230-240 Volts
460-480 Volts
57500
noahLSdaPedsInrush Sealed
nrush
aSled Inrush Sealed
mnrush
Seald
Ir
Sealed
Inrush
00 Series A
510 Amps
-3
60-.
53
15
55
16
53
15
3
00 Series 8
5/10 Amps.
2-4
77
6-3
77
6-3
77
6.3
77
0
15/20 Amps.
2-5
192
29
196.39
2
9
29
19 6.3
129
192
29
192
29
192
29
12
2
60 Amps. 2-3
240
29
240
2
29
12
29
12
2
60 Amps. 4-5
315
38
315
39
315
38
315
38
315
39
315
3
100OAmps
2-3
660
45
660
4
5 660
45
310 5
360
3
100 Amps.
4-5
840
58
840
58
840
668.0
5
8660 5
660
4
200 Amps. 2-3
-1225
69
125092
5 8 69
412 586
1225
4
200 Amps. 4-5
1490
69
1490
69
1490
69
1490
69
190
5 (Senes A)
300 Amps
2-3
-98
190
5 (Senes L) 300 Amps 2-3
- 2
49 0 19 1
19 0
9
19 0
9
19 0
9
19 2
* ar
4
3
2 0
I
lmp s 2 3 0
2
2 0INFORIATioN
3
29 75
4 1
mAPPLICATION
2
125
f7 g
60 -125
2
6
0
1225
2
60
492
"Volts
Sealed
156
6.3
29
29
38
38
5
69
9
98
9
-
0
5
IPLUGGING
OR INCHING SERVICE - The listed horsepower
ratings are recommend
ec onthos appiatos requirng repealed
Interruption of stalle nmotorCrnt e n
Phse
Motor
Phase Voltage
3112
I62
320
575
Sinole
115
1
230
3I
Size
ISize
Size
3
3Pnase
ed50fHzo
Maimnnum Horsepower Rating
Size
toe
th vo:age
is on
-
1-/
2
Size(
415
60Hj~z
-
Size
Size
Size
7
c oe xu5nee sr se o15
if ni vaepi p30
m
eononr g sr 50
voer r ca losi125
n gs
morethantenin
5
15
5
1
1
7-
2
30
e250
r m n ul - a n
inue
150300 peiod
450
6O10
300
450
aten
60
30
-
7:4 a i mu m H w l e m e r
149os
96
"
1490
-
0 H
92
65
1490
9
2
**
VOLTAGE'STARTERS
t
_
3 Phase e 600V AC Maximum e 60 Hz e With 3 Pole Overload Protection
HEATER ELEMENTS - Prices do not include healer elements. Starters require three overload relay heater elements at $9 each. See
Page 238 for selection tables.
[
1INEUA
NEM
NEMA
Size
Oreni
Fd cad
Con.
TMp 1
cenen
Rafings
Horsepow
Starter
Coad
must not exceed
'Coninuous
Ampere
Arpere Ra"ng-
Rating
~Pice
S$94AD
Volag
e
V*U" I ftm
9
0 0C 18
18
Ph se
Phase
Separate Conrol - 120 vcf
200
208
Up
230
460
575
-Separaie Carof - 120 Yo
230
2
45
2
2M
1
15
3
4
90
15
270
5
208
240
480
600
208
240
100
200
200
6
6
540
230
460
575
50-MD
E3
230
460
575
1215
20
-
460
--
1575
200
400
240
480
400
600
240
480
60
300
600
600
P
2250
230
S
460
-
509-EC
ECA
*ZEAA
EAS
509+0.
509-JAD'
509-+CD
509-HCA
1600
IC=!
509- A+XKAB
Overload Relay Heater Element Selection -
See Page 238.
509-F"
-&iFE
509G
H08
'3
;CGCA
S-8AD
50!HAAsn
QwiA
A
900
480
i
4-
-ovt,
50"AAj
509-=0
kOC
509-FOD
CttfMW
A
240
EJA
EX
tAC
509-FAO
59AKj4
GA9
HOA00C
509-M.,
509-E N
509-W
509-000
D,
DC
509-HD
509-800
509-Hek~p
iWH00
5094D
509-J0
OB
509-KJA:
UKJB
KJC
I
I
509-JDA
509-KCD
509-KCA,
I KCC
575
1600
600
.WKAC
U FRP Huts are included with each siarter at no additional charge See Page 61for (r...maton on Grounding 8ushings.
l
NEMA Size 5 Unikck enclosed starters have a Conhrnuous Ampere Rairg of 210 amps.
* Does not include line and load lugs, see Page 92 for kils.
* Includes control arcuit translormer.
I
3
50SC-"
509-CJ
509-000
SOS-DICD
-. DAC
509-EAD.
480
900
1600
5
509CSD
50-DA
SO-0Al4lH
DAA3
170M
240
800
S
50&CSHa
450
Separate Cowrof - 120 Volt
9
5-9
EJA
509-GCD
Separale Control - 120 Volt
0
Use Sie 0
Staiers
509-SH
509_w-0
Separate Control - 120 Voll
710
Price
50M
FCB
509FCH
208
150
~
ttMA Type 3
5AC~c
48130 d
600
T FAC
Seveale Coudc - 120 Voll
200
Type
wilthout
Ebom
6111
75
460
575
owe
CAB
Secarae Car.!rc - 120 ved
200
40
208
230
0
240
460
100
460
515
10
00
w
Serate Crird- 120yen
200
230
Also
Suiatie for
Use Sce 0 Sarters
$
240
25
30
50
50
FtegasPerforced
PirIester a
509-AAD7
25
25,
S~aae.lj- 12 n
200
230
460
355
induutrial Use
U.0-,AA
240
480
600
-6
575
Cooswio-Resistant
PAC*
2C8
240
40
3
10
--
NEMA
Typ 12
Dust-tg
Type AX
Watertgm
Pnce -
6CC t50MIAC
10r31208
Sepaie Cautre - 120 You
50D
200
10
208
230
3
71
240
-60
10
'80
2
600
AC
Secaa:e Ce'rr-- 120 Y
50-HD
200
575
27
2
2
-
460
2
NEMA
Type 4
Watetight
Ewiosure
Sizes 0-5 D
Slaress Seel
:
5094M
509-KOA
KOB
Modifications - See Page 97.
Approximate Dimensions - See Page 41.
E
OVERLOAD RELAY CLASS DESIGNATIONS - Industry standards (NEMA Part
ICS 2-222) designate an overload relay
by a class number indicating the maximum time in seconds at which it will trip
k n r
t
Iin
ta i
wet4uO
V
UPcent of its current rating.
A Class 10 overload relay will trip in 10
seconds or less at a current equal to 600
e~lrcenltof its ratin
A Class 20 overload relay will trip in 20
seconds or less at a current equal to 600
percent of its rating.
A Class 30 overload relay will trip in 30
seconds or less at a current equal to 600
percent of its rating.
Allen-Bradley standard overload relay
protection is provided using Type W
heater elements for the 500 Line. This
provides Class 20 operation and is recommended for General Applications.
Type B healer elements used in conjunction with Bulletin 593 Bimetal Overload
Relays also provide Class 20 protection.
Specific Applications may require Class
10 or Class 30 overload relays. Class 10
overload relays are often used with hermetic motors, submersible pumps, or
motors with short locked rotor time capability. Class 30 overload relays should be
used with motors driving high inertia
loads where additional accelerating time
is needed and the safe permissible
locked rotor time of the motor is within
Class 30 performance requirements.
For applications requiring Class 30 protection. Type WL heater elements are
available. To order, use the applicable
Type W selection table, follow the heater
element selection instructions and
change the "W" in the Heater Type
Number to "WL".
For applications requiring Class 10 overload relays, Type J elements are availabIe. See Page 239 for Index to Heater
Element Selection Tables.
HEATER ELEMENT SELECTION The 'Full Load Amperes' listed in the tables are to be used for heater element
selection. The rating of the relay in amperes at 40*C is 115% of the 'Full Load
Amperes' listed for the 'Heater Ttpe
Number'.
Refer to the motor nameplate for the full
load current, the service factor, and/or
the motor classification by application
and temperature nse.
Use this motor nameplate information,
the application ruies, and the -Full Load
Amperes' listed in the proper table (see
Index) to determine the 'Heater Type
Number*
MOTORS RATED FOR CONTINUOUS
DUTY:
MOTORS WITH MARKED SERVICE
FACTOR OF NOT LESS THAN 1.15, OR
MOTORS WITH A MARKED TEMPERATURE RISE NOT OVER 40*C.
1. The Some Temperature at the Controller and the Motor - Select the
'Heater Type Number' with the listed
'Full Load Amperes* nearest the full
load value shown on the motor nameplate.
2. Higher Temperature at the Controller than at the Motorf - If the full
load current value shown on the motor
nameplate is between the listed 'Full
Load Amperes', select the 'Heater
Type Number' with the higher value.
3. Lower Temperature at the Controller than at the MotorE - i the full
load current value shown on the motor
nameplate is between the listed "Full
Load Amperes', select the 'Heater
Type Number' with the lower value.
U Rils 2a-: 3apty when Me rrraure dfererce
does rot exceed -18*F (-10*C) Co-isu yci: iea"
es: A e-&ader Sales Othce when the trnpefratre
daererce
s
g-eater See Page 818
ALL OTHER MOTORS RATED FOR
CONTINUOUS DUTY (INCLUDES MOTORS WITH MARKED SERVICE FACTOR OF 1.0):
Select the 'Healer Type Number' one
rating smaller than determined by the
rules in paragraphs '1,2 and 3.
MOTORS RATED FOR INTERMITTENT
C
DUTY:
Consult your nearest Allen-Bradley Sales
Office. See Page 818.
Heater Type B J. P &'W2t t 9
teater(Type WL.4lZ $A
24
C
'~EETION t
ELEME
t~tV-qkrEATER
~l.
INDEX TO HEATER ELEMENT SELECTION TABLES I
Table Nwnbes
Table Numbe
Aubtat
Rain
Mau Rat
B4
Medr Number
Nzesetm
Reis
Rd
-
9-24A
112
505
______
I
0-4
~
-±t
16
0-1
0-1
M EA3A, 7 1
A 1164
--
4e-f-
06-884"
4
513
_
W9 M
7
0-4
(Urdocx)
Re
.T
a
I. -~'
4~aS&E
*r.S~.t
~.L~~4$j4. 9{~~
5~
MES,0
0g
Ph a455
se!4;t
Automatic
pat
anual Ret
es
N!F
~
~~~
e
9
ef
Sn
r~i
rr5-I fl~1I
3-IfrWt#z4yI ms-
f
r
?2 tiW'
1
00
505
3 Phase Bcied
l*MAWJ&9
6
3 Phase
T -8
WTA
0-4
3 Piase
(( )C,JW
1. 121 S
3 P4ase (1W 4)25
5055
;M53 PRase NEW4X)
E5 3 Pase OIlc
3 Pase 9'ed
MA3.7&9
r
5Ei
0e5
S05v
Ooen
r.4
14W 1514
0-2
0-1
0-3
A'
'=V
WiI 7%: 14- W,
13WSi4Wj
44
4
-111 4.T%4721
M
-Af
-I
9-
7
.09 S"gie tase
%09
MAA
3R7 &9 e
wio Cotr Tras.
wCorra
3 Pase
509
3
PhaseI
WMA
. 4S12
509
3 PMas(NEMA 4)
509
509
6W7,
-'t
6341
3
- 0-30
0-4
243
-
tJ l
M
-
-
520v
15
522-523 3 PNse
NOTE -wen
5
255
25
2W
25
A8
S 171,1m
-
171
-53
6
178
-A72
lilt
.
547
=4 241
'163
m-;-
- -
5
12
153
163
OtR
EYO
6
'
592
592
24-I69
'~10fitt4
192 -8*
9
24,
XZ
19
Current Transliormrn
593
600
609. 609RS. 609TS, 609U.
2431
WIT
i
YD-aY
447
t.r.c26VT
259
5
5
570
-
134
Numbe'
2 m
'246
w
tor nameplate
loai amperes by
173 - use ils
vake to select
-Heater Type
prope
"146' '16V ZiS -3r
A59
168
158
iMS
-
540. cme L mo-4
1, 12)
'O NEWA
14,
vse
seect c
proei"*alef 7,e
'
F.4
I9
4
seNOE-w
iecttg reaer eie- 1YD-AY0
ments ior Budetin
4Z~ 4243,1
-
0-4
1-2
162
62
104
164
5
15
6
0-2
(EMA X)
0-4
(Undock)
3 Phase Un)J5lot
0-3
3hase Bold
4
___NEMA 3R, 7 &9
5
1 13
'-2-PN
ments !cr
nn
530. Cnie 7V oor namegla'e
load ar-oeres
14Wr -4
se-
lecing eater ie
vah
5
6
Oe i-
2 00 -
6~
0-4
3 Phase ia(VA A
WEMA
3R 7 S 9
L%'
-~
3P-ase i*VA 4l
4
'1 62-
.
512M
-
AW
0-3
5
-
0-2S69-
0-4
512
5m
3Pase
:A;2,
Aim -
______7-
509
509
509
520
00
z.09 3 P1ase
509
509
520
J4
1
0-4'b4
3Re &9lfl8!-
Z-s
'Iq,
0-
3 ease o'ec
'25
.4
0-4
-053PfneEX&A
-
AM-
I
609TU
UFor Heater Element Selection information, consult your nearest Allen-Bradley Sales Office. See Page 818.
&Type "P"elements.
MUse Table Number 259 for series V devices.
0-i-w
50-2
1 4 12W
12Z0
49r
"M54'
2490
1
I
m_
WIS
W16
-4
149
Size I
Size 0
4.
0.18
4
0.18
0.20
0.20
0.22
0,24
0.27
022
0.24
0.27
030
0.33
0.36
040
044
4
3W19
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
049
054
060
06
0.73
049
0.54
060
0.66
0 73
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
080
0.88
0.97
106
1 17
0.80
088
097
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
129
142
156
1.71
189
1.29
142
156
1 71
1 89
W35
W36
W37
W38
W39
208
228
251
276
304
206
228
251
276
304
W40
W41
W42
W43
W44
334
368
405
445
490
3 34
366
405
445
49 o
W45
539
539
W46
W47
W4
II
I.
U
585
I Size 3
Size 2
Size 4
4.
+
4
1 17
553
600
WA9
641
6
7 63
W50
WS1
W52
W53
WSA
832
907
989
108
1s
832
907
989
108
11 8
853
930
10 2
112
12 2
106
116
126
W55
W56
W57
w5s
W59
126
140
153
16.2
176
128
14 0
153
162
176
W60
W61
W62
W63
WI4
195
195
215
23 4
257
27 5
13 2
14 4
15 8
168
183
203
22 4
244
268
267
139
153
169
167
207
228
251
27.5
305
335
WS5
W66
W67
W68
WE9
31 6
340
370
405
43 5
370
410
440
47.5
520
W70
W71
W72
W73
W74
465
570
610
66.0
710
750
790
830
87.0
91 0
641
691
763
660
720
764
&
W75
W76
77
W79
W79
WaG
We1
WB2
WI3
W.
0
Size 1
W10
W11
W122
W13
W14
018
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
0.48
0.20
0.22
0.24
0.26
W15
W16
W17
W18
W19
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
028
0.31
0.34
0.37
W25
W26
W27
W28
W29
073
080
0 88
0.97
1.07
07
0.31
0.34
0.37
0 41
0.46
1.20
055
0 60..
0.67
0 73
0.80
0.88
0 97
1 07
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
W36 W37
W38
W39
W40
W41
W42
W43
W4
W45
WLI
W47
W48
W49
1.17
1.29
1 42
1.57
1.73
Number
1.06
58
Full Load Ampere.
Ieter
FuU Load Amperes
0.30
033
0.36
0,40
044
W17
I
-TABLE
Hester
Type
Number
W10
Wi
W12
W13
W14
W50
WS1
W52
W53
W54
|
185
20 5
225
250
27.5
300
330
360
395
430
475
520
560
610
660
710
760
810
870
930
990
105
111
118
125
132
139
4
W55
WSG
W57
W58
W59
W60
Wei
W62
W63
W64
W65
WBs
W67
W68
W59
W70
W71
W72
W73
W74
W75
W76
W77
W7S
W79
Woo
WB1
W82
W$3
W$4
was
Size
10
0.46
0.50
0.55
0 60
067
Size 2
Size 4
Size 3
1 17
1.29
1 42
1.57
73
1 90
2 08
2.28
251
276
2 08
2 28
251
2 76
19
304
334
368
404
4 46
494
5 A6
603
665
7 33
304
3 34
368
404
4 46
4 94
46
603
665
7 33
8 13
895
990
107
11 7
126
140
153
162
17.5
194
8 13
895
90
10 7
1 7
'28
140
153
162
17 5
194
21 3
.
5 13
5$ 4
622
68m
-j
756
845
932
103
113
12 3
134
145
158
180
199
21.9
104
114
125
137
151
167
184
203
22 5
248
233
24 2
27 2
300
255
27 2
268
287
300
330
330
360
310
33 5
360
38 5
415
360
39 5
435
47 5
520
395
430
47 0
510
5610
450
56 0
600
650
690
740
790
850
910
1167
185
205
225
250
27.5
.
610
660
710
760
820
87 0
930
990
105
111
118
125
132
139
Refer to instructions on Page 238 before using tables.
7.
-
-
HEATER ELEMENT SELTIONtV
Hesr
Type
Fui Load Amper"
Load Amperes
FUR
Heater
Ty"e
NumbSize
Wig
NWi1
Number
W12
W13
I
I -I
.19
20
23
25
28
W14
W1S
Wi5
W17
wig
W19
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
31
34
37
-40
-44
.49
55
61
09
77
W25
86
W26
W27
93
1.02
1 11
W28
W29
TABLE 1
122
W30
W31
W32
W33
W34
W35
I
W36
W37
W38
W39
I3
I
W40
> W41
W42
133
150
160
170
190
201
228
2 50
2 72
3 C40
334
3367
4C
WO
440
W44
5C
W45
W45
W47
5 52
595
660
WAI
W49
720
800
W50
W51
WS29
8 76
960
10. 7
W53a
119
W54 a
13 0
WS5U
W56 E
14 2
155
W57*
W58a
169
180
WS9
20 0
W60g
217
W61a
Catalog Numbet
Prefix
112-A
112-A
112-D
240
Heater Type
Number Maximun
W51
W54
W61
a For app calions with Catalog Number
through 112-A24 only.
I
Refer to instructions on Page 238 before using tables.
i12-AO9
POTTER & BRUMFIELD
I.
SSRD series
4
DUAL AC OUTPUT
SOLID STATE RELAY
9
File E81606
(2 File LR32053-53M
ENGINEERING DATA
e
Two independent AC output solid state relays in one
standard package.
* Inverse parallel SCR outputs.
- 25A rms &40A rms/outputs versions available.
* 4 - 15 VDC input control.
e Zero voltage and random voltage tum-on versions.
- 2500V nms optical isolation.
* UL Recognized File #E81606.
- CSA Certified File #LR32053-53M.
Form: 2 Form A (2 SPST-NO).
Duty: Continuous.
Isolation: 2500V rms minimum.
Isolation Resistance: 10" ohms 0 500VDC Min.
Capacitance: 10 pf maximum (input to output).
Temperature Range:
Storage: -40*C to +12*C
0
Operating: -3 C to + 80*C
Case Material: Plastic, UL rated self-extinguishing.
Base Plate Material; Aluminum.
Case and Mounting: Refer to outline dimension.
Termination: Refer to outline dimension.
Approximate Weight: 3.5 oz. (98 g).
ORDERING INFORMATION
25
4. MAXIMUM SWITCHING RATING/OUTPUT:
25 = .05-25A rms 0 25*C, mounted to heatsink
40 = .05-40A rms 0 25*C, mounted to heatsink
STOCK ITEMS - The following items are normally maintained in stock for immediate delivery.
SSRD-240D25
SSRD-240D40
INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Control Voltage Range V.
Must Operate Voltage V-. (Mn.)
Must Release Voltage V... (Mn.)
Input Current (Max.)
(linear wfrespect to input vottage)
V, = V.c
V. = V..
VDC
4-15
VDC
VDC
mA DC
mA DC
4
1
11
45
Reverse Voltage (Max.
VDC
15
Input Resistor Value (Nom.)
ohms
330
(I
25A Modets
.
}Ltoad Vage Rang
V.
Resistive
LodCurrent Range It'
S- ge Cycle Surge Cun'ent (Min.)
f -60 Hz. VL - 240V mIs
Leakage Current (Off-State) (Mat)
It
On-State Voltage Drop (Max.)
Ma.-
Statc dv/dt (Off-Stale) (Min)
I
'Se
250
500
mA rms
10
V peak
2.0
V/ps
200
0.7
0.5
. 60HL
oa
f =60Hz.
ms
8.3
I
RaiNng
Loed Power Factor Rating
A peak
025
0.35
8.3 for Zero Voltage Tum-On Models
for Random Voltage Tum-On
.
Models
Tum-n Tlne (ar)
Turn-Off Time (Max.)
.5-5.054
md
Both Sections On
(Max)
A rms
-CM
One Section On
Thermal Resistance. Junction to Case
Tu-On Time (Mx.
t600
V peak
Repetitive Blocking Voltage (Mi.)
(Rj
24-280
V ems
.C/W
m02
A2 Sec.
.. 3 ms
It - Max.
1,040
260
0.5 - 1.0
-
Orang Curve
HOW TO USE THESE CURVES
required heat sink and maximum allowable base plate
Knowin maxm*um load current and maximum ambient temperature, use deratrng curves to determine
maximum load current Extend a tine to the right from that point to the intersecion
temperature. On left hand power dissipation curve, locate the point corresponding toFrom
heat sink curve. mad directly or extrapotate required heat sink size. Extend the
ot vertical line on right hand chart corresponding to maximum ambient temperature.
temperature.
plate
base
allowable
line farther to the right and read on the right hand scale the maximum
40A UNIT
25A UNIT
tI
IiI
I
S
0
-
0
20 40 8080
Load Currwet (A msl
--
10
S21
.. 2 SECTIN
o
10
20 30 40 50 0
(A ms)
Laeds tCunf
10
20 30 40 50 60
Amclent Terp. MC)
70 60
0
10
59fa
20 30 40 50 W
Anbien Temp. (C)
70 80
EXAMPLE #2:
Given: 40A unit
FIND: Rating mountig to *CWHS 0 45"C
One secton ON Both sections ON
EXAMPLE #1:
Gvwen: It Two 12.5A loads 0 45'C
Find: Heatsink required &max. baseplate temperature
Solution: From 25A unit curve
2 x 12.SA - 25A 2 sections ON
Solution: From 40A unit curve
One Section ON: Rating mounted to 1PC/W HS 45"C = 40A
Baseplate Temperature = 95*C
Heatsink - 2*C/
Baseptate temperature - 95"C
Both Sections ON: Rating mounted to t*CM HS C 45*C = 48A total
24A for each sections or 40A one section & 8A on the
other Baseplate Temperature = 95*C
Secion ONI
f-
1IR-1Bot
Both Sections ON
25 A Unit
One Section ON
E
10
20
30
40
50
6o
70
Bo
10
20
30
40
50
Amtient Temp. (C)
60
70
8o
STEADY STATE CURRENT VS. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (Derived from the Thermal Derating Curves)
Both Setilons ON"
40A Unit
80
One Section ON
S
U
'0
20
kVt-~-'
1120
20
10
30
60
40
50
ArnbientTemp. ("C)
10
80
70
30
20
40
60
S0
70
80
Ambient Temp. (*C)
OPERATING DAGRAM
Output A
Output B
tRardom Tum-cn Units have a Random Turrm-n
vonage Ccut
arwu-nstead
of Zero
HEATSINK REUIREMENTS
Cocde
Symbol
,Them
Resisa
None
5'C/W
3'C/W
A
S
When mounting relays on a heatsink surface, use a thin coating of a thermal compound (Thermalloy
-Thermalcote* or equivalent).
, 1ypical
T
Flat Sudaoet
''NArPrUnit:?rt
None - Free Air
6.25 in' (2.5" x 2.57)
16 in (4. x 4-)
2*C/W
1C/W
36 in' (6* x U")
144 in' (17 x 12J
0.5"C/W
576 in' (24' x 24)
2304
0.25"CW
in'
Fin heatsinks are available from the following manufacturers. Consult your local Distributor lor the
heatsink manufacturer they carry.
A.AALL Inc.
AavId Engineering Inc.
EGG Wakefield
(48" x 48)
tERC
(international Electronic Research Corporation)
Thermalloy Inc.
OUTLNE DIMENSIONS
25A & 40A UNtTS
15
13
En
11
n
U
' 3i
10I
-1AIlv
tN
t1 1 -
4 1111
.1
1
3
.010.017
10
Duraton of Surge (Seconds)
Family of curves shows approximate expected lifetime of relay when subjected
to repetitive current surges, i.e., number of surges of a specific magnitude and
duration.
-.75
(4.445)
-+
0.5
.2
"-
Tolerances: .035 (BE)
.
Input Terminals Connectors are available from several different manufacturers.
Amp PIN: 103976-3
Autosplice P/N: 22-2OAO4MF
Methode P/N: 1300-004
Consult your local distributor for these or equrvalent connectors.
4
NEMA BLOCKS
Devices available in the Allen-Bradley
O.NEMA line include Terminal Blocks, isolation Switch Blocks. Fuse Blocks and
Electrical Component Blocks.
TERMINAL BLOCKS All Allen-Bradley NEMA terminal blocks
are available in eleven colors for easy circuit identification. Colors and suggested
uses are:
e RED for AC Control Circuits
* BLUE for DC Control Circuits
* BLACK for AC/DC Power Circuits
I
* ORANGE for Data Collection Circuits
* GREEN for Ground Circuits
* YELLOW for Externally Fed Circuits
(interlocks)
* BROWN for Miscellaneous Circuits
* VIOLET/GRAY to denote PLC inputs
and Outputs
* GOLD to match Allen-Bradley 1EC
Products
0 WHITE for Neutral
Most NEMA blocks are available preassembled on a breakaway mounting
channel, complete with two end-anchor
retaining clips and one end barrier.
Allen-Bradley NEMA Terminal Blocks are
available In two basic styles: Open Construction and High Density.
jOpen Construction - Open Construction blocks (Styles C and F) allow easy
visual verification that the wire is properly
positioned in the clamping area. and allows the use of a standard screwdriver
for wiring. Style C and F blocks mount
securely on Allen-Bradley rail. Catalog
Number 1492-CAM blocks also mount on
DIN rail. Several Style C blocks accept a
snap on marker for marking long wire
identifications. All Open Construction
blocks have:
* Cadmium or tin plated copper alloy
conductors for corrosion resistance
* A write-on marking surface for marking circuit identifications
* Optional marking strips to make mass
markirgs easier
I)
N
High Density - High Density (Style H)
blocks provide more connections per foot
to reduce panel space. Style H blocks
come in one and two circuit versions and
are "finger-safe'. All High Density blocks
have:
* Stainless steel and tin plated copper
alloy components for corrosion
resistance
* Backed out captive screws for labor
saving installation
* Specially designed funneled wire
guides for ease of wiring
* A write-on marking surface for marking circuit identifications
* An optional snap-in marker for extended circuit identifications
Catalog Number 1492-H blocks mount
securely on Allen-Bradley rail. Catalog
Number 1492-HM blocks also mount on
DIN rail.
ISOLATION SWITCH BLOCKS * Allow easy, positive electrical circuit
isolation
* Are available in both open and high
density styles
* Feature a write-on marking surface for
easy circuit identification
FUSE BLOCKS * Provides a simple way to add overcurrent protection into a circuit
* Can be used with the following fuse
7"' x 1'/A, and
styles: 1$32" x 1/".
GMT-type alarm fuses. Blown fuse indicalors are availabje on the -4x 1t4'
blocks. The indicator lights up when
the fuse is blown, speeding trouble
shooting. The GMT type fuse block
has a visual alarm flag and puts out an
electrical signal when the fuse is
blown.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT BLOCKS
* Provides an easy way to install a circuit status indicator or an electrical
component into a circuit. Surge suppressor blocks are also available to
provide transient voltage protection to
relay, contactor, and solenoid coils
The Component Block Une Features:
* Voltage indicator blocks
* Internally jumpered blocks (tie point)
* Diode blocks
* Resistor blocks
* Surge suppressor blocks
UL AND CSA FILE NUMBERS - All
NEMA Style Terminal Blocks have a 94V2 flammability rating. The NEMA line is
UL Component Recognized and CSA
Certified:
* UL File Number E40735, Guide Number XCFR2
* UL File Number E34648. Guide Number IZLT2 (for Catalog Number 1492CE6 only)
* CSA File Number LR67896. Class
622801
* CSA File Number LR1234. Class
321107 (for Catalog Number 1492H2C, D, R,K, V only)
E
I
4
ULJCSA
UL/CSA
UL(CSA
ULICSA
300V
600V
600V
600V
25A
#2-14
AWGt
amm
(.5-
ib- m 0.7-1,6 N-m)
40C
30 pcs/ft (981m)
_4Mto 45T
30 pcsitt (98/i
-40C to - 85'C
4
500
500
50H
500
482-FWEW*
1492-8M
NA492F8L -&
492-FSG .35
F-9
142-Fe
|
I
50
50
r
~42
1
1.60
I
5O
CA1GLCZ
:1492-CA1REW4
1492-CA18,7k- '
:1492-CA1BL$V
1492-CA1G iE
50
50
50
50
So
1492-CA1YM3;
50
492-FGYM
41492-F80R:w
50 E
WE5
1.60 1492-CA1GY c2.
1492-CA1ORAt
1.60
'1.492-N22 6N;
mm,492-N44rrV1492-N2
20
20
2
2
6.25
6.25
-
.aefre 74r.
50
so
50
.0a42C1~a
0
20
14924NV'
20
'1492-N22 AiI
~ 57j .0 192142
-1492-N44wT
~fl4tpj4~'
2
.00 -1492-N25 \,-ZA
J13.00
1
-
1-
1
i~eeft754"i'
6.25
6,25
50
%~ 13.00
- 7.00
A- --.4'2-
4Rtt-.Fif3
-M
-
-
01492-23
i'Sl
3.00
10
4
--
1492-N3
ige
9&Y
: g -
1g492N14
.XYq
.60
50
1492-N3
16a
1
l42420}
WIP5
IL
-492-N43E
1492-N4350E &
1492-N431002
10.00 fl492-N4%
1.40 4f492-N,&.
-
-
-
-
1 74492-N44
1492-t1!
1
25
15.00
MIsheet
050
sheets
.40
22.00
50
10
- 1492-N30MM
,1492-CAR
f
son
50
so
50
50
s
1.95 M492-CALREA
1.95 .1492CA1LBVM
J492-CAL8L ,'S#
1,95
1.95 11492CALGIV
SOE
5
501
O0H
1.90
1.95 '1492-OA1LY&St
50a
1.90
1.95 92-CA
19-AT4C5H
19
1.95 ziAS2CALGYt
50
50
so
19
195
19-CAir
5.25
1492-?
25
20
5.25
50
1.90
1.5
1.5
11492C12
BEM
-JY-t&
1.90
1.90
T|
50
-.
9
__
-
-
1.90
WE I
T5
170A
.'.0
2
50
14O
.95 d52%GEMMM
50
-
1492-N7GR
1492-N3 ,,V3&
50
-492-N0.At.M:
10
.40
1
28.00
20
.70
1
10.00
1
1
1
500.00
1000.00
10.00
25
1.40
A492i
214U
0492--N43B
4f492-N4310012
'1492-N4M
v1492 -N&ThMit
]
50
.0142N7AG43
0
*
20
1
.0
22.00
28-0
26.00
.70
20
.10
10.0l
4492-N43 E
10.00 41
1coun
1Ar
10
1
15
Ts-
50
10
1492-ItS '5jtt4
22-00
0492-N4350U
1000.00
1.0j
500
1
1
1
1492431003
00000
10.0
1
1AN.0$42N30m
.ij49225
140
25
1.42
1
15.00
-15.00
. 100 sheets
M._
1
5
3492-N7630VM
--.--
-
-
Pice
Pcs./Pkg. Pe
1.0
50
f.
i
1492-OR60
1492-DR7 4'V
'1492 N16 2 50 .50 -t492 -#i6E W
3.00 .. 1492-N23
10
1.50 1492-NI 47 WN
50
M
11492-N47--
-
754l.'i
11
-
0 SO .40
lb-c (0.9-1.8 Nem)
30 pcs/ft (98/m)
-40"C 10 +85*C
1492
1492-N2. AYA'w
't~~J 50
.2 1424
-N
1492-N44
50
149-N7G~-L
2
1492-N25 4
see
-
M
#1492-N18
-
-
-
16
4
1.90 1492-CAM1I2cALL
1.90 :4492-CAMIRE
1.90 14924-CAMIB-V
1.90 .1492-CAM1EL
1.90 1492.-CAMJG ;-?
1.90 1492-CAMUYW' "
1.90 -1492-CAM1
1.90 .1492-CAM1VT
1.90 1492-CAM1GY
1492-CAMIOR
1.90
.1492--CA1R
1.80
142FV9
jz
11492
1.60
1.60
1.60
1.60
1.60
8-
368.00
1
-A
49CA2
#22-#8 AWG {0.5-10 nur
0.38' (9.7 mm)
PJg. Price 4C genc
Piece
Ps./Pg.er
S 1.85
50
w Cbai
xtCaog.
dhumei W Pcs./Pkg. Per Piece
$ 1.80 .1492..CAM&
50
1492-CAI6&
335.00
n14924-8GLV?
#22- #8 AWG (0 5-10 mm)
)
0 38' f9. mmrn)
8-16 l-i (0 9-18 N-ml
-85'C
4 C.U% PVRice
Hupen 5', Pcs/Pkg. Per Piece
1.50
50
1492 Fa-;)48
1492F175
55A5
AwG 05-10
0.38' 9 mm)
8-16 10-l (0.9-1.8 Nemt
30 ocs/ft (98/m)
-.
55A
.I#8
#22
0 25- (6.4 mm)
6-14
T4CVS
al sheet. 20 stnps
MUse Discourd Schedule W3
-
-
-
-.
~
I
-
I,
.
-.
-4
-f
r
_
i
-t--A
1
%LLEN-BRADLEY MOUNTING RAILS
0&
Dimensions 1
Pcs./Pkg.
Description
36.38"(923.98 mm) to
Breakaway Mounting
Rail - 3'(,91 m)long
Scored every 1r'
so 1twit break off to the
desired length
--T
(-2.23
(22.23 nin
20
Use #8-32 Mtg. Screw and Space at Distances that are Multiples of .409 7 .005
(10.38 ± .013) Slotted Mtg Holes Spaced A09 * .005 (10,38 * .013) Center-totCenter
MjiM|492ZN222
33.38' (92311 mm) to
Rigid Mounting Ra
3' (.91 n) long
ft
-or
2"25
20
High2
(22.23 mm)
Use VB-32 Mig Screw and Space at Distances that are MulTples of A09
4
005
Rise
(10.38 = 013) Slotled Mig Holes Spaced 409 005 (10.38 * .013) Center-toCenter
RoMounting Ra -
A1492144i
110s1U__
r-012
6 u?r
2.2.352m1i
2' Highi Rise
lhA'unting Rai: -
226
574mmmio
3(912
Ajum1um24
po
LO1.?4
-n
2?'
(574 i
m)
492N25.'i 4
I
Aountrng Aar
Stanoolt Braz-e:s For use witn
1492-N2 RrJc
-
2
IAnsting Rar
a
DESCRIPTION - Siaciing brdges
are used wl!- Styre C. F and H fa!
rtoming termara. biocks They are
oesoned to save pane space and
ncrease terrenia accessat:ty
Stacing
bndge kits aflow stacking of
t
up to ou! 1ermna! block sinps
A stacking txoge consris of
rnountng leet, sie plale exlensons.
ano 12" or 18' tidoes (Nate: Rigid
mounti rai is atached to the
bridge. ive Mis are available to
custom build slacking boiges as
ksted in the ta:le to the left
IMPORTANT - Fuse bkrks.
nLsconrnect blocks large Syte C
terminal blocks (Catalog Number
1492-CE2) an circuit breakers should
oniy be mounted on the Vpper-mOst
bodge of an) assembly
ORDERNG EXAMPLE - A typical
ordenng exam:xe for a Two Level 18"
Stacking BNidge s as follows
One Cataog Njmber 1492-N26 or
1492-N1,32 naing oot kit
One Catalog jrmbe 1492-N2T
sie plate extension kit and Two
Catalog Number 1492-N28 1'
bridoes
Bot 1- and 18' stacking bridges
are butt in this manner wth up to
four levels mainmum
-
-
STACKING BRIDGE
Dimensions in Inches U
A
0 19" (4.83 mm) x 0
(0.16mim) slotted mounting hotes every 3- 76.2 mm) staring 1 5' (38.1 mm) from end
* Dimensions are no-, intended to be used for manutactunng purposes
[T 74
Wt
~Zr..';~
-
A
%
~lrr-pre
_7-.
-.
1,
t" V1,
.
.I
NO
UIfetin
.,,! RMINAUB 91PK..
END BARRIERS
4,
Catlog
A
Number
1.5'
(38.1 mm)
S
1.75'
(44.45 mm)
1492-NI
..
1492-N18,1492-N36
1492-NM36,1492-NM40
1492-N37
14U2-N4U
1492-N1,1492-N17
C
118"
(45.21 mm)
2'
(50.8 mm)
0.11'
(2.8 mm)
0.14'
(3.56 mm)
1
42N.t 1.25'
(31 75 mm)
,1.13'
(28.7 mm)
0.11"
(2.8 mm)
*
1.5 '
(39.62 mm)
1.81'
14
(46 mm)
0.11"
(2.8 mm)
-
(1,78
0.07'mm)
14924M
-
1492-NM16
1492-NM1 6BL
1492-NM16GL
B
-
1492-N--
-
A
007*m
1492-N53
'I
Cate"
Number.
1492-
C
148'
1.20'
(30.7 mm)
0,06'
(1.5 mm)
0.07'
(1.8 mm)
165'
(42.5 mm)
1492
q<
1492-N5_"
-
1.41'
(35.9 mm)
v66"
1.68*
0.06"
(42.5 mm)
(427 mm)
(1.5mm)
1.82'
. (46.2 mm)
1.13'
(28,7 mm)
0.04'
(1 mm)
1492-N50, 1492-N51
1492-N52, 1492-N54
'a
14U2-_NUv
B
(37 6 mm)
14924N61
1492-N94
A
1492-N55, 1492-N56
Catalog
Number
1492-N5
-
A
B
C
0.96'
(24.4 mm}
0.82'
(20.8 mm)
0 04'
(1.0 mm)
149246
N5
096"
(24.4 mm)
0.82'
(20.8 mm)
0.04'
(1.0 mm)
U
p
4.tr4 'tAKMIALLLN
W
;d1492
'f.
END ANCHORS
1492-N47
1492-N23
1492-N2
Nube
C
B
A
0.594'
1.5'
1.03'
9215A (38 1 mm) (26.2 mm) (15.1 mm)
0.594'
1.03'
tY
(38 1 mm)
(26.2 mm)
E
D
(15.1 mm)
0.234'
035'
(5.94 mm)
(19.1 mm)
0.234'
(5.94 mm)
-
0.97
0.203'
0.688'
1.19'
1.8B'
(47.8 mm) (30,23 mm) (1746 mm) (5.16 mm) [24.64 mm)
0,2340688'
1.19'
1 68'
49225E
147 8 mm} (30.23 mm) (1748 mm) (5 94 mm)
.
1492-15A
1492-25A
I
r
1492-15E
1492-25E
1492-N76
1492-N76GR
--.-
7C~~~~~
1492-NiB
1492-N77
Ay
~~~
' =)-hl
in
'??
w
7
r
-..
,-K:'
-
PUSMM
BUTONS
x
Pdp
ta~~M~yp9JjWa~rtiht~ilighj~
,4
A8OT 1
PILOT LIGHT UNITS
LEGEND PLATE -
Prices do not include the legend plate. Legend plates are listed on Page 374.
smemmaaulmmamnsimenmicommNmeeonu
gsaeaxe
S
N Afull voltage unit is not recommended when a unit is subject to appreciable shock or vibratio. A transformer, neon oC LED unit wil provide longer lanp life.
El See 1ypical winng diagram on Page 368.
El The LED transformer type lamps are the only devices that can directly replace incandescent type ANSI #1866 or #755 lamps in most applications. Full vottage LED
lamps require the use of a dedicated power module (as listed on Page 369) and do not directly replace existing ftiA voltage lamps. LED lamps provide an added degree
of protection against shock and vibration.
1 Use Discount Schedule Al.
SPECIAL COLOR CAPS - The pilot
lights listed are supplied with a red color
cap, except the neon type which is suppiled with an amber color cap. The following colors are also available at no additional charge:
Green Amber Blue
Color
Translormer.
White Clear
Full Voltage,
G
A
B
W
C
LED
G
A
-
-
-
Neon
-
A
-
-
C
Resistor
To order, change the last letter of the
listed catalog number to the first letter of
the color desired.
LED PILOT LIGHTS -
The Allen-
Bradley line of high density LED (Light
Emitting Diode) indicator pilot lights is
designed for industrial environments to
provide long life, plus improved
resistance to shock and vibration, These
devices are available in amber, green,
and red lamps and utilize a standard
bayonet style T-34 lamp base.El
OMIT COLOR CAP - To order pilot
light without a color cap, drop the last
letter from the catalog number and deduct $4 from the price. Example: Catalog Number 800T-P16 would be $60.
REPLACEMENT COLOR CAPS -
Re-
fer to Accessories, Page 370.
FLASHING LAMP - Available only for
transformer type illuminated devices and
for 6 Volt full voltage type pilot lights. The
flashing lamp is compatible with devices
using 6.3 Volt #755 or #1866 miniature
bayonet bulbs only. To order a device
with flashing lamp, add the letter "F"
before the first number in the listed catalog number and add $3 to the price. Example: Catalog Number 800T-PF16R.
For the flashing lamp only, order Catalog
Number 800T-N212 (ANSI #267) at $6
each.
NMSYEPUSH'
MMMX 74. .3, W
s09PT
T
ight 3"T
MOMENTARY CONTACT PUSH BUTTON UNITS, Non-Illuminated
LEGEND PLATE -
Prices do not include the legend plate. Legend plates are listed on Page 374.
I
* Red flush head push buttons are not suilable for applicaons requiring extended head, mushroom head or other unguarded buttons capable 01
being operated quickly in emergencies,
and they may not comply with applicable codes or standards. To order a red lush head push button, substitute color code number "G'for the first number after the dash in the
catalog numoer of the equivalent green push button. Example: Catalog Number 800T-A6A.
9 Mushroom head units, as listed, are constructed of an impact-resistant, thermoset plastic. The jumbo mushroom head isalso available as metal. To order, change the "J" to "L" and
add $6 to the price. Example: 8OOT-6LA at $64. See also, padlocking mushroom units on Page 350.
SPECIAL COLORS - Special colors
available at no additional charge. Replace
the first number of the listed catalog
number with the color code number selected from the table.
Color Iorange I Gray
3 _L 4
Code
WhiiteBlue
5 1 7
Yellow]
9
Example: Catalog Number 8OOT-A1A
would become 800T-A3A for orange.
TIME DELAY CONTACTS - Series C
Field Installable Kits can only be used
with Series T or later operators. Adjustable range of 0.5 to 15 sec. 225%, Maximum continuous current 1m 5 Amperes.
The Bulletin 800T devices have control
circuit ratings with time delay contacts as
listed on Page 345.
SNAP ACTION CONTACTS - Snap
action contacts feature a "quick make,
quick break' snap action mechanism that
is only available on factory assembled
units. Maximum continuous current Ith 10
Amperes. The Bulletin 800T devices have
control circuit ratings with snap action
contacts as listed on Page 345.
-14-
UwNM~YLUH BU-OS-3~ft
4
~NEMTyp: whoaetihIitih
BIei
,
2 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH UNITS, Non-Illuminated
LEGEND PLATE -
Prices do not include the legend plate. Legend plates are listed on Page 374.
~
M
t)
I
I
When facing knob, Side 1 is on the right, Side 2 is on the left.
H Cylinder Lock Operator Keys are removable only in the locked position.
U Target tables are reversed from those shown.
U Wing lever units can only be used in a one hale station or always located at the bottom of other stations or panels.
-
SPECIAL COLORS, UNIVERSAL COLOR, SPECIAL LOCKS & EXTRA KEYS REPLACEMENT KNOBS AND COLOR INSERT KITS -
Refer to Page 373.
Refer to Page 360.
:~8
-
EWA
-
~~,C
~EM~Tore
Cs
~~~r7r--w
-
a.
---
h
*itn~u.,~3W1rtgtit
.
E4 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH UNITS, Non-illuminated
LEGEND PLATE -
2 P
4I
Prices do not include the legend plate, Legend plates are listed on Pag
LEG I
Cc
,f
ORDERING INFORMATION - To order
a complete selector switch assembly as
listed in the function tables to the far
right, select the desired operator from the
operator table and add the suffix desired
from the function table. The price of the
complete unit will be the operator price
plus the function price. Example: Cata:log Number 800T-N2 at $22 with a func'tion KF48 at $36. would become Catalog
Number 800T-N2KF4B at $58. If an operator is required without a contact block,
select the operator prefix plus the first 3
characters of the cam function suffix
CUSTOM LEGEND PLATES - Legend
plates can be supplied with special markings at $8 each. To order. specy Catalog Number 800T-X620E and marking
desired.
REPLACEMENT KNOBS AND LEVERS
See Page 373 for ordering information.
ICOLOR
INSERT KITS for ordering information.
Act
Contact
Location
Type of
Operator
Operator
Function
N
N w
Price
$22
Spring Sanda'd Knob
8WT-1435
Retum Knob Lever
ra- "2S Position Wig LeverE
00T413E
1
cyins Pos2
To
Pos 370
Position
Pos. 4
3N134E
Maintamied
2
'
See Page 373
Spring
SPECIAL COLORS ordering information.
See Page 360 for
Position
4
SPECIAL LOCKS ordering information.
See Page 360 for
Return
N2
2
4
4
B
0
0
5
I
A
B
X
0
X
0
2
B
X
0
00
0
34
34
58
1 Wr,
A
a
X
0
o0
70
2
B
A
A
0
0
X
0
1 We
A
0
0
0
34
B
X
58
70
A
70
Pos. 2 ic N23E
Pos
All 3
1
2 Btac
70
70
34
S0C-NB E't
Knob Lever 41
E
Wing Lever U
NG148
Cy
PosderVs
i 1
LciNde
PTo
- Price
010
46
58
58
58
58
Standard Knob
Positon Lp
o
V,
0
22
t N154E
Al
Cam-Block
Functis
®n
Actu- C
Side
Standard Knob 80-N2U
Knob Lever
N17E
NGIE
Wing LeverE
MI E
Pos. 1
N
Cylinder Pos. 2
Locking Pos. 3
133M
Position Pos. 4
All
40 WIN
C,
Operator Position
Viewed From Front
X = Contact Closed
0 Contact Open
3
E
W
2
B
Bh:ke
70
70
0
X
0
0
X
0
1
0 X
*
X
0
X *'1CS-w
X0
0 0
0
X
X
8
0
8
-KMB
* r
*
X --
X X
4
X
0
0
0
X
2 &akA
36
-KG48
0
X
0
tKV
0
0
0 V?5rt
* Catalog Nrmber as listed is incomplete. Add the desired Cam-Block Furction SuttA romthe table to the ngri
13
compiete the catalog number.
G Suffix number only cannot be ordered Suffix must be combned wth an operator. selected from the Operar Ta
U Cannot be used with wng levers or Catalog Number B00T-XD3 Contact Bccks.
1 Key renmable in maintained positions only.
H Wing lever units can only be used ina one hole stat or always rcated a: the bo o Allen-Bradey ercnosses
SELECTOR SWITCHES WIT H OVERLAPPING CAMS
DESCRIPTION - Operators with an
overlapping cam allow selector switch
contacts to make before the contacts of
the previous position break. The overlap
will occur in both directions.
LEGEND PLATE - Prices do not include the legend plate. Legend plates are
listed on Page 374.
NOTE: The bi-directional arrows in the
adjacent table represent the overlap
position(s).
Contact Location
Operator
Sie Actuator
Color
3-POSiTON
Standard Knob
MantainedE
4-POSTON
Standaro Knob
Maintane
ma
1
2
1
White
Black
White
Crtc
NO.
NO EM
N.C
2
&ack
NC.
2
Btack
NO.
Whe
~~~aoWiten
st.e a0
co0c
N.
OPERATOR POSMON
VIEWED FROM FRONT
_
X
0
0
0
X
0
0
0
X
X
0
0
0
X
0
0
0
0
X
n-
"4Nmbr
X =Contact Closed
0= Contact Open
_
_
z
$49
SM
0
0
0
"'~'h
Nvrao arXvia~ Jns
0~aoret
o'nre!A~n rde
es0
daAddi
maierator styles andt contact arrangermnts are avaiiam Const your nea-es: Alen-Bradiey Saes Once
See Page 818.
f7~R9
'I I FKPN tITV
Ani
v
.
-..-
-.
.
.
U
SLC 500 System Overview
SLC 500 Modular Controller
0
p$4ar-
E SLC 500 Modular Controller
The SLC 500 Modular Controller offers additional flexibility in system
configuration, more processing power, and I/O capacity. By selecting the
appropriate modular chassis, power supply, processor, and discrete or
specialty I/O modules, you can create a controller system specifically
designed for your application. Processor options include:
*
SLC 5101 - I K or 4K instructions processor (Catalog Number 1747-L511
or 1747-L5 14) with an instruction set identical to the SLC 500 fixed
processor
" SLC 5/02 - 4K processor (Catalog Number 1747-L524) with an
enhanced instruction set
e SLC 5/03 - 12K words and 4K additional data storage processor (Catalog
Number 1747-L532) with an instruction set similar to the SLC 5/02
processor
The instruction set is available on page 39 for your reference.
Feature
Benefits
Four central processing units
Supports a variety of 11O requirements
and functionality.
Four different chassis sizes
(4, 7, 10, and 13)
Provides 1/0 mounting flexibility and
expansion options.
Variety of 1746 1/0 modules
Provides over 44 different modules to
meet your application needs.
Three power supplies
Supports AC and DC power.
providing three different sizes.
Variety of communication options
Support of DH-485,'RS-232. and
DH+ communication.
Certification
6
UL listed. CSA approved
Class I, Division 2 hazardous
environment (exceptions indicated).
SLC 50 System Overvew
SLC 500ModularController.
The following table describes the general specifications for the SLC 5/01
(Catalog Number 1747-L511 and 1747-L514), the SLC 5/02, Series C
(Catalog Number 1747-L524), and the SLC 5/03 (Catalog Number
1747-L532) processor.
Specification
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
Specification
(1747-LS11, -L514)
(1747-L524)
(1747-L532)
Program Memory
1K or 4K Instnctions
4K Instructions
12K Words
Additional Data Storage
0
0
up to 4K Words
I/O Capacity
256 Discrete
480 Discrete
90 Discrete
Max, Chassis/ I/O Slots
3/30
3/30
3/30
Stdard M
Capacitor -2 weeks
StnadRMLithium Battery 2yearsZ
thium Battery 2 years
Lithium Battery 2 years
Memory Back-up
Options
EEPROM or UVPROM
EEPROM or UVPROM
"EEPROM'or
"UVPROM'
unctionait
LED Indicators
RUN, FAULT,
FORCED UO
BATTERY LOW
RUN, FAULT,
FORCED I/O,
BATTERY LOW,
COMM.
RUN, FAULT,
FORCED I/O,
BATTERY LOW,
DH485, RS232
Programming
APS or HHT
APS or HHT
APS
Processor instruction
Set
52
71
71
Typical Scan Time'
8 ms/K
4,8 ms/K
I ms/K
Bit Execution (XIC)
4 microseconds
2.4 microseconds
-40 microseconds
* 1747-L511 only - The capacitor back-up is rated at 35"C (95*F).
* Lithium battery is optional for the L511; standard for the 1514.
The scan times are typical for a IKladder logic program consisUng of simple ladder logic and
communicationsenvng Actual scan Umes depend on your program size, instructions used, and the DH-485
communicadon,
' The 1747-MI1 Memory Module cannot be erased with UV light Itmust be reprogrammed or erased with a
PROM Programmer using the Memory Module Adapter (Catalog Number 1747-M15).
Communication Options
The following table summarizes the communication options for the SLC 500
processor family.
Communication
DH-485
RS-232 (DF1 Full or Half-Duplex
Slave on DH-485)
Processor Type
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
(responder)
(responder or
initiator)
(responder or
initiator)
,,
Data Highway Plus
* A 1747-KE module isrequired.
0 A 1784-KAS module isrequired.
' Responder opertion only through the 1784-KA5 module.
SLC 500 System Overview
SLC 500 Modular Controller
SI
System Protection Options
The SLC 500 family of processors offer a number of hardware and software
security features designed to help you protect your system from unauthorized
changes to program or data files. The different types of protection are:
Types of Protection
Password
SLC Fixed, 5/01
e
Future Access (OEM Lock)
e
Program Owner
0
Program Files
e
Data Table Files
a
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
=
Memory Module Data File Overwrite
Memory Module Program Compare
Memory Module Write Protection
Force Protection
Keyswitch
Communication Channel Protection
J
Memory Modules
The following memory modules provide non-volatile memory for the
SLC 500 processors.
Catalog Number
SLC 5/01
1747-Mi 1K User Words
e
1747-M2 4K User Words
e
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
1747-M3 1K User Words
1747-M4 4K User Words
-
1747-M11 12K Words
S
8
Product Data
SLC 500 Processors
SLC 5/03 Processor (Catalog Number 1747-L532)
The SLC 5/03 processor significantly increases performance by supplying
system throughput times less than 1 ms for a typical 1K user program. Now
applications such as high-speed packaging, sorting, and material handling
become more affordable. With the addition of online editing, the SLC 5/03
processor presents a positive solution for your continuous process
application.
The SLC 5/03 processor provides:
* program memory size of 12K, plus 4K additional memory space
* addressing of up to 960 1/0
" online programming (includes runtime editing)
* built-in RS-232 channel, supporting:
- DF1 Full-Duplex for remote or point-to-point communication, or
direct connection to IBM compatible programming devices
- DFI Half-Duplex Slave for remote communication to a master device
- DIH-485 (serves as a second DH-485 channel using a 1747-PIC or
direct connection to IBM compatible programming devices)
" built-in DH-485 channel
" built-in real-time clock/calendar
" 1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI)
" 0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII)
" keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults)
System Throughput
When your application requires high-speed processing it requires more than
just fast instruction or program scan times. It requires speed from the time
an input is read until the time an output is turned on. The SLC 500
processors improve performance in every phase of system throughput, from
input and output scans, to program scans and housekeeping functions.
During these portions of the operating cyde:
The On/Off status and signal levels of the input devices are read
from the input modules and written into the input image table.
The status of contacts inthe program is determined from the
I/O tables.
* Instructions are executed.
" New status of output coils and registers are written to the
output image table.
*
Program Scan
Output Scan
The OnVff status and signal levels inthe output image table are sent
lo the output modules to turn physical devices On and Of.
Housekeeping
9n
Communication with programmers and other network devices occurs;
intemal housekeeping, such as updating the timebase and status file, and
performing the program pro-scan also occurs.
'iiuc
Communication Options
Data
The SLC 500 processors support different types of communication options.
The following section describes available channel configurations for the
processors.
DH-485 Channel (All Processors)
The SLC 500 processors have a DH-485 channel that supports the DH-485
communication network. This network passes information between devices
on the plant floor. Using the DH-485 network, you can monitor process and
device parameters, device status, and application programs that support
supervisory control data acquisition, data monitoring, and program
uploading/downloading.
The DH-485 network offers:
* interconnection of 32 devices
* communication rates up to 19.2K Baud
* electrical isolation via the 1746-AIC
* maximum network length of 1219 m (4,000 ft)
* the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network
RS-232 Channel (SLC 5/03 Only)
The SLC 5/03 processor has a RS-232 channel that supports RS-232
asynchronous serial data communication between terminal devices, such as
printers, computers, and communication equipment.
The SLC 5/03 processor supports full-duplex DFI protocol and half-duplex
DFl slave protocol via its RS-232 connection to a host computer (using the
DFI channel). You can configure the SLC 5/03 processor using the RS-232
channel for any of the following communication modes:
" Full-duplex DFl protocol (also referred to as DFI point-to-point
protocol) is provided for applications where RS-232 communication is
required. This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions
between two devices in both directions. You can use channel 0 as a
programming port, or as a peer-to--peer port using the MSG instruction.
e Half-duplex DF1 Slave protocol provides a multi-drop single
master/multiple slave network. In contrast to full-duplex DFI,
communication takes place in one direction at a time. You can use
channel 0 as a programming port, or as a peer-to--peer port using the
MSG instruction.
" DH-485 communication protocol provides a second DH-485 channel.
This channel can be connected two ways:
- electrically onto a DH-485 network using a 1747-PIC
- directly to an [BM compatible programming serial port using an
Allen-Bradley 1747-CP3 serial cable or a standard null-modem serial
cable for point-to-point communication
Product Data
SLC 500 Processors
I
System Protection Options
The SLC 500 family of processors offer a number of hardware and software
security features that allow you to protect your system from unauthorized
changes to program or data files. The different types of protection are:
SLC Fixed, 5/01
SLC 5/02
Password
e
*
Future Access (OEM Lock)
e
"
Program Owner
0
e
Types of Protection
SLC 5/03
a
Program Files
Data Table Files
a
a
*
Memory Module Data File Overwrite
Memory Module Program Compare
Memory Module Write Protection
Force Protection
Keyswitch
Communication Channel Protection
I/O Usages
The SLC 500 family of processors support a variety of 1/0 modules,
allowing you to exactly match your application. The following table lists the
various types of 1/O modules and their compatibility with the SLC 500
processors.
110 Module
SLC 5101
SLC 502
SLC 5103
1746-Discrete Input/Output
ACIDC
1746-BAS Basic Module
a
*
1746-HSCE High-Speed
Counter Encoder Module
1747-DSN Distributed /O
Scanner Module
Scanner
1747-SN Remote V/O
Module
174--HS IMC 110 Servo
Controller Module
1747-KE DH-485/RS232-C
KE Module
1748-Analog Modules
6
e
e
I)
*II~
Data
- I.00Pcesr
Programming Instructions
The following programming instructions are used with the SLC 500
processors. Also included are instruction execution times(gs) for the
processors when the instruction is True.
Bit Instructions
Condition
Execution Times (gs)
Instruction Mnemonic
instrctions
and Name
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02
SLC /03
XIC
Examine if Closed
4
2.4
.44
Conditional instruction. True when bit is on (1).
XIO
Examine if Open
4
2.4
.44
Conditional instruction. True when bit isoff (0).
OSR
One Shot Rising
34
20
20
Conditional instruction. Makes rung true for one scan upon each
false-to-true transition of conditions preceding it in the rung.
OTE
Output Energize
18
11
.63
Output instruction. True (1)when conditions preceding it are true.
False when conditions preceding it go false.
OTL
Output Latch
19
11
.63
Output instruction. Addressed bit goes true (1)when conditions
preceding the OTL instruction are true. When conditions go false,
OTL remains true until the rung containing an OTU instruction wih the
same address goes true.
OTU
Output Unlatch
19
11
.63
Output instruction. Addressed bit goes false (0)when conditions
preceding the OTU instruction are true. Remains false until the rung
containing an OTL instruction with the same address goes true.
Input or Output
Comparison Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
Execution Times (ls)
SLC 5/01
SIC 5/02 SLC 5/03
Function Conditional (input) Instructions
EQU
Equal
60
38
1.25
Instruction istrue when source A - source B.
NEQ
Not Equal
60
38
1.25
instruction is true when source A - source S.
LES
Less Than
60
38
1.25
Instruction istrue when source A < source B.
LEO
Less Than or Equal
60
38
1.25
Instruction is true when source A < source B.
GRT
Greater Than
60
38
1.25
Instruction is true when source A >source B.
GEQ
Greater Than or Equal
60
38
1.25
Instruction is true when source A > source B.
MEG
Masked Comparison for
Equal
75
47
38
Compares 16-bit data of a source address to 16-bit data at a reference
address through a mask. If the values match, the instruction is true.
1.95
True/false status of the instruction depends on how a test value
compares to specified low and high limits.
LIM
45
Limit Test
I
I
_
I
7
Product Data
SLC 500 Processors
Timer and Counter Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
Execution Times (ps)
SLC 5101 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03
Function Output Instructions
TON
Timer On-Delay
135
83
1.4
Counts time intervals when conditions preceding itinthe rung are true.
Produces an output when accumulated value (count) reaches the
preset value.
TOF
Timer Of-Delay
140
86
1.4
Counts time intervals when conditions preceding itinthe rung are
false. Produces an output when accumulated value (count) reaches
the preset value.
RTO
Retentive Timer
140
86
1.4
This is an On-Delay timer that retains its accumulated value when:
Rung conditions go false.
The mode changes to program from run or test.
-
The processor loses power.
-A fault occurs.
CTU
Count Up
111
69
1.4
Counts up for each false-true transition of conditions preceding it inthe
rung. Produces an output when accumulated value (count) reaches
the preset value.
CTD
Count Down
111
69
1.4
Counts down for each false-true transition of conditions preceding iBin
the rung. Produces an output when accumulated value (count)
reaches the preset value.
HSC
High-Speed Counter
60
Applies to 24 VDC fixed 1/0 controllers only. Counts high-speed
I
RES
Reset
40
from a high-speed input. Maximum pulse rate of 8kHz.
_pulses
26
1.4
Used with timers and counters. When conditions preceding itinthe
rung are true, the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and
control bits of the timer or counter.
1)
Communication Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
Execution Times (is)
SLC 5101 SLC 5102 SLC 5103
Function Output Instructions
MSG
Message Read/Write
180
203
This instruction transters data from one node to another on the
communication network. When the instrudion isenabled, message
transfer is pending. Actual data transier takes place at the end of the
scan.
SVC
Service
Communications
240
240
When conditions preceding it inthe rung are true, the SVC instruction
interrupts the program scan to execute the service communication
portion of the operating cycle.
3
8
mduItr.
itC
-0
4
6sor
/O and Interrupt Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
Function Output instructions
Execution Times (gs)
SLC /01
SLC 5/02 SILC 503
IIM
immediate Input with Mask
372
340
85
When conditions preceding Itinthe rung are true, the IIM instruction is
enabled and interrupts the program scan to write aword of masked
external input data to the input data file.
IOM
Immediate Output with Mask
475
465
110
When conditions preceding itinthe rung are true, the IOM instruction
is enabled and interrupts the program scan to read a word of data from
the output data file and transfer the data through a mask to the
corresponding external outputs.
lIE
lID
RPI
1/O Interrupt Enable
1O Interrupt Disable
Reset Pending
11O
Interrupt
42
39
240
16
6
78
The IE, ID,and RPI instructions are used with specialty 1/O modules
capable of generating an 1/O interrupt.
REF
I/O Refresh
240
240
When conditions preceding itinthe rung are true, the REF instruction
-interrupts the program scan to execute the I/O scan (write
outputs-service comms-read inputs). The program scan then
resumes.
STD
Selectable Timed Disable
9
4
STE
Selectable Timed
Enable
9
5
STS
Selectable Timed Start
72
58
INT
Interrupt Subroutine
0
.25
Associated with the Selectable Timed Interrupt function. STD and STE
are used to prevent an STI from occurring during a portion of the
program; STS initiates an STI.
Associated with STI interrupts and i/O event-driven interrupts.
File Copy and File Fill Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
Execution Times (ps)
SLC 5/01
SILC 5/02 SLC 5/03
Function Output Instructions
COP
Fle Copy
45 + 21
per word
29 +13
per word
30 +22
per word
When rung conditions are true, the COP instruction copies a
user-defined source file to the destination file.
FLL
File Fill
37 +14
per word
25 + 8
per word
28 + 2
per word
When rung conditions are true, the FLL instruction loads a source
value into a specified number of elements ina user-defined file.
9
Product Data
SLC 500 Processors
Math Instructions
and Name
Function -
Execution Times (ps)
instruction Mnemonic
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
Output Instructions
ADD
Add
122
76
1.7
When rung conditions are true, the ADD instruction adds source A to
source B and stores the result inthe destination.
SUB
Subtract
125
77
1.7
When rung conditions are true, the SUB instruction subtracts source B
from source A and stores the result inthe destination.
MUL
Multily
230
140
20
When rung conditions are true, the MUL instruction multiplies source A
by source B and stores the result inthe destination.
DIV
Divide
400
242
23
When rung conditions are true, the DIV instruction divides source A by
source B and stores the result inthe destination and the math register.
DDV
Double Divide
650
392
33
When rung conditions are true, the DDV instruction divides the
contents of the math register by the source and stores the result in the
destination and the math register.
NEG
Negate
110
68
1.7
When rung conditions are true, the NEG instruction changes the sign
of the source and places it in the destination.
CLR
Clear
40
26
1.7
When rung conditions are true, the CLR instruction clears the
destination to zero.
TOD
Convert to BCD
200
122
38
When rung canditions are true, the TOD instruction converts the
source value to BCD and stores itin the math register or the
destination.
FRD
Convert from BCD
223
136
31
When rung conditions are true, the FRD instruction converts a BCD
value inthe math register or the source to an integer and stores it in
the destination.
50
10
When rung conditions are true, the DCD instrudion decodes 4-bit
value (0to 16), turning on the corresponding bit in 16-bit destination.
Square Root
162
32
When rung conditions are true, the SQR instrudion calculates the
square root of the source and places the integer result inthe
destination.
Scale
480
32
When rung conditions are true, the SCL instruction multiplies the
source by a specified rate. The result is added to an offset value and
placed inthe destination.
DCD
Decode
SQR
SCL
80
Proportional Integral Derivative Instruction
instrucfion Mnemonic
and Name
PID
Proportional Integral
Derivative
Execution Times (s)
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03
3600
272
Function Output instruction
This instruction is used to control physical properties such as
temperature, pressure, liquid level, or flow rate of process loops.
9
10
Product Data
SLC500 Processors-
Move and Logical Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
Execution Times (is)
SLC 5/01
SLO 5/02 SLC 5/03
Function Output Instructions
MOV
Move
20
14
1.25
When rung conditions are true, the MOV instruction moves a copy of
the source to the destination.
MVM
Masked Move
115
71
19
When rung conditions are true, the MVM instruction moves a copy of
the source through a mask to the destination.
AND
And
87
55
1.7
When rung conditions are true, sources A and B of the AND instruction
are ANDed bit by bit and stored inthe destination.
OR
Inclusive Or
87
55
1.7
When rung conditions are true, sources A and B of the OR instruction
are ORed bit by bit and stored inthe destination.
XOR
Exclusive Or
87
55
1.7
When rung conditions are true, sources A and B of the XOR instruction
are Exclusive ORed bit by bit and stored in the destination.
NOT
Not
66
42
1.7
When rung conditions are true, the source of the NOT instruction is
NOTed bit by bit and stored in the destination.
Bit Shift, FIFO, and LIFO Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
BSL
Execution Times (js)
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03
Bit Shift Left
BSR
Bit Shift Right
FFL
First InFirst Out (FIFO)
Load (FFL)
144 +24
per word
89 +14
per word
50+2.3
per word
150
58
150+11
per word
79+2.2
per word
FFU
Unload (FFU)
LFL
Last In First Out (LIFO)
Load (LFL)
150
58
LFU
Unload (LFU)
180
66
Function Output Instructions
On each false-true transition, these instructions load abit of data
into a bit array, shift the pattern of data through the array, and unload
the end bit of data. The BSL shifts data to the left and the BSR shifts
data to the right.
The FFL instruction loads a word into an FIFO stack on successive
false-to-true transitions. The FFU unloads a word from the stack on
successive false-true transitions. The first word loaded is the first to be
unloaded.
The LFL instruction loads a word into an LIFO stack on successive
false-to-rue transitions. The LFU unloads a word from the stack on
successive false-to-true transitions. The last word loaded is the first to
be unloaded.
S1I
Product Data
SLC500 Processors
Sequencer Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
Execution Times (is)
SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03
Function Output Instructions
SO
Sequencer Output
225
137
70
On successive false-to-true transitions, the S00 moves a step
through the programmed sequencer file, transferring step data through
a mask to a destination word.
SOC
Sequencer Compare
225
137
60
On successive fase-to-true transitions, the SOC moves a step
through the programmed sequencer file, comparing the data through a
mask to a source word or file for equality.
SQL
Sequencer Load
135
56
On successive false-to-true transitions, the SQL moves a step
through the sequencer file, loading a word of source data into the
current element of the sequencer file.
Control Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic
and Name
Execution Times (ps)
SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03
SLC 5/01
Function Conditional or Output Instructions
JMP
Jump to Label
38
23
63
Output instruction. When rung conditions are true, the JMP instruction
causes the program scan to jump forward or backward to the
corresponding LBL instruction.
[EL
Label
2
4
.25
This is the target of the correspondingly numbered JMP instruction.
JSR
Jump to Subroutine
46
28
138
Output instruction. When rung conditions are true, the JSR instruction
causes the processor to jump to the targeted subroutine file.
SBR
Subroutine
2
4
.25
Placed as first instruction in a subroutine file, Identifies the subroutine
file.
RET
Return from Subroutine
34
20
23
Output instruction, placed in subroutine. When rung conditions are
true, the RET instruction causes the processor to resume program
execution in the main program file or the previous subroutine file.
MCR
Master Control Reset
10
6
4
Output instruction. Used inpairs to inhibit or enable a zone within a
ladder program.
TND
Temporary End
32
22
12
Output instruction. When rung conditions are true, the TND instruction
stops the program scan, updates 1/0, and resumes scanning at rung 0
1)
of the main program file.
SUS
Suspend
12
7
12
Output instruction, used for troubleshooting. When rung conditions are
true, the SUS instruction places the controller in the Suspend Idle
mode. The suspend IDnumber is placed in word S:7 and the program
file number is placed in S:8.
3
12
ProductData.
:SLC 500 Processors'
interrupt Subroutines
The following interrupt subroutines allow you to provide pre-determined
responses to special events in an application.
Selectable Timed Interrupt (SLC 5/02 and SLC 5/03)
This function allows you to interrupt the scan of the main program file
automatically, on a periodic basis, in order to scan a specified subroutine file.
When using a SLC 5/02 processor, the Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI)
timebase can be adjusted in 10 ms increments. When using a SLC 5/03
processor, the STI timebase can be adjusted in 1 ms increments.
11O Event Interrupt (SLC 5/02 and SLC 5/03)
This function allows a specialty 1/O module to interrupt the normal processor
operating cycle in order to scan a specified subroutine file.
Discrete Input Interrupt (SLC 5/03 only)
Use the Discrete Input Interrupt (DII) for high-speed processing applications
or any application that needs to respond to an event quickly. This function
allows the processor to execute a ladder subroutine when the input bit pattern
of a discrete I/O card matches a compare value that you programmed. The
discrete input interrupt is examined every 100ps asynchronous to the ladder
program scan. You may also specify the number of counts (matches) to
occur before subroutine execution.
Support Services
In today's competitive environment, when you buy any product, you expect
that product to meet your needs. You also expect the manufacturer of that
product to back it up with the kind of customer service and product support
that will prove you made a wise purchase.
As the people who design, engineer and manufacture your Industrial
Automation Control equipment, Allen-Bradley has a vested interest in your
complete satisfaction with our products and services.
Allen-Bradley offers support services worldwide, with 75 Sales/Support
offices, 5 12 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators
located throughout the United States, plus Allen-Bradley representatives in
every major country in the world.
Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative for:
" sales and order support
* product technical training
* warranty support
e support service agreements
13
Product Data
SLC 500 Processors
I
Specifications
The following table summarizes the detailed specifications for the SLC 500
processor family:
SLC 5101
Specification
SLC 5103
SLC 5102
1747-L511, -L514)
(1747-1L524)
(1747-LS32)
Program Memory
1K or 4K Instructions
4K Instructions
12K Words
Additional Data Storage
0
0
up to 4K Words
I/O Capacity
256 Discrete
480 Discrete
960 Discrete
Max. Chassis/Slots
3/30
3/30
3/30
Standard
Capacitor -2 Weeks
Lihium Battery -
Lithium Battery -
EEPROM or UVPROM
"EEPROM'or
'UVPROM"
M
StnadRMLithium Battery -
2 years
2 years
Memory Back-up
Options
EEPROM or UVPROM
2 years
functionality
LED Indicators
RUN, FAULT,
FORCED I/O,
BATTERY LOW
RUN, FAULT,
FORCED 10,
BATTERY LOW,
COMM.
RUN, FAULT,
FORCED1/0,
BATTERY LOW,
DH485, RS232
Programming
APS or HHT
APS or HHT
APS
Programming
Instructions
52
71
71
Typical Scan Timeo
8 ms/K
4.8 ms/K
1 ms/K
Bit Execution (XiC)
4 microseconds
2.4 microseconds
.40 microseconds
)
*D The capacitor back-up is rated at35C (95* F). (LS11 only)
*
Lithium battery isoptional for theLS11; standard for the L514.
0
The scan bmes are typical for a 1K ladder logic program consisting ofsimple ladder logic and
communication servicing. Actual scan times depend on your program size, instructions used, and the DH-485
communcation.
The following table summarizes the communication options for the SLC 500
processor family.
Processor Type
Communication
DH-485
RS-232 (DF1 Full or Halt-Duplex
501
(receive)
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
(receive or iniiate)
(receive or initiate)
,
Slave on DH-485)
Data Highway Plus
*
*2*
A 1747-KE module is required.
o A 1784-KA5 is required.
* Receive isonly through the 1784-KA5.
9
14
Product Data
SLC 500 Processor'
The following table summarizes the general specifications for the SLC 500
processor family:
For All Processors
Specification
for the 5103)
Power Supply Loading at 5 VDC
35OmA (5OOmA
Power Supply Loading at 24 VDC
105mA (175mA for the 5103)
Program Scan Hold-up Time after Loss of
Power
20 milliseconds to 3seconds (dependent on power
supply loading)
Noise Immunity
NEMA Standard lCS 2-230
Displacement .015 inch, peak-to-peak at 5-57 Hz
Vibration
Acceleration
Shock (operating)
Ambient Temperature Rating
2.5 Gs at 57-2000 Hz
30 Gs
.
0
0
Operating: 0 to + 600C (32 F to 140 F)
Storage: -40*C to 85C (-40*F to 185 0F)
Humidity
5 to 95% without condensation
Certification
UL listed/
CSA approved
Class 1,Groups A,B,C or D,Division 2
15
I
SLC 500
Modular Hardware Style n Power Supplies
To provide power to the CPU
and each 1/O slot, select a
power supply from the table
below for your application.
For AC power supplies the
120/240 Volt selection is made
by a jumper. Simply place the
jumper to match the input
voltage.
All power supplies are
protected against overloads by
a replaceable fuse.
Each rack of a modular
system requires a power
supply.
I
Specifications
DESCRIPTION
Line Voltage
Typical Une Power Requirement
1746-P1
1746-P2
1746-P3
85-132/170-265 Volts AC
50/60 Hz
85-132/170-265 Volts AC
50/60 Hz
19.2-28.8 Volts DC
135VA
180VA
90VA
internal Current Capacity
2 Amperes at 5 Volts DC
5 Amperes at 5 Volts DC
3.6 Amperes at 5 Volts DC
User Current Capacity
Ambient Operating Temperature
Rating
0.2 Amp at 24 Volts DC
Humidity Rating
Wiring
0.2 Amp at 24 Volts DC
0 to +55*C
(Current capacity derated by 5% at + 6000)
5-95% (non-condensing)
#14 AWG
-
"The power supply does not require
a slot in the rack. It simply mounts
on the left side of the rack with two
screws."
.I
-
4)
ISLC 500
-
R
M ~M
A~frG
Power Supply Guidelines
1/O modules containing relay
contact outputs require both
24 Volt and 5 Volt power from
the power supply. The table
below is used to determine the
Maximum Number of Relay
Contact Outputs each power
supply will support.
~
__
____
__N
___
system and whether or not
the system will be used on
the RS-485 link. Refer to
the table below that shows
the maximum number of
relay contact outputs for
each rack configuration.
3. Based on the requirements
Power Supply Loading
Catalog
Number
(Amperes)
5 Volts DC
1746-IA4
0.035
1746-IA8
0.050
1746-IA16
0.085
1746-IM4
0.035
of both Steps 1 and
2,select the appropriate
power supply.
NOTE - Future system
1746-M8
0.050
1746-1M16
0.085
expansion should be taken into
1746-OA8
0.185
1746-OA16
0.370
1746-IB8
0.050
1746-IB1S
0.085
1746-1V8
0.050
1746-IV16
0.085
1746-OV8
0.135
1746-OV16
0.270
1746-oB8
0.135
1746-OW4
0.045
number of relay contact points isthe same as aCPU rack without the RS-485 Isolated Link Coupler.
1746-Ow8
0.085
Power Supply Loading Example
Select a power supply for a system containing the following:
1746-Ow1 6
0.170
1746-104
0.030
1746-108
0.060
1746-1012
0.090
1747-L-511
0.35
1747-L-514
0.35
Power Supply Selection
1.Select the CPU and
modular 1/O, and then add
the current requirements
for each device from the
table in the right hand
column.
2. Determine the number of
relays required for the
RACK CONFIGURATION
account when considering
power supply selection.
POWER SUPPLY CATALOG NUMBER
1746-P1
1746-P2
1746-P3
CPU Rack with RS-485
Isolated Link Coupler f
24
68
60
CPU Rack without RS-485
Isolated Link Coupler
32
76
68
Modular Hardware System
Expansion Racks
40
84
76
U If the Isolated Link Coupler is powered from a separate 24 Volt power source, the maximum
DESCRIPTION
10-Slot Rack
CATALOG
NUMBER
1746-A10
POWER SUPPLY
LOADING CURRENT
AT5VDC
0
CPU
1747-1511
0.35 A
Input Module
(16 Inputs each)
1746-lA16
0.34 A
Relay Output Module
(16 Outputs each)
1.746-OW16
0.51 A
Triac Output Module
1746-OA16
0.37 A
(16 Outputs)I
1.57 A
TOTAL
In the above example, the 48-relay contact requirement drives the selection to a Catalog Number
1746-P2 power supply.
Future considerations for placing this system on the RS-485 link will not be a problem. The capacity
of a 1746-P2 power supply is adequate to accommodate the required relays, the RS-485 link coupler
and an additional /O module.
.
I
ALLEN-BRADLEY
I
Discrete Input and Output Modules
(Catalog Numbers 1746-IA4, IA8, IA16, lB8, IB16, [B32,
IG16, IM4, IM8, IM16, IN16, IV8, IV16, IV32, OAS,
OA16, OB8, OB16, OB32, OG16, OV8, OV16, OV32,
OW4, OWS, OW16, OX8, 104, IO8, 1012)
Product Data
I
Our wide variety of input, output, and combination modules makes the SLC 500
the smart choice for all of your small PC applications. 1/0 modules are
available in a wide variety of densities including 4, 8, 16, and 32 point and
can interface to AC, DC, and TTL voltage levels. Output modules are
available with solid state AC, solid state DC, and relay contact type outputs.
For added flexibility, combination modules are also available in
2 input/2 output, 4 input/4 output, and 6 input/6 output versions.
Designed and tested for Industrial applications, our modules are of the highest
quality. The modules feature input filtering, optical isolation, and built-in
surge protection ensuring reliable operation in noisy industrial environments.
All modules are UL listed and CSA approved.
Product Data
DiscreteInput and Output Modules
I
Features and Benefits
Digital and field circuits are isolated. All modules feature isolation between
digital and field circuits resulting in exceptional noise immunity, and limited
damage to your system in the unlikely event of an electrical malfunction of
the field wiring.
Self-lifting field-wire pressure plates help reduce installation time, The wiring
terminals have self-lifting pressure plates used to secure two #14 AWG field
wires.
Removable terminal blocks help ease the wiring task. Removable terminal
blocks allow you to replace the module without rewiring it (not available on
all modules).
Removable terminal blocks are color coded for quick identification. A
matching color band is also provided on the front of the module to assist in
matching the terminal block to the module.
Barrier type terminal blocks-on all modules. Each terminal block features a
barrier on three sides of each terminal to help prevent accidental shorting of
field wiring.
Self-locking tabs secure the module in the rack. No tools are necessary to
install or remove a module from the rack. To install a module, you slide it
into the rack until it latches in place.
Digital and field circults
are optically isolated
bcking tabs secure
nodule in the rack
vable teminal blocks are color
led for quick identification.
Self-lifting field--wire pressure
plates help reduce installation tirme,
2
Barrier type terninal
blocks on al modules
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
indicate the status
of each PO point
tEDs
Expand the VO capacity of your fixed controller system. Two discrete 1/
modules can be added to the fixed controller's two-slot expansion rack
increasing the flexibility of the system.
Terminal Identification diagrams on each module. Terminal identification
diagrams are located on each module making terminal identification easier.
LEDs Indicate the status of each VO point. Assisting you in troubleshooting,
LEDs illuminate when the proper signal is received at an input terminal, or
when the processor applies power to an output terminal.
INI
IN%
IN,
IN
Sourcing and sinking Input and output modules are available. These modules
N 10enable you to interface to both sourcing and sirdcing devices.
IN n
IN 14
F415'
*1
Idiagramns
Termnal ident ification
on each mnodule
IN1
Input Module Operation
I
Select VO modules to exactly match your application. Combination modules
allow you to have inputs and outputs in a single slot for efficient use of your
rack space.
All relay contacts are Silver Cadmium with Gold overlay. Gold plating resists
oxidation and tarnishing resulting from non-use. Silver Cadmium acts as an
excellent conductor.
UL listed and OSA approved. All modules are UL 508 listed and
CSA 22.2 142 approved.
Input filtering on all Input modules. Input filtering removes false signals due
to contact bounce or electrical interference.
An input module responds to an input signal in the following manner:
1. An input filter removes false signals due to contact bounce or electrical
interference.
isolating
logic
circuits
from
input
signals.
2. Opto-electrical isolation protects module and backplane circuits by
3. Logic circuits process the signal.
4. An input LED turns ont or off indicating the status of the corresponding
input device.
Input
c
0
i agrams
na
o
cTermin
a
clatne
3
Product Data
-Discrete input and Output Modules
Output Module Operation
An output module controls the output signal in the following manner:
1. Logic circuits determine the output status.
2. An output LED indicates the status of the output signal.
3. Opto-electrical isolation separates module logic and backplane circuits
from field signals.
4. The output driver turns the corresponding output on or off.
Output
U 32 Point Module Overview
U
'U
'U
The 32 point i/O modules allow you to wire 32 DC input or 32 DC output
devices to a module residing in one slot.
The 32 point modules come equipped with a 40 pin male connector on the
front instead of screw terminals. This connector is designed to accept your
cable fitted with the 1746-N3 mating connector. One 1746-N3 connector
and 45 crimp type contacts are packaged with each module. The other end of
the cable can be wired to a user-supplied terminal block.
As an alternative, the 1746-C 15 cable, purchased separately, can be used to
connect the 32 point modules to the 1492-RCM40 terminal block.
For more information, refer to the Accessories section of this document.
9
4
Product Data.
Discrete Input and Output Modules
Description of Terms Used
in the Specification Tables
For your convenience, we have included the description of each table
heading used in the specification tables.
* Backplane Current Draw - the amount of current the module requires
from the backplane. The sum of the backplane current draw for all
modules in a rack is used to select the appropriate rack power supply,
e
Continuous Current Per Module - the maximum current for each
module. The sum of the output current for each point should not exceed
this value.
a Continuous Current Per Point - the maximum current each output is
designed to continuously supply to a load.
e Inrush Current - the temporary surge current produced when the input
is initially energized.
* Minimum Load Current - the lowest amount of current the output is
designed to operate at. Operating at or below this value is not
recommended.
* Nominal Input Current - the current present at nominal input voltage.
* Off-State Current - for input circuits, the maximum amount of leakage
current allowed from an input device in its off-state.
* Off-State Leakage -
for output circuits, the maximum amount of
current that may be present when the output circuit is in its off-state.
* Off-State Voltage (max) - the maximum input voltage level detected as
an OFF condition by the input module.
* On-State Voltage Drop - the voltage developed across the output
driver circuit during the ON state at maximum load current.
e
Operating Voltage - for inputs, the voltage range needed for the input
to be in the on-state. For outputs, the allowable range of user-supplied
voltage.
* Points per Common - the number of input or output points connected
to a single return (common) or supply (vcc).
* Signal Delay - for inputs, the response time required to transmit the
circuit status from the field logic to the digital logic. For outputs, the time
required to transmit the circuit status from digital logic to the output
driver.
* Sinking/Sourcing - describes a current signal flow relationship between
field input and output devices in a control system and their power supply.
Sourcing I/O-modules supply (or source) current to sinking field devices.
Sinking I/O modules receive (or sink) current from sourcing field devices.
* Surge Current Per Point - the maximum amplitude and duration
(pulse) of current allowed for a given period of time and temperature.
1
Voltage Category - the nominal voltage used to describe the module.
5
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
I
AC Modules
AC Input Module Specifications
Frqueny - 47to &Hz
e AnACnupudsa
mus be comp~aeanh
SC 500irpui
* Remae Twm
dcw
u
awn
A waent nitrrg ;esbr canbetned ba(r l rnit
s
r
t
howevwv N. mpuaing diradwisx ol tte AC irput oran
wilbe
mebd.
lWock.
AC Output Module Specifications
Vag
Operan
Cagry Vltg
value.
~gOy
pe
o
Common
t
cawc
Numnber
0195A
06
t746 AB
4
6
Backlane
Dra
5CAwet&
V
24 V
12040
Signal
Dde
(ma)
.A
91.of-11 rns
VACl06
Load
M
(mrn)
Continuous
Cunant
Pointper
MI
0
On-St
Cononuous
Carintper
Module
Swge Curm per point
0"C
604
Vo (ma)
Drop
1
4A at60
10.0A
100A
2trnsw
10iVat
&As304C
lAal30* C
C 4A al604 C 1A
A 10at 60*
16C
1746CA160705As050Aat 30* C
on-il S0ns
10mA
0
025A at60* C
0 37__A 0 0A off-11 Oms 2___
I614&O1
1
Off-Sat
LOC
(max.)
SA ad 30' C iVt
k 25msoT
C
j
a25ms
0.VA
10.0A
25mso
Feqency - 470 o3Hz
*
*To
Tae ouus
tma er ypont n te ACOnecydendtwnot at AC ne zerooos. Reecommended
srge sugesinm la biac wuuts whenswchng 120
VAC xidcma oads is Hais WOV pat rumber 220 M A2MA
ot eakageamr r ttniac oput, a loadng
resta can be comrnur
paral w7h yw load. For 120VACcpaon, use a IM
2 wall resstor, for 240VAC opwabon ue * 1SKiJ 5waftrasr
vt tomff. .ci
iRepatabity is axe enry 2 Seconds
* Removake
Temna) ok.
DC Modules
DC Input Module Specifications
operbng Vl
Vagm
Noint o
Catrput
Pnt Per
sm
16
8
B
1746-B
O.UA
16
1746-16 *
a
mm
18-30 8150
1-264 at 6
18-30
T
Rmovaie Temna) Bak
6
16
32
8
0r
(mtax
No"
inpyut
ImA
24 at
0VDC
ImA
24 at
0.4 A
5.0 VDC
56690s
1mA
A
5.0 VDC
1mA
A
5.0VDC
1mAA
5.0VDC
imA
246a
.lmA
24ma
M
.085A
0.0A
on-ho5
1746-WB
0.085A
17464V16 *
0:095A
1744.B832
0.106A
0
17464V32
0106A
00A
1746-4G16*
0140A
00A
5.0VDC
1as2VD
Crmrett
A
24c 2VAC
et0
1&-6464160'
5
16
WDly
24 V
00A
1"o3
2V
SV
Canman
1
10-30
Current D..
Catalog Number
5-5
32
8
16
16
$"Vo
09cd-3ms
5.5VDC
2 D
-j
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
DC Output Module Specifications
V4ge
Nmber Pointspr
of
Oulpta Common
Operdng
8
2s1746-MB0A
16
16
*7
8
32
2
1746-OV1 0t270A
748-0832
L
0452A
0.A
0.GA
1746-0V32 0452A 0.0A
iS
SA4
1A
mA
imA
ImA
on-0.1ns
1mA
1mA
Sff-ts
1mA
1mA
-mA
o1748-06I
.MA Om-0.5
IS0.180A
IAa0*I
o50Aat
mAn
laA
8Aa 30* C
C
6o4 C AAat 60" C
4~0
120Vil
0 50A
Oa
3.Akr
BAat 30* C
AA6* C
120 Va
050A
3.0Ab
10s
at 3 0 C
G 25A a.60* C
.A
1Aat 30* C
0.50Aat 0* C
1.20Va
8A t30* C
4Ai
c 60" C10=0
at 30" C
0.50A
0.25A
8Aat3o C
at 60* C
1MA
32A (* C
C
3,2Aat 60- C
0A15mA
30A
1Ims"
~
Ias
3A i
10t
CAb
OAM
3A .30A ki
0.50A
1oso
lOs2
t2V at o.1Al I - DAb 1Mb
ll#
I.163 C l.VaG.A
1 2V.
NA
24mA
1 fs*,
0n
120V at
4A at60* C
Aat
Aa
0 C
.Aa6
SugeCwrrentperPo.it
31 C
60 C
On-S
Vdgta.
Dro(mar)
Contnuoe
Current pr
Module
Cnnmw
Current per
Point
Lad
Curent
(min.)
10.mA
.AmA
16
16
4.5-635
2A
1746-OV8 0.135A 80.A
I .t-1.Orts
16
32
S
Off-S.
Leage
(ma)
or-0.1l
a
Io-0
Sara,
sgW
Day
(e0.)
a
CwurrStora
24V
SV
O
0.0A
1746-088 0.135A
8
174-088 L135 04A ONf-Las
10A4010-W
S
24VDC
cawlag
0e
nmbw
NA
A a'o
A
NA
NA
I RepeatabJ4y
is maavry I Semd
SRpqearabit iswesd "y2mcads.
NA- norappicM.
* RemuN Temnado*
AC/DC Modules
I
Volbas
I.
* Rmovale Trma d
AC/DC Input Module Specifications
.
Bo,
AC/DC Relay Output Module Specifications
Thecrbinuus ameani pu module must be &nid soae hodde powar dos not ead 144VA
&Removade
Teramed
ayok.
Volampere""
Apmumst
Make
RdayContact
Rangsb krX
i yhe cartnuu
4VC
120GVA
Break
Ampe
Break
Make
Make
RelayContad
1A
30A
125VOC
0.22A4
24VDC
l.2A
.A
50
3
1 GA
2.OA
-
Ratingskfr
0W4.
240 VAC
OW,and OW16
24VDC
Make
teaak
RtA
7.5A
120 VAC
G.75
15A
1.2A0
anintpeoodrdemustbeFmnibd so he modal pare doesnot exceed
1440V1A
For DCvdbge app6caimAhe makafreak npere raing fors taycntsc can be delamrinedby dvidag 26 VA by he agoied DC dpt. For exape, 26 YA48 MVDC-058A.
For DC vdge quican Aso han 4a V. he maksfreak rairags ore day conbets carnot exceed he mramn consntors aurenrdt2A
F DC vdage apcato
awaehea 48V emaonum consuous anrarlisiA.
treak
1.5A
25A
1OA
1.9A
022A'
125 VDC
2VA
28VA
Y
2.0A
28 VA
28VA
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
Combination Modules
Vilinge Categay
Inputs-120VAC
OuipAs IRay
1001120VAC
Points per
Module
Points pr
Common
Operating VM
2
85-132VAC
5265 VAC
Cag
2ou"
1746-404
4 pis
174""Coinos
0.00A
0.025A
0A
4
1-8
4
6
5-125 VDC
1746412
inputs
6
Specificain
R
Backptane Current
V 24V
Number
O9A
Seespeiaficatansfwr
Current per Module lr 14 is 4O
CoMnuousCurrent perodu1ia10ise.0A
See speicalons for Catog Nunber174IA16I and OW1.
inuousCunenitp Moduleia1012is12.OA.
:.A
174 01
CaimogNwnbes174i-4A4 mdl746-OW4.
.0 A
.
*Rwmontde kana.!Bon*
AC Input Module Wiring
174&46-A176A6
b7464A
012 A
100r120 VAC
100/20 VAC
L1i
I..W
IN
.0:
INA2
Ul
Used
W1
K3N
Hia
usd
iC0120
Us.
INE
100r120
VAC
INT
II
4
VAC
INC
i~
2 N3
2IN
NN
I
IN&
H!
*
1N1
INIINSIQ
1S
100 120
VAGIN2
L2
AZ
--
A27MC
ray
-
s
Con
CaCmecd
-'-
.-..
-
A
C
-
inetely
LI
-46
17464MB17
0240 VAC
17A4.14
20X240 VAC
L2
IF
IN 1A
LN
yN
200,240 VAG
Li
M
N1
N2
IND
VA
1N1
2 M4
L2
IN
C
VAC
0.2L2
AZIN
'P2
cow
-
Camebd
"r
Internaly
Commos
L
; --
is
IN
3
2010 012H
coh
LZ Cannins
lae
ComedOed
.
o
A
I)
8
ProductData
Discrete Input and Output Modules
AC Output Module Wiring
1746MAS
100-240
VAC
TriaOAtptt
U
I
U
U
U
I
I
I
U
(U
I
DC Input Module Wiring
17464BO
24 VOCSomg
17464316
24 VDCSebrg
DC(
Ifit eij
.Product Data
Discrete input and Output Modules
174&-4v32
24VDCSoring
-
- b-
-
*VD
VD
VDCI
VDC3
+VDC1
VDCI
VDC3
DCCDM1I--v
INO
IN16
IN1
IN17
N2
Wrina Gowp 1
24 VDC
Wi3
N4
IN$
+
-
-
-
-
--
o-
Wimg Gou2
+VDC3--
DCCOJ 2 +VDC2
- -+ V D-2
-
1
DCCOM3
IN18
WiingGoup 3
24VDC
IN19
Imn
IN21
IN6
IN7
IN22
INS
IN24
IN9
1N25
IN23
INI0
IR26
IN11
IN27
+--
Win &o 4
24VDC
-IN12
24 VDC
-
WN13
1
IN15
IN31
IN29
IN14 I130
VDC2 VDC4
VDC2 VDC4
t
DCCOM4
,VDC 4
+VDC4 -
--
17464G16
Ipu (Sc'rng, Lw.True
DCCOU
)
I
I
I DC Output Module Wiring
I
I
I
I
I
I
(I
I
I
I
I
U
I
I
I
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
i
o-S VDCTrwishx artput SmwV~n
1746-0V8
10-50 VDCTramistor ut
1446
10O-50
VDCTrmisbr Ouji So.rarg
Siraing
11
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
174- O32
5-50OVDC
TransimrOutput Sourchig
+VDC1I
vDc
I
+VDC1 I
VDC1
C2
Outc
aUT14
OUT1
OUT17
:
A
DC 2
01T2
OUTI?
OLTI
OUT24
OUT4
OUT20
1746-0V32
5-50 VDCTransistor Ouput Sinling
+VDC2
+VDCT
rVDC 2
G110 1
A
A
0IT2
0UT3.
0UT71
CR
Wrr
OUT25
007
0112
01177 0173
+VDC2
OUT1
1UT2
OUTS
01)7
+VDC2
00T2
( -
C
24 VDC
Y0=2
yDC1 I
OUT6
24VDC
24 VDC
241 VDC
OUTE
77 I
0U110
0UT26
077T11
Dull,?
0017I
00T10
OUT12 ouT28
OUFT13
OUT2
0mm77
-OUT14
OUTMC
DUTISOU12
0UT1
DCCOM1
DCCOM1 I
CO1
O2 2
Cou1
cOM2
0ow2
CR
OU721
0001
OU 26
DCCOM
DCCom
PCCOM2
DCCOM1
2
OI1
g, V11
DCCOM2
DCCOM2
cow 2
T746-OG16
DCCOM
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
AC/DC Input Module Wiri
17464N6
24VACOC
Siaig
AC/DC Relay Output
*Module Wiring
1746-OW4
t746-OWS
RelayOulPut
AabyOuVIA
Li
L1
L2
L2
L1
L2
1746-01
1746-0Wf6
0 utpa
sdated RelayOutput
RAay
Lf
va
VSO Ll
VS1 L1
VO-ouT 1
VS1
VS1L2
-N
V CUT2
VS3VDC
VS3DCCOM
NOT
UUUU MOT
USED
SOUT4
e
VS5L1
i
OUTS
-
6C
v ouT9
VS7VDC -
"
VS6VDC
VS- VdaageSu
OW
TV~
OUTS
0uT7
L2
75 6
J±Z
YA-
m
VS4L2
L2
VSSL2
Oki
T
OUTu1
VS6 DCCOM
ocUT VS7DCCOM
SOUT
13
OUTI
OUT
10
VDC
-I
OUrT
12
P
C
Referencen toLI, L2, VDC,
OUT
I
S
VS2 DCCOM
CUT3
vS
VAC4
ad
DCCOMae
kr redrece ordy
13
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
Combination Module
Wiring
-
1746408
101120 VACInput
RayOl
174&404
t00n 20 VACInpu
RelayOutu
L
YAZ-YDC
VActrOC
007
-6TIA)
L2
NOT
USED
NOT
NOT
LIND
100/120
VAC
NDi
USED
NOT
USED
A
ACM
GO
1746-4012
100/120VAGIrpuA
Rey OW
VACI
VDC
- I-
OU
007r4
-&
12
U5E0
10 120
VAC ,
L2
Determining Module
Compatibility for a Fixed
Expansion Rack
1k I
0M
The chart on the following page provides a quick reference for determining
what combination of modules are compatible with the fixed I/O expansion
rack.
Beginning in the upper right comer, follow the top row across until you find
one of the modules you intend to add. Next, follow the right column down
until you find the next module you intend to add.
The symbol (or lack of) at the intersection of both modules indicates their
compatibility. A dot indicates a valid combination. No symbol indicates an
invalid combination. A triangle indicates an external power supply is
required.
14
3
Pmduct Data
Dis;cretelInput and Output Modules
U
---------------------------------------- ro r
-E
L
.
.
...
.
..
*
- --
-
p
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
.
.1... 1..1.. .I.1 .f.f.
i. i. i. i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.i.
S
i L
*
*
*
.
.
.
*
*
.
.
.
e
e
e
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1.16 j.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.I.i.i.i.i.i.
.1.1.1.1. I
.|.p..i~i.
*I- |-I.
*111
- -* - - - i
I
iv. i[PIP.
. .*.'e'
e*e* 1.i. .
..
I
-I- I
tI91I-4
.
tt114It-I
-
.185
.370
I
l .vi.
I
1* I* lvi. '
.. lvi.
4 -- +..b.fl.
jv v
.I.v I.
.
.
..
t
e
.w
valid combination
invalid combination
use with external power supply
I
-I -I -I-
1 l 1
. .*. .. ~
I
I
.
I
e
I
I
I
i i .1.I
-
-
-
I
11
-
.1 .I.VI.
.045
I
.085
OW16
.170
1
-
1
-
l
108
-
4-
-
*.
025
.055
v v NIO4V
.055
DCM
.360
HS
.300
v
v
v v OB16
-1..ivHI IN16
4-4-4
q-rYv
. .p
-4-*-
-
BAS
.I.I-Ivv
vyI
-4-4-4-4-4-9-4--
.|v
I
.145
115
LLI
.
,
n
.280
.085
.5o
BAS.150
v
OB32
,
, .125
-040
452
j OV32 452
v
v I.
N32 |.106
.
.
045
I
-
I
I
060
-
-
-1I-II1I..I
*1*
.
.180
030
V V NO41
v v
.4I
-~-
.
1.
I
-1-4I
p- p-
.045
i
IeVIv 1012 090 .070
1 f
I
.I.v
vI N14 .025 .085
I LII4v-N14
9
v
Pi'
-
SI-
OWS
104
.1|.
.
. 4.I
.180
OW4
-
.IP . .v
'?41-I-9-9-94-9-l-4---4-I-
Examples:
1832 + V32 is a valid combination
DCM + OA16 is an invalid combination
I
.135
1-4
v v
PIP
1
.270
4--
OG16
I
I
.i
-49-4.444---l--.---4--.--
I4 14
Module is supplying power to an AIC.
No other device requiring power is connected to the AIC.
.
I
OB8
I
-II-4
I
I
I
I
ePe
.
-
1016 . .140
oVs .135
4-I9-i
-4-4
-4-
'YB .050
916
085
OV16
.
.
1-44I-I
. - -l-
-4.050
IB8
1"14
0-i 4-*1- -lvi.
i
.
-I
-I
= Basic
a[FV
I
-444----4444---11-4-
.085
v V jOA16
.*
.'.1.i.. -9 -4 4- - -Il--9 .* .|?|I.
1
4
* - . e e*e*e
e1.
.
.
.
.
9
1.
l
1
i
V
.**'*
1-1
&4--44-44-94
BASn
IP
--
. .1 . .1.
.. .
. .
.050
IPIP I~ lvi. 1816 I.085
. . . .
I~~
lA8
[Al6
I.I...Iv.1OAS
|
.
k1 I'Ifl~ I'
I''I'
PH H HHH
I.'
1.035
I
*
.:1
.
.i.
j.I.
IA4
-1.1.*1. 1M4 .035
. .I .' v . 1M8 .050
IPIP IIv HIIM1G . .085
pip IPIPIPIP
I'l'1~I'I~I~ 1.1.1.1.:
*i.
I.,. I*IvI*
.~I
.~.v
. . .
.L..1..l.I.'1.1.1..1. .
24VDC
SD
.
0B32 1.106
1
I
v
Iv
I
OX8
yT N041
V
NO4V
.085
1
.090
.055
.195
.055-
.145
15
Product Data
Discrete Input and Output Modules
Accessories
The following accessories are available for use with Discrete 1/0 modules:
Catalog
Number
Item
Description
Helps prevent debris from entering the SLC
enclosure that can cause shorts or improper
operation.
1746-N2
Modular card slot filler
1492-RCM40
.N RFor use with 32 point modules. Use this with
D1N Rai mountable terminal
the Catalog Number 1747-G15 cable for DIN
block
Rail connection of field wiring.
1741-Ci5
Two meter cable
Connector kit
1746-N3
Connects the 32 point module to a DIN Rail
mountable terminal block (Catalog Number
1492-RCM40).
This kit allows you to create your own cable (32
meters max.) ifthe Catalog Number 1746-015
cable is not long enough. It contains one female
connector and 45 crimp contacts. Note; 32
point modules are shipped with one connector
kit.
32 Point 1/0 Module
)
1746-C15
32 Point 1/0 Module
/
Coects 32 pintmodide t Din
Ral mumb e rminWa
bkxk
Male MIL-C43503 Header
3
1492-RCM40
DPn umrtUe tarmna Mock
16
SLC 50U System Overview
Networking Options
U Networking Options
SLC 500 programmable controllers communicate across an embedded
DH-485 network for program support and monitoring. The following
products provide networking options for the SLC 500 programmable
controllers.
IBM-PC or compatible with
1784-KR, DH-485 PC Interface
1747-AIC
Isolated Lnk Coupler
SLC 500
Fixed 110Controller
1784-KR Personal Computer InterfaCe Card
The Personal Computer Interface Card provides an interface for IBM XT/AT
and compatible computers to communicate over the Allen-Bradley DH-485
communication network. This includes communication to the Allen-Bradley
line of SLC 500 programmable controllers.
Feature
Benefit
PC XT/AT Interface to
DH-485
Eliminates the need for the personal
interface converter when using APS.
DH-485 isolation
Eliminates the need for an isolated
link coupler.
Reduced personal computer
overhead
Provides a faster update time for the
user interface through the
co-processor.
Specifications
Specification
Description
Power Requirements
Outputs
Hardware Interrupt
Cable Length (max.)
Environmental conditions
Operating temperature
5 VDC, 1.8A
RS-485 electrical/DH-485 protocol
IRQ2, IR03,
[RO4, IR05
1219 m (4000 ft.)
Storage temperature
0 to +600 C (+320 to +1400 F)
-4O 10
o+85 C (-400 to+185* F)
Humidity rating
5 to 95% (non-condensing)
<Va
SLC 500 system Ovendw
Networking Options
6001-F2E Standard Driver
The Standard Driver allows the 1784-KR card to be used on the DH-485
communication network for data acquisition applications. This allows you to
write 'C' application programs that communicate directly over the DH-485
network to stations such as the SLC 500. Non-token passing slave stations
such as the 2755-DM6 Bar Code Reader are also supported.
Feature
Benefit
Provides a Set of Linkable 'C'
Function Calls
Establishes communications with
devices on the DH-485 network.
Supports Microsoft 'C' v5.1 and Eliminates the learning curve of new
Borland Turbo 'C' v2.0 Compilers software packages.
Provides application libraries
Aids in data table read or write
diagnostic commands.
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler for DH-485 Connection
The Isolated Link Coupler provides an electrically isolated network
connection for an SLC 500 controller. One coupler is required at each
DH-485 network drop. The coupler includes a 304.8 mm (12 in.) cable for
connection to the programmable controller. Note that a maximum of 32
devices can be connected to the network.
27
shntM
4
4
4
General Description
WinTrend is a simple yet powerful data acquisition tool for collecting and monitoring real-time and historical PLC
I
data for Microsoft Windows 3.1. WinTrend provides several display formats for the data being logged. Trend Graphs
can be scaled automatically or manually.
WinTrend can log data by time, event, unsolicited or continuously. Data can be acquired from the PLC's data table or
from a Windows compliant DDE driver. WinTrend is designed to work with all members of the Allen-Bradley family of
programmable controllers. Data is logged to disk using the standard DBF"M file format. Using WinTrend's "AutoTrend" feature, you can set up and begin logging data in less than 5 minutes. Typical applications include: process
monitoring, historical trending, maintenance, diagnostics, and reporting.
4
4
Displaying Real-Time
Bi
or Historical Data
WinTrend can display real-time
or historical data... at the
same time. As data is being
logged to disk, WinTrend can
display this data in a familiar
"Strip-Chart" recorder display.
This powerful trend display can
eliminate the need for your
existing mechanical strip-chart
recorder. . . and the
maintenance!
0
lF u
1:3242
1:W17
4
Features
*
Displaying Real-Time or Historical Data
*
e
Auto Trend has 4 Simple Steps to 5egin
Logging Data
" Value 5ar giving Exact Numeric Values on Graph
e
Log Data into standard D&F File Format
" Templates for User-Defined Trend Displays
*
100% Compatible with PLC Database
*
Formula Support to Convert PLC Values into
Engineering Units
" Project Reporting Allowing for Reconstruction of the
Project
*
Event-Based Logging using PLC Data Values or
DDE Events
*
Windows DDE Compliant
*
"Heads--up Display Windows to Change
Display Options
Graphical Reporting on any Windows Supported
Printers
*
Security through User Login/Logout
Point Selection
WinTrend provides a quick and
easy method for selecting and
logging important PLC data. With
WinTrend, you don't have to learn
programming language to begin
S
Mi450MG
1
SCALEDTE* 1
S
IQ)M5DMB
1
SCALE-CONSTANT
logging data and displaying trend
graphs. Using the PLC's
cIatabase, all you need to do is
E
pick log points from a table.
n
I
r
SC LE
F
/r
100%compatible with PLC database
WinTrendi fully supports the PLC database. When you define symbols, addresses and descriptions during Ladder
Diagram program development. WinTrend can open this database for quick log point selection. This eliminates the
need to create a second (tag) database for describing data acquisition points. When you take advantage of the
PLC's database, log point addresses can be automatically updated when changes occur in the PLC's database.
Formulas
Formula support lets you read a PLC value and convert it into engineering units. Formulas can contain up to 5
variables.These variables can consist of constants or additional PLC data table elements. Basic math operations
are supported.
WinTrend - Expression
I! IIacontain'
Event based logging
Logging can be started or stopped using PLC
data values or DDE events. Each Trend can
a unique Start/Stop log "expression,"
and can include up to 5 variables. All data
types are accepted: PLC address, symbol and
DDE values. Using expressions, you can
control the rate that WinTrend logs data.
Dynamic Data Exchange - (DODE)
WinTrend also supports logging of data via a Windows compliant DDE driver. This allows WinTrend to log data from
other programmable controllers, an Excel or Lotus 1-2-3 for windows spreadsheet or other DDE compatible programs.
DE drivers for other PLCs are all supported in WinLinx (see page 22).
Log on Change
Logging continuously or on data change helps to minimize the amount of data that is stored on disk. WinTrend also
performs periodic updates in the event that the logged data doesn't change for an extended period of time.
\K
Powerful/Flexible Trend Display
Displaying Realtime or Historical data is only useful if it displays the right picture. WinTrend's flexible trend viewer
lets you adjust the graph to suit your needs. If the data is too close together, you can quickly zoom out for an
overview or zoom in for a more detailed look.
"Heads-up" display
WinTrend's unique "Heads-up"display lets you quickly and easily access many of the most common display settings:
(e.g., X-axis time range, Y-axis scaling, graph title and line description). With Heads-up, all you need to do is point to
the area you wish to change and click the mouse. In addition to keyboard editing of display settings, WinTrend lets
you dynamically adjust the time scale and Y-axis scale using a mouse.
S
-s
S
4-
M. F_
IS 1223 1 A 1 w
Value Bar
Using WinTrend's powerful "Value-5ar"you can accurately measure data
values right on the graph. These powerful display features make data
comparison and analysis fast and easy. The value bar helps eliminate guess
work and errors,
1345
if-5
-
U
Display Scaling
I
WinTrend offers several display scaling options: Automatic. Preset and Template. Using these options, you can
automatically scale the display to fit the logged data as well as compare logged data to a single scale or reference
line. Each log point can be independently scaled or set to match a master scale. An isolated graphing option allows
the trend displayed to be broken into individual graphs, one for each log point.
Prss
..
-4
u
Fbur
-uq4
419
SunFebruary14. 993 7:26:05PM
Temperature
100
43.191
IS
1
150
I0
Time 7:26PM
U
7:26:02
7:26:03
7:26.05
7:26:06
7:26:07
7:26:08
7:26PM
Templates
WinTrend uses "Templates" for all trend graph display settings. Templates can be used to set X-axis, Y-axis values,
pen color, line thickness, grid settings. etc. Templates can also be used to select which pen\log point will be displayed
or hidden.
Reporting
WinTrend offers three types of reporting: project, numeric and graphical. Project reporting contains all information
necessary for reconstruction of the project. This includes all log point information, trend setup and program
settings. Data reporting is divided into numerical and graphical types. A numerical report consists of a table of data
values based on a selection of log points and required time range. Graphical reporting contains a printout of the
displayed trend graph. This includes colors, X-axis time range and Y-axis scaling. &W or Color reports may be printed
on any Windows 3.1 supported printer.
Catalog Numbers:
WT-300.......WinTrend
WinTrend is also avalable as a part of ICOM's WinStation and ViewStation packages
WS-900......WinStation: includes WinLinx, WinTrend, and WinView and WinLogic 5
WV-900 ...... ViewStation: includes Win Linx. WinTrend, and WinView
For more information see the chart on page 24.
I
,COM
*
*-.
-
*-'~-~
? V.p....cs~-.
ICOW
I
UCT
PRO
SHEET
DATA
TREND'ontains two programs in one. One is a data acquisition
engine and the other is a flexible trend display. Both have been integrated for fast
procebssjableselection and display trending. Each program section works
General Descript Ion
-WINtelligent
During loggingr th display can be linked to the data'
real-time trend graph. The trend graph is designed to
ndeptlffth'the
a
acquisitioninf
look like faiiliar"Strip-Chart" recorders.
WINtelligen TREND provides a quick and easy method of reading and logging
important PLC data. TREND saves time by eliminating tedious log point setup
and definitionUsing the existing PLC's database, all you need to do is pick log
Overall Benefis
*
*'
points froin'a table and begin logging data.
With WINtelligent TREND, you have full control over the trend display; X-axis
time range, Y-axis scling, log point definition, grid lines, colors etc. All display
settings can be changed
dynamically while viewing
historical or real-time trends... a
UX
1-
S,
so"
time saver.
O.
Deb""real
Data values can be accurately
measured right on the graph
using the "Value-Bar." This
makes data comparison and
analysis fast and easy. Data is
logged to a Standard "DBF" file.
This allows other "DBF"
compatible programs to read
and analyze the logged data.
I2
r.wj
-
Common Uses
-
ra~~i,~. ufI i
a 12k2 1 Q"fl
l5
I
1fl4
~
12
WINtelligent TREND satisfies a wide variety of data collection needs; automatic
data acquisition, data scaling, trending graphs and log reports are just a few.
Typical applications for WINtelligent TREND are:
-Historical aalyi
PLC's data table and logged to disk in one step.
Project Management
WINtelligent TREND alliwlyou tp
yrojects on your Jor 6 network
drive: Projects consist of l6gpoints and PLC databases. Coliec$ad data can be
logged to any drive or directory, independent of the pr6ject Wfelligent
TREND gives you the flexibility to place the information wher yu Keedi
t
File Management
Log files are created every 24 hours and can be a
tlp
hard disk space. Data is stored in the widely used .DBF file formatr'"
Time and
WINtelligent TREND'iyes you the ption to log datr
ir
event
When
re.
Typically,.data is logged by time (for example every 15 niihttl
your process is not continuous, WINtelligent TREND canionitor and
automatically start logging aid automatically stop loggin
li'fm yoir process
EvenN-ased
jgging'
-7
W NtM1iet TREND
S-0
save
has been completed: Eic'ctrend
can contamn unque tart /stop
events. Tis is, very usflfr
batch momftormfg and' alarmmig
applicationS111
810
Tsto
BOA Stop Legg
aB30
e
0-
-;
Logging Features
"Auto-Trend" -4 simple steps to logging data; no programming required
e Log Batch mode - Quickly view and print batch graphs
Supports Remote "Batch ID", useful ii describing "Batch" Data
- Read all data file types including I, O, N, FP PD, etc
* Supports formulas to convert PLC data into engineeng units
e
Log point setup uses familiar "Spreadsheet Table ormat"
1
e
f-i,
Log continuously on data change or on event
Usei-definable log rate (i.e.,1 second;30 minutes, 8 houirs Continuous) &
Test iode
~~~.where lo'gii~ to d
disk' canbbe dioatePCw~dt
slge
Log Confirmation sends acknowledgmnent t the PLC whe d
l
..
*
Auto "Purge" old data- saves hard disk space.
-Display
Features
* ~.sfrt
<;f~~
~'
.
Supports from to 100 nes (pens) per raph
e Scroll through historical data ut
- * Automatically display previous/next dayof trend dataw
Provde qick access to scaliig, time and displaysetns
e
Configurable, "Templates" for fast data access and analysis
e Flexible scaling allows accurate companson of logged data
eBatch/cycle
dipaysrolling:-- autoaily
d1isplay new batch
compare new batch data with
e Standard profile with deviation
captured "Standard"'
- Network support - several stations can display same trend in real-time
* Multi-window support - display several views of historical or real-time
trend data
a
Direct access to display adjustments using a numeric keypad or mouse
Historical Data
WINtelligent
M
TREND provides
- familiar
a
"Calendar" -type dis,t.'play for viewing
real-time or his-
tocaltorr
data.
-'.1.111
J-~
-4:z
F
-
~f4Ai:
Tb
Ie.
This featuire lets bu o ooit#hiI
1
,onitor the trend m real-time onanother mchr
(on the rfetwk) In fact
"several operators can view .e trend datainral-timet
iththeatmtic
r 'ino
'
froii
rends
a
cat'd
TREND
update feature, W Ntelligent
teupigtettcendsupdateeor
more
loggg Stations. This elim iits the ned for reddndaht logging of dat ihd also
reduces PLC network communications: Network support also
updates Trend hne description changes to all machines monitoring automatically
the trend.
All information in a INtellint TREND ojet can be
d
rnte Tis
trend setup and program settings. Flexible
information,
all logispoint
ncludes
ata reporting
divided
mito numerical and graphical formats. A numerical
report consists of a table of data values based on a selection
desired tme range. Graphical reporting consists of a trend of log points and
setting colors, X-axis time range and Y-axis scaling, etc. are graph. Options for
provided.
can be printed on any Windows 3.1 supported B & W or color printer. Reports
Proiect Nam:
Trend Nam:
Bois (a
Time
135Qr43r%0
-
50
51
so
61
51
51
581
52
53
54
14:2Q36.00
14:46:3&00
14:M3&)OO
14-4&36.00
Peoc 2S5
Pag 2 o
.DateAug251993
Data: AA* 251333
Lode
62
63
63
62
6!
61
Lim. 3
Lime 4
70
80
71
70
67
.8
81
81
Li
5
so
LineRG
100
fim?.
110
100
109
g
10
tiMe8
-
120
119
-
120
113
81
91
-
-
.118
117
110
117
-70
*117
1:560L300
1&1Q3&W0
152t3&W
..
-
-
55
54
-8-2:055
-
Compatibility
70
70
82
91
91
100
100
8'
100
-1
533.054
:300
Processor
60
so
558
5
60
69
5
67
'83
83
891
-
110
ill
116
i
11-
110>117
,
-
1
WINtellignt TREND supports the'Allen-Bradley PLC-5 and SLC-500
family of
processors. Support for Allen-Bradley PLC-2, PLC-3 & PLC-5/250 is available
using DDE and WINtelligent LINX
Support for processors or devices other tharn Allen-Bradley is
the Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) communications method. accomplished via
Purchases of DDE ';
drivers for other processors are available through other channels.-ICOM
j
testing ;various DDE driveis and will publish a list of
these
as
they
are'j
completed. ICOM will also test DDE drivers based on custome
request
S
-
-st.,.,
100% Compatibility.,
Sa e
~~(tJ'
-
WINtelligent TREND fully supports the PLC database.
WiNtelligent TREND can
access the symbols, addresses, and descnptions entered during
Ladder Diagram
program development, which allows operators
to
quickly
and easily select
points...
fobri6log'2
* Communction
en radiey
Support
r7),1T2
len-Bradley 1784-KL
- nBradley 1770-KF2
*.ln-Bradley 1770-KF3
er3a-
~
zt.~%.,p;
:v-
-Schultz S136-SD/SD2
L..Ybwics Dfle.zc.LY
-,ICOMLAN
....
Minimum
Requirements
-
J'A
tellgentUNX Driver (see WINtelligent LN
scft DOS 5.0 or greater anid Microsoft Wd1n
corpatible 386
personal computer
r.'At least 4 Meg4aby>tes of R
*Z10.Megabytes of h
,,,,,A
Part u
er
.
RAd
disk
WTnu00
-, WINtlligerpt
*WINtelligent
-
e
fo
dditional
1
-
on
mchi5'4te
or'Color mnomtor (VGA or higher resolution)
Any Windows 3.1 co
et oin'
device(
ue trac baUi
-,rending Software
Product Includes
.i.
D Data Acquisition axA Historcal
TREND Software
on 3.5" High Density disks
-4
Communications drivers for Allen-Bradley DH/DH+
e*Windows
JWINtelligent LINX Lite)
- WINtelligent DATABASE; the ICOM Windows Database
Editor
* WlNtelligent TREND User's Guide .
For More Information
3
-
Contact your local authorized ICOM distributor
demonstration. (Most ICOM distributors are also for more information and a
Allen-Bradley distributors.)
For more information on the latest pricing and
product development on this or
any of the WiNtelligent Series Windows products from ICOM, please call our
Windows Hotline at 414-321-9966.
WNtetWNt
LOCWINelligg
RII.SLATE
WIteiget
WlNteligent VIW, WINtfllige t DESCfFlON,
WIN -aaent QUAITYr WNaerhie TREND
WI eNX,
Wtelligene
and WINwien RECIPEme trademarks
VISION,
of ICOM, [. PLCis a registrd1 trademwk and Alen-Bradley.
a
Howa
ar
trademarks
Au
Windows are trademarks
SLC,and
of of
thehe
a
Micosoft
r-e
Corporation. Other product namtes
ere dtrademarks of theLotusDevepment Corporatio.
Inervtiod
in this documentametrademarks or regisered
Microsoft
and
fldeoerbs of their
ICOM,
Inc
P.O. Sox 351
.
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0351
-PHONE
(414) 321-8000
TECH SUPPOR
)2
2(414)321-4268
FAX . 4. 4 21.. I
TIAIL~:
71
-
ICOM,
.28865
Inc. (Detroit, M)
Village Lane
Farmingten Hill:, M 484
ICOM United Kngdo
42 Sherwood Road
Sromsgrove,
Worcesteshire
A X:(313)855531
d
'-F (313) 855-0035A(
'Phone:44 527 579 111
FAX: 44 527 579 061 ---
240or193/sjG
TM
Advanced Communications
Made Simple
From within a WinTelligent Series product, you can
elect to use the same SuperWho screen to select a
station for online communications or project
WinLinx is the full-functioned communications
program supplied with all WinTelligent Series
configuration. No more guessing about station
numbers; just point and click.
products. Using WinLinx, you have virtually unlimited
online use of your WinTelligent Series products, each
product communicating via a single or multiple
communications device(s). WinTeligent Series
products can open and close online communications
without disturbing the flow of data to your other
online WinTelligent products, even if using the same
communications devices. WinLinx allows you to
configure all the devices available to your computer.
Each device is added to a list for fast and
convenient selection from any WinTelligent Series
product.
*ZIlnsr
Special Features
The SuperWho window displays all processors and
communications modules on the connected network.
The window can be configured to display in a text
mode (much like our A.I. Series products) or in a
graphical mode. You can even open multiple
SuperWho windows (as many as you want),
I
---
ir--
n
WinLinx supports Microsoft Windows Dynamic Data
Exchange (DDE). Via DDE, WinLinx can transfer data
between your PLCs and many DDE-compatible Windows
applications (i.e., Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word,
Lotus 1-2-3 for Windows, Microsoft Access, etc.). Use
your favorite Windows package to create reports or
analyze data from your PLC. Naturally, Winunx can
carry on DDE conversations and still provide
communications for multiple WinTelligent Series
packages!
ism.
I
WinLinx includes an impressive array of utilities for
monitoring and troubleshooting both communications
and DDE conversations. You can monitor statistics
fl
3Es
S -U
concerning a specific DDE conversation, the
communications driver you are using, or monitor the
diagnostic counters stored in a communications module
or processor on your network.
WnLirix also provides communications for your
existing ICOM A.l. Series productsl By using the
Win Linx driver in your A.I. Series software, you can
Ilgdifferent
window to display a listing of all data table and
program files. You can display multiple data table
and program files siniultaneouly. Though no ladder
logic editing is supported, you can dit data table
values and display data table values in a number of
radices.
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) conversations
between your DDE-compatible Windows applications
I
and your PL-Cs are structured using WinL-inx Topics.
4
tnD
U
A Topic defines which communications device, PLC
station, and communication mode (polled vsn
unsolicited) to use when requesting data via DDE.
ropics may be grouped into Projects and
conveniently recalled for your different
communications scenarioco.
(EIaE~ gPrjc
perform online functions with your AlI 5enesq
O~de~rjc
software from a DS Windowevet whileyoter
WaTendyent Sries products are onlinesThe A.l.
Seres ap
wic alow you to choose youPr
communications deviceafrom the iont of configured
the WinTelligentv
under
just
EDostmng Prolect Names: Furnace
Tc
dplication
Iievces
Series
products.
ieinex;
eike
P____OIL"___0_W
3
_____
The Copy to Clipboard command quickly places a
"link"
to a single PLC address (or block of PLC addresses) on
the clipboard. This "link" may be pasted into many DDEcompatible applications for immediate monitoring or
analysis. If the link consists of a block of addresses.
nfl
La
inC~~you
Iformat
can
automratically
the data
so the desired
number of rows
and coluns will
thecard
_____________
1d
gh ."
koM ffrt Lk
&fsting PrjDect"
Fum
The i "k
destination
document.
VRM=
9W
vU
ac
m
m.d.
qi
int
may
EluM
Catalog Number:
.--
WinLinx
WD-iOO .......
Monitor PLC-5 ladder programs and PLC-5 and SLC500 data tables directly from WinLinxi Select the
Winview is also available as a part of ICOM's
desired processor using the familiar SuperWho
WinStation and ViewStation packages
For more information see the chart on page 24.
U,
I-
-~.-}J
-
31*
'
.
-
A'--.-
-,.
TU DS
PURICODIUE
r~..
.M
.
'I"!.........g
. 1V
Genera
.i:-:;r~
-
64
telligent LINX is a Microsoft
Description
P
EJ
'
w
W.
indows-based comumcation appation
m?~for use with Allen -Bradley and/or Modicon programmable controller
Win ows' Dynami'cIData Echngi (D E), WIN lligent LIlXgcan
fr6rii PLCs'nisingi common commumcation devicesuch'as
1B
X thA-B 1784-KT boaid or the Modicon SA85 bord). The Allen-Brdlefyersin
3and PIL-5famfiliesof
of WINtelligent LINX siyyorts the SLC-500, PLC-2,
uppor4he%984
Modicorsto
The
(including the PLC-5/250)
-pice
Sts
herIatht-and
Series p'rocesso'rs. WINtelligent LINX is a complete communication softwre,!
ng extern'a1driver software to operattovidesreal
diuirin
4cige,
available DDE-compatible Windows
commercially
for
lant flooiaccess
proj;rafis as well as Windows programs that a user may design.'
With WINtelligent LINX and a DDE compatible Windows application, a user can
-
to a PLC, and be online collecting data in about 5 minutes
Sinstallconnect
WINtelligent LINX/Processor/Communications
Processor
I
C
nn
tiliEtI
Device Support Matrix
-________________
&
Communication
Driver / PLC Type
A-B 1784-KT
Support,-
SLC-500
PLC-2
w/ICOM
cable
DH+
w/ICOM
55-103 cable
DH+
-
984
PLC-5
PLC-5/250
DH
D14+
D
DH+
DH+
DH+
DH+
DH/DH+
PLC-3
55-103
A-B 1784-KL (T-45/47)
A-B 1770-KF2
DH/DH+
DH/DH+
DH/DH+
,-A-B1785-KE
DH+
DHD+
1H+
-
PLC-5 Channel 0
I-
-a-I.S.?-.I
-
DH/DH+
Sutherland-Schultz
-
Front Port
)14DH+
.
DH/DLH+
DH/DH+
DH/DH+
DH/DH+
DH/DH+
DH/DH+
2-.5136-SD
-
DH/DH+
-
IPX/SPX or NetBIOS to
ICOM LAN Logistics
',.RadisysoXycomVME
SWz
VME.Backplane
--
>KA-B 1770-KF3
DH-485
BA-e1747-KE
DH-485
A-B1747-PIC
DH-485
Modbus Serial
Backplane
-
K
"
ASCH or
& -
onModbus
Common Usesti
INtelligert LINX. can be used for a wide variety of apphictons
applicitions involve acquiring data from PLCs to spreadsheets and dataT
4
data logging, process monitoring and report generation. Recipe own
can also be achieved through the use of LINX's ability to write data to PLC
+
I. Features
I
I
*
-
All communication hardware devices are supported in one softwiare
ge.
There is no need to buy a separate software package for each hardware
device you wish to use. No individual driver programs to install",
e
Multiple communication hardware devices may be used siniultaneously in a
single personal computer. Multiple devices allow comniunications on
multiple Data Highway, Data Highway Plus, Data Highway 485, Modbus or
Modbus Plus networks.
-
e
Data Table monitoring for the SLC-500, PLC-2, PLC-5 and Modicon 984.
LINX allows monitoring and editing of tfb data table. Multiple data tables
can be displayed at the same time.
-
-
Display the ladder logic for a PLC-5 processor. The display supports online
monitoring and searching.
.4.
I
I
* A Graphical "Who-Active" function. This provides a graphical representation
of the active devices on the DH, DH+, DH-485, Modbus, and Modbhs Plus.
WINtelligent LINX can display "Who-Actives" for different networks at the
same time.
-
<'1'<*
e0
Complete diagnostics and error reporting for the DH, DH+, DH485,Modbus
and Modbus Plus networks. WINtelligent LINX also includes diagnostics for
the DDE link of each conversation.
"
-
Individual word and bit reads and writes.
" Block reads and writes.
- Unsolicited messages through the use of message instructions/zones in
PLCs. (Supported in the PLC-5, PLC-3 and the SLC-5/02 with the Message
instruction. Supported in the PLC-2 with communication zone rungs.
Modicon 984 unsolicited message support is currently under development.)
-
WINtelligent LINX can copy Link information to the Windows Clipboard to
ease establishment of DDE links.
* Local and Remote stations can be used through 1785-KA module bridges,
including the new 1785-KA5 and A-B's new Internet protocol. For Modbus
networks, BP85 miodule bridges can be used to access remote stations.
-What
isDDE?
-
Ni.
-
Automatic optimization of data communications.
e
The Security system restricts access to vital functions and processor data
table aas.
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) is an interprocess communications specification
that is built into the Microsoft Windows operating system. It allows Windows
programs that suppbrt DDE tiexchange data between themselves. All
communications occur within the Windows environment using very simple
communication instructions.:
-The easiest way to visualize Dynamic Data Exchange is to think of a
conversation between p'eople in a room. These people represent the different
Microsoft Windows applications running your computer. Some of the people in
the room only ask questions (clients), others only provide answers (servers), and
some ask questions and provide answers (clients/servers). DDE Logistics only
answers questions and is therefore a server. Microsoft Excel is a client/server as
it can do both.
Dynamic Data Exchange questions are quite generic. When Microsoft Excel asks
WINtelligent LINX a question, it is merely looking for data. Excel does not know
here the data is coming from. Excel only knows that it asked WINtelligent
-LINX a question, and if WINtelligent LINX has an answer, then data will be
pro-vided. Each Dynamic Data Exchange question consists of three parts:
To whom am I talking (i.e., which Application gets the question)? .
What general subject are we talking about (i.e., what's the Topic)?
Which speific data do I re4uire (i.e.; what specific Item are we
talking about)?
e
.d
- -g:
-
-
-
above best apply to our example of a group
ee p
The bold portions of the
Cof people holding a conversation: who, subject, data. The italicized portions are
the actual terms that are used to describe the parts of a Dynamic Data Exchange
qestio:Application,Topic, Item.
-R..
Followmg ire th definitionof Application
tApliationi When you use a Microsoft Windows application to obtain data
Windows application, you must provide"the name f the
iS.fromriother
#lkiitionyou 2Nish to'respond to your question To use the previous example,
when you pose a question to your group of people, you must tell them whom
you wish to respond.
When you ask WINtelligent LINX for data from a PLC on a highway, the'
name to use is ICOMWDRV. ICOMWDRV is the name to use for
Dyniiiic Data Exchanges no matter what you have named the WINtelligent
<
LINX icon.
I!Application
Topic: Once the Application is known, we must determine which Topic to discuss.
To use the previous example, when you pose a question to an individual, you
must select a subject to talk about. Available Topics are determined by the
Application,.The person asking the question must choose an available topic, or
data exchange cannot take place. In WlNtelligent LINX, a topic represents a
specific path to an Allen-Bradley PLC. WINtelligent LINX can maintain many
topics.
The topics are just the beginning. You could configure two different topics to
access the same processor via the same device, but poll data at different speeds.
With the necessary PLC programming, you could even configure a topic to wait
for data from that same processor; there would be no polling at all.
For better management, WINtelligent LINX stores topics in Projects. Each project
can hold many topics tailored to a specific scenario.
Item: After the Applications and Topics are known, your Microsoft Windows
application must provide WINtelligent LINX with the specific Item to discuss. To
use the example of the conversing people: the exact individual (who) and
genieral subject is known, now you must determine the exact data you require.
In the previous two sections, we discovered how to address WINtelligent LINX
when asking a question, and how a topic determines which Allen-Bradley PLC
to access. The last part of the question, Item, determines which address to return
to your Windows application.
Example:
-,ICOMWDRV.
.'Topic
Application
Item
C5:0.acc
PLC5Topicl
-
Where ICOMWDRV is the application name, PLCSTopic1 is an example topic.
ne and C5:0.acc is aneLamle item; in this case a counter accumulator in a
name
P2
5
le
itm
in
thi
ca.
-The Application, Topic, and Item are basic parts of all DDE conversations. Each
DDE compatible Windows program has its own unique syntax. Consult the
documentation of your Windows program to determine the exact procedure and
-
Commeircial DDE Compliant Software
3Packages
....
..
-
Microsoft Excel 3.0, 4.0 (sample macros included)''Microsoft Word for Windows 1.1, 2.0
Wonderware InTouch
-Miaosdft Visual Basic
L
Lotus
1-2-3 for Windows 4 x
- tu'Ami Pro 2 0'-
Minimum
-
The following commercially available software packages have been tested with
JINtelligent IN:*
*
3
syntax used for DDE conversations.
Requirernents,
-"Micrsoft DOS 5.0 (or later) and Microsoft Windows 31
IBM compatible 386 or 486 personal computer
e
.
:
*
e--~-'
At least 4 megabytesbof RAM ' Monochrome or Color monitor (VGA or higher resolution)
-
-Any Windows 3.1 compatible pointing device (mouse, trackball, etc.)
Part
Nurbe
Product Includes
For More information
WD-100
WD-150
*
WINtelligent LINX for Allen-Bradley PLCs
WINtelligent LINX for Modicon 984 Series PLCs
WINtelligent LINX Software on 3.5" High Density disks
WINtelligent LINX User's Guide
Contact your local authorized ICOM distributor for more information and a
demonstration. (Most ICOM distributors are also Allen-Bradley distributors.)
For more information on the latest pricing and product development on this or
any of the WinTelligent Series Windows products from ICOM, please call our
Windows Hotline at 414-321-9966.
W1NteMgent,WINtetligent LOGIC 5, WINtelligent EMULATE 5, WINtelligent LINX. WINteLmigent
VIEW, WINtelligent DESCRIPTION, WLNtelignt VISION,
trademarkand AlIen-Bradley, SC, and DataHighway are
WINteLbgent QUALITY, and WLNteligent TREND aretrademarksof 3COM.Inc. PLCis a registered
Microsoft ExceLWord for Windows.
trademarks
of the LotusDevelopment
Corporation.
tradenarks of theA
Ben-Bradley
Company. Lotus and 1-2-3are registered
in this
Other product namesmentioned
trademarkof Wonderware.
Visual Basic andWindows ate tradenarks of the Microsoft Corporation. InToud isa registered
andar herebyacknowledrd.
trademarks
of their respective
companies
documentaretrademarks
or registered
ICOM, Inc.
P.O. Box 351
Milwaukee, Wi 53201-0351
PHONE: (414) 321-8009
TECH SUPPORT: (414) 321-4266
FAX: (414) 321-2211
COM
CON, Inc. (Detroit, MI)
28866 Village Lane
Farmington Hills, MI 48334
PHONE: (313] 855-8115
FAX: (313) 855-0036
ICON United Kin gdom
42 Sherwood Road
Bromsgrove, Wercestershire
B60 30R
nd
Phcne:44 527 9111
FAX: 44 527 579 061
2300/993
SIGNET 9010 Intelek-Pro"
Flow Controller
The SIGNET 9010 Intelek-Pro Flow
Controller was engineered for liouid
(low measurement. and cnol in
process pipes
frequency range of 0 tc O KHz offers
the opportunity to connec' other flow
U
meters and high resr
he 9010 controller
to
-urbines
Modular Design
The modular design latelek-Pro
offers the advontage of exponding a
%ystemby plu g
- - :.. cord in'o the
r nit This %'c .-- .: ave
complele setponi cc- - - rih
aistoble hysere& - aons
such as pump
-
I
oulsing
cp'c.
>nl:onl chemr.
'-e' '-a qumz
x2
-
used foi
and
on-
If6rniion
- --
ro v
Part No
3-90 0: 111
nentoton
De'
iatidn
Flowra6ntroller with frequency input.
(Fil6fitooaiizrl 90 1t'132 VAC
(16 16t30 yDC)
00
'noano
-
Y3;902.0 12
C"'-
-03e41
5R39010 4003
400
s-4432_000"440- 1"', ::t
Flo' controller Yith frequency input.
(Flow rate, totlizer) 180 to 264 VAC
30 VDC).
Frequency input, isolated
4 o 20/0 to 20 mA-input isolated
0 to.0 to 3OVDCJipu solgted
2'-40'n
l
2
2oyd~i
-car......
eSWOIOW5XD
isoble
nous
isola ed
K'W50
cc
I
Specifications
SIGNET Intelek-ProTM
Series of Controllers
Power Requirements:
mox
90 o la2
o Signet Com pot ronsmmler. Or utilize
the wide range frequency input 10:
o connect
speciolty kow sensors. Intelek Pro offers
compatibility for an easier system
The Intelek-Pro is a precision
toe bosec so a'
cor Olars designed for use ima wide
VAC
.
Operating Temperature:
32 in I3SF 10 1 55 "C)
Enclosure Materials:
ABS plom' NJEMA AX liP
6S} hloi :NIMA. 4Y cP 651
range oi industriol control applicolions
1
ifloH
and OPP InieleL-Pro
Intelligent Software
t'.he hne
iei:irements are
Supporlec U, :nw;enoven soirware ih o
operong patterns and standard
installoion.
will guide you thrcegh the necessary
calibration oorometers, using the alpha-
Dimensions:
Liquid Crystal Display:
4 5dig, u5 m
g
luppe S digits 0 3
Input Frequency Range:
'-1 ,-
Optionat input:
1..'~
Isolation:
2-Relay Output Card:
'C
4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA
Output Card
Response tine:
Max. Loop Resistance:
0 to 5 or 0
lo
Modular Hardware System
Th -:aecYkPro has a madelo:
sis:e. ut'zmg plug- n Qcin'i
10 VDC
.&'ye
mpos
and
*Pec{mic sysel configjrinon
Response Time:
he froni panel allows access
I-L-
n'23
rl con;
CI
r
g
<ne
;:he
il
Choose a Sgnei sensoi to conmpete
o cm. oi chncje t
onu
front pone,
sature flexib iC -
.,p0ete
-
Complete Sensor Compatibility
Display Accuracy:
sc
cobrotc
o0p.-2
Output Card
Min. Load Resistance:
I K2
numerc
Co:)
:A:
Variety of Outputs
nierchangeobe K. rn cords offer a
A'5ds CIE j,
: ihe Sofware
unique mulipie poin lnearizer, resuting
:2 0 ily couoensoy perrormance
curve. otier o cc: -d
accuracy wt
any cuirei .
o:;outpu caord
any anaog
O tra:ns0're: suen 0
Di
SIGNET 515 Rotor-XM
Flow Sensor
Lei
Creating a flow mnonitonng or
connolling system is simple with
C
SIGNETS 5 15 Rotor-X Flow Sensoj
Combine the 5 15 wilh o matched
sensor installaiior fiting, and a Signet
1ow meter or controller, and nave on
operational flow monitoring system in
minutes.
0
I
Linear to ± 1% of ful range, wih
repeatability at ±0.5% of ful ronge, the
51 5's performance has been proven in
thousands of lquid flovw oppbcaOlns
worldwide.
Reduce System Downtime
The 515 converts maintenance hours
into minutes with quick and simpie
insiollation. There is only one moving
poar!, and replacing 1 ic kes only
seconds, reducing sysemr downirme
substantially
stondord 25 Fo:1mi
(0:
Jo
e lnded to allow placmenvto
e up to 200 feei o:va withou;
er
nol amplifico;on
Rugged Construction For Long Wear
Avoilable in a choice a: chemlc'-2y
resistant, noncontaminong rousing
molen ols. the 5 15 stands up to the
harshest fluids
Specifications
For processes
Tn ng acids and solvents, the PVDF
*snylidene fluoride housing is
i uoocorbon highly resistant to
mor? seveie fluids, such as acids one
solvents
Output Signals:
Output Frequency:
Flow Rate Range:
Linearity:
Repeatability:
Maximum % Solids:
Standard Cable Length:
25 Feel
Simple, Accurate Flow Measurement
The 5 15 works on a simple, ye
precise, eiecrromechanical principle.
Four permanent magnets, embedded in
the rotor blades, spin post a coil in the
sensor body. Fluid flow causes the rotor
to rotate, producing a sine wave pulse
directly proportional to the flow rate.
The rotor's patented "open cell" feature
ensures a linear, repeatable output up to
20 fps resulting in minimal head loss
and no rn .-
.
s con J
be combined with on intrinsic safety
barrier for use in hazardous
environments.
Quick, Easy Conduit Installation
Designed to allow optional conduit
installation, the 5 i 5 complies with local
codes requiring conduit protection
Pulling off the 0.5 inch plug on top of
the sensor exposes a 0 5 inch (F)NPT
thread. The conan can be connected
easily using an cc anoal conduit adopter
fitting kit
An optional insirument back-cove kit, or
a specially prep'r-=d NEMAA box wil|
provide even/ihing necessary for quicl<
conduit connectio- to a meter or
controller. Adopi -o ether rigid or
flexible conduti, p ciecinng the systen
hookup from hors> elemenis and
mechanical damcqe
Ordering Information
P5I530P2
Housing
Material
Polypro
Polypro
Polypro
Shaft
Material
Titanium
Titonium
Titonium
P5 t530-V0
PS1 530-V I
P51 530V2
PVDF
PVDF
PVDF
Hastedloy C
Part No.
P5 1530PO
P51 530-P
Hostelloy C
Hasielloy C
Pipe Size (in.)
0.5 Io 4
5
to 8
10 - up
0.5 to 4
5 ia 8
to - up
Potented "flow-through" rotor designensures linear outpu/ in a wide dynamic
range.
Sensor Installation Fittings
515/2530/4500/8500/8516
Pipe
PVC 40
Fiberglass
PVDF
CPVC 80
= MO6.".iA&80.7
-~
(mnm)
[a.;4$tK|
2.;;
Polypropylene
% (mm
I
Stainless 316
--
Pipe
Size
Part No.
Part No.
1/2
PV8TOO
CPVSi005
3/4
PV8T007)
CPVBTOO7
SFMTfO7
N/A
PPATOO7
IAT0O7
1"
PV8TO10
CPV8T0 10
SFMTO1 0
(25)
N/A
PPMTG010
CR4T010
1 1/4"
PV8TO12
CPV81012
SFMTOl 2
132)
N/A
PPMTO 12
(32)
CR4TO12
CPV8TO 2
SFMO
T15
(40)
FPT015
PPMTO0 5
140)
CR41015
Part No.
Part No.
Part No.
Part No.
P 1005
N/A
(15)
(151
k641005
-
(25)
CR4T020
2~
PV8T020
22'
SEE
!P85020
SF MTO2O
FPT020
2 1/2"
PV8TC2S
PV8S02
SEE
S1AAT025
N/A
650)
PPMTO2C
'A4WO25
FPSO30
FVP3]
PVBTC/ :.-
PPMTO2T
80)
U?W030
4"
3
23
'OVV040
FP5040
PPMATOcc
5
6
5
N
2Q60'
Ps
WV050
PPMTOSC
1200
FPS060
N/A f
j.0- 0
3K0
FPSO80
Ki VVOSO
FS1 00
NWtv00
DO
10"
SE
12'
S
IR
P
SE
NrA
N/A.
FPSl20
!V120
S
I
Part Number Description:
Fitting Styles:
S
TE"
S
Saddle
PV 8 T020
PVC, CPVC and fiberglass have slip ends, FVD lrnerc; has socs; ends; coppei
l1ar copper and brass ubing] has "sweol-on" ends, iron, biass, cc:on sleel, and
slainless sleel have
hpe i
Style
Schedule
Morero. or Type
VV
8
--
ireaded
ends.
"Cementon" [or PVC, CPVC, ond fiberglass. double
s:'.:on o .:on1;
Specify walf thickness and O.D. 1Sf fiberglass, and pipe chedule for PVC or iron
Weldolet Weld 1a exisring pipe please specify pipe schedule
Braze 1o exislnq pipe, please specify pipe schedLIr
Braorle
Installation Guidelines
Once the appropriate insertion sensor for
on opplication has been selected. the
addition of a matched installation liting
easily adapts the sensor into the pipe.
Figure 1. Flow sensors, including
Signet insertion types, generally
dcrend upon a "fulv develooed
iurbulent flow profile" for moximuir.
linearity and accuracy. To achieve
this, the sensor must be located in a
straight run of pipe with at leas' ten
pipe diameters of uninterrupted straht
90* elbcn-.
|
20xid
5xid
pipe upstream of the sensor, and a
minimum of five pipe diameters of
uninterrupted straight pipe
downstream. Major obstructions stuch
as pumps or throttled valves will require
'onger straight runs.
Figure 2. Ir horizontol pipe iur
or sediment
h n 0 (akesc
sent. mount the sensor/filting ir
z 12 o dck o, 6 o'clock posiliasediment oi aii pockets are
oresent ih
kte sensor/fiting at a
maximmur angle of 450 to over-comre
nese obstacles Any sensor/ining
oosiuon 's acceptable with verncal
'uns Verical pipe runs with
downwad flow must be pressurized
-o ensure a Full pipe, upward flows
ore prefenred
The simple steps below show how to
reduce sensor insiallation time with the
use of a SIGNET PVC TEE fitting.
Figure 3. Knowledge of the flow
profiles below are important for
Proper rolibroiir and olacemeni
a pipe. The
most common flow profile found in
industrial opplicaions is developed
turbulent flow, precisely what
Signet sensors are calibrated for
I of a flow sensor
in
The second type of profile,
disturbed turbulent flow, is less
stable and occurs when the flow is
interrupted by a valve, elbow, or
other internal obs:ructon. By
running 10 diome-ers of straight
pipe ohead of to senso
disturbed tuibje: flow can
achieve a well deve oped turbulent
h n be
profile wh'ro e
accuratelv meos sdoccurs with
Finally, lamrr a
hghly viscous fiat or woih fluids
which travel o c e mely low
velocities
To determine v'
the fluid velocity -sneeded (U),
specific gravity (P) viscosity (Pj,
and the pipe diarmeter (DI. This
information is expressed in the form
of a REYNOLDS NUMBER.
Typically, a fluid
REYNOLDS NUMBER = D x U x P
type of flow
exists n a po0rc:'cr opp ication,
\ith
a
REYNOLDS NUMBER greater than
4,500 is developed turbulent, and
less than 2,000 is laminar.
S
NEMA 4X WATERTIGHT PRESSURE SWITCH
FOR HARSH OR CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS
Low Pressure Ranges 30"
Hg Vac to 150" H20
High Pressure Ranges 15
to 3000 PSI
Buna-N or 316SS
Diaphragm
IOA SPDT Switch
Tamper/vibration resistant
setpoint adjustment 20 to
100% range
Fixed or Adjustable
deadband
Corrosion Resistant
NEMA4X
Enclosure
Watertight
Neoprene
Gasket
Ideal for use in harsh and corrosive
environments, the PSW-300 Series
Pressure Switches feature stainless
steel or Buna-N diaphragm-sealed
piston or diaphragm actuators that
provide repeatability of +1% of range
Standard design allows easy access
to svitches. For versatility, single
setpoint with fixed deadband, singlc
setpoint with adjustable deadband 0i
dual independently adjustable
setpoints may be chosen.
SPECIFICATIONS
Wiring
Diagram
Connection
Screw
Terminals
Easy to Ready
Setpoint Scale
Adjustment
M" NPT Conduct
Setpoint
Approval: UL listed, CSA certified
Storage Temp: -20 to 150 0 F
Ambient Temp. Limits: - 20 to 150 F
Set point typically shifts i1, of range pe
50*F of temperature change.
Enclosure: NEMA, 4X watertight and
corrosion resistant
Setpoint Repeatability: +i1/ of ranoe
Switch Output: I or 2 SPDT switch may
be wired "normally open" or "normally
closed"
Electrical Rating: 10 A: 125/250 V ac: 05
A, 125 Vdc, 0.25 A. 250 V ac, 15 A:
125/250 Vac
Enclosure: Epoxy coated aluminum,
gasketed
Weight: 2 lb
Electrical Connection: % NPT female
Pressure Connection: W NPT female:
for vacuum to 600 PSI: " NPT Male/V
NPT female for 1000 and 3000 PSI
Connection Material: Vac through in.
H2 0 ranges; carbon steel: AlI PSI ranges,
316SS
Oxygen Service: Specify Option X68 fol
special cleaning.
H-11
PADEI- N
rF"
-M
I.,
a--
44'.5
too
(f)
See page H-13 for differentialpressure models.
ortei
MODEL
-efyMdlN
PRICE
*
-
b
ADJUSTABLE RA NGE
METRIC
ENGLISH
DEAD BAND
ENGLISH
UNITS
PROOF
PRESSURE!
SWITCH
250 PSI
10A SPDT
-6 to -30 INHg Vac
-20 to -100kPa
6 to 24
6 to 30 IN H20
12 to 60 INH2 0
. 15.tol7.5,Pa
3 to 15 kPa
4to27: -;20 PSI
20 PSI
5 to 54
10A SPDT%
10A SPDT
30to150INH 2 0
3 to 15 PSI
6 to 30 PSI
7.4 to 37 kPa
20 to 100 kPa
40 to 200 kPa
140 to 700 kPa
280 to 1400 kPa
18 to 135
2.5 to 13
3 to 18
20 PS
500 PSI
500 PSI
10A SPDT,4
10A SPDT
10A SPDT
10 to 90
18 to 180
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
10A SPDT
10A SPDT
600 to 3000 PSI
.56 to 2.8 MPa
1.4 to 7 MPa
4.2 to 21 MPa
45 to 360
160to900
400 to 2600
2400 PSI
12000 PSI
12000 PSI
10A SPDT
10A SPDT
10A SPDT
-6 to -30 IN Hg Vac
6 to 30 IN H20
12 to 60 IN H20
30 to 150 IN H20
3 to 15 PSI
6 to 30 PSI
20 to 100 PSI
40 to 200 PSI
80 to 400 PSI
200 to 1000 PSI
600 to 3000 PSI
-20 to -100kPa
1.5 to 7.5 kPa
3 to 15 kPa
7.4 to 37 kPa
20 to 100 kPa
40 to-200 kPa
14016 700:kPa
280 to 1400 kPa
.56 to 2.8 MPa
1.4 to 7 MPa
4.2 to 21 MPa
27 to 1.4
.7 to 1.4
.7 to 1.8
2.1 to 4.2
.7 to 14
250 PSI
20 PSI
20 PSI
120 PSI
100 PSI
TWO
TWO
TWO
TWO
TWO
.7 to 2.1
1.4 to 3.5
1.4 to 5.6
6 to 11
10 to 42
42 to 98
500 PSI
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
2400 PSl
12000 PSI
12000 PSI
TWO 15A SPDT
TWO 15A SPDT
T WO 15A SPIDT
TWO 15A SPDT
TWO 15SA S PDT
TWO 15A SPDT
20 to 100kPa
40 to 200 kPa
140 to 700 kPa
280 to 1400 kPa
.7 to 1.4
1.7 to 2.8
2.8 to 5.6
4.2 to 11.2
500 PSI
500 PSI
1000 PSI
1000 PSI
TWO 1A SPOT
TWO 15A SPDT
TWO 15A SPDT
TWO 15A SPDT
,
20 to 100 PSI
40 to 200 PSI
80 to 400 PSI
200 to 1000 PSI
4
:ite
3 to Sl i ~
6 to 30 PSI
20 to 100 PSI
40 to 200 PSI
Pressure Switch C
..
wuis:
(Add Suffix to Part Nut..er) Hermetically Sealed SA 125/20 Vac Switch for Extra Protection in Severe Environments.
-P Single Set Point $75.00
-PP Dual Set Point $150.00
316 Stainless Steel Welded Pressure Activator -S 15 to 600 PSI Only $54.00
H-12
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
SPDT
H
-fl
-
.
0
t
~
C
a
-2
-i- A2Z [L
c
oC
e
-
K
EL
co.-:*-
-
-5
41.2
-*a
+c'
-tio
-:-
0
-
o
.
mJF
--
a,
00
ta
Ca
0E
-
a
'-
c-o
~Ci
-
'
-a
-
-
cg
-
-
CL 3
c03-0r
oL
-
u
-a
-
*0
t'
o
a
to.to
--
t
-E
o
Eo
.
t
C
>
0~
C
Cm
to
SICL
IC
ca'-00(D
0-
c -0
~-
(0
o
-
ca
a
c
ro
x
a
0E o
E
cL
nV
oC>,
~c
' 0
-0o
1c
C.
i
t
r
a_ t
-
_.s
2
-
t
to
-
-ra
o
t
-
m4oe
oee
c
3
>-
.
-
c-a>
a
-
i-
a,
40
to-
00
'4
-
-
u
-
e=omr
-o
---
E
,
-
o
C
.-.
03C3-)
cE~~o
-2=
a
C
C C --
(o
..
,
-Ct'
0 n
act-o
w
2
~o
>r
to.--
c
3
ce
ru
toci-
S<
I-
c
or-0
an .
-o
'alc
o
-E
n-
c.Es
ScEo
E c
aa0o
=D
r
d
-
o
>
Ic
C
ca
z2-00
a-
-
ac
92232
to--e
Emo9
c
_C
c
it
ul)
IC
U)
o
'- Or
2
0
c
N
c-
4
C
VC)
fI
C-)
0
a
cc
'-0
2
C
U
U-)
-
(-5
u-o
040
LO
.u
E
o
--
0
cc
cc
C,
a
tE
8
C
C
-
--- .
C
--FI fi
cm.
-2$Q
C
-
C)
F-
-
u
I
oI
.3
Do
--
Sc :40
.u
0000
cc
" -.
-
) -
n.
-
0
0
0
0
%n
o
o
0
& t--
00
-
0
I
0
-0(
S
C
O(0
CC
c
- .
a a.
c
8E-O
n
(0
2
z
,
<
92
-AD
z cors
o SN
EC.C
0 Z
(F-
(Z-
<
0
Cl
(D
0
C
c
Ci
ly
Z
01
c
2
0
>c
oC
.
N
-
o
o
0 E
o
cc
-
2
ti
a c
S~oMa
a
O5
o
nrS
oyog
cz
r-
C
no
C E
ma
o
'E
'
CO
0a
ot
.-.
-io
1
o
L 4'
cD
Cc
o
CO
CO
6
C')
't
69>gr
Do e
OoiN
cto
i
0.
-
o
00oa
-
- o
cc
-
CC')
0
CO
z--c
_
o
tec
C 'to
i
Ez n
I-f
-
-
EN 707
YV
'CATou
,FIL
Explosion-Proof Regenerative Blower
I
C
FEATURES
Manufactured in the USA
280 SCFM
Maximum flow:
pressure: 85" WG
* Maximum vacuum: 87" WG
* Standard motor: 5.0 HP
* Blower construction - cast aluminum
housing, cover, impeller & manifold:
cast iron flanges
UL & CSA approved motors for
Class I, Group D atmospheres
" Sealed blower assembly
" Quiet operation within OSHA standards
e
Ie
SMaximum
I
OPTIONS
TEFC motors
* 50 Hz motors
International voltages
e Other HP motors
Corrosion resistant surface treatments
e Remote drive (motorless) models
I
ACCESSORIES
e Moisture separators
- Explosion-proof motor starters
e Infine & inlet titers
* Vacuum & pressure gauges
e Relief valves
a External mufflers
C
BLOWER PERFORMANCE AT STANDARD CONDITIONS
AIR FLOW RATE (M2 /MIN)
0
3.5
2.0
30
4.0
5.0
6.0
70
AIR FLOW RATE (M3/MIN)
8.0
1.0
I
-
2.5
c2.0
-
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
220
cc
a:
150
-
0
0
1.5
4
3.0
-
6
200
2.0
0
-
-100
10
40
U)
0 3
z
100
2
s0
50
s
-
1
0
40
60 / 120
160
20)0
240
260
0
AIR FLOW RATE. (SCFM)
cW
10
25
1 14-s I.lt-
6000
3
U
'01
a
0u)
0
IL
- 3C
120
IM
240
200
I-J....I...II
260
I
I
200
240
25
6000
2000
0
100
25
ccU
0
U
I I
1001
80
AIR FLOW RATE (SCFM)
5
/
LC4000,
40
5
25
40
60
120
160
200
240
260
o
40
810
120
160
280
EN 707
Explosion-Proof Regenerative Blower
DiMENSIONS:
TOLERANCES:
MM
XX ±
2.5
(UNLESS CrTHENrWISE NOTED)
0,75' NPT CONDUlT CONNECTION AT 12 O'CLOCK POSmoN
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL
Part No.
Motor Enclosure Type
Horsepower
Phase - Frequency
Voltage
Motor Nameplate Amps
Maximum Blower Amps'
Inrush Amps
Starter Size
Service Factor
Thermal Protection
Bearing Type
Shipping Weight
EN707F72XL
038181
Explosion-proof
5.0
Three - 60 Hz
230
14
158
96
1
460
7
7.9
48
0
1.0
Pilot Duty
Sealed, Bal
174 lb (79 kg)
BLOWER LIMITATIONS
Min. Flow @ Max. Suction
Min. Flow @ Max. Pressure
'Corresponds to
the
85 SCFM @ -87" WG
150 SCFM @ 85" WG
performance point at which the blower and f or motor temperature rise reaches the limit of the thermal protection in the motor,
Specifications subject to change without notice. Please contact factory for specification updates.
fllV1.fi -11
Blower Model Reference Key
A- So-ah&
8 -DRO68,
=
D083, DR 101. DR202
C - DR303. DR312. OR353
0
(R606.
6R707, OR4, DR5. DR6. DR 7. DR75
F - DR8, DR9. DR806. DR$5
G-DR10,DR11.DR12,DR13
-DR31 3, 0H404.H454, DR SOS.
DR4513. DE523. DR543, DR555
IAccessodies
SH- DR14, DR 15
IL
I iletletFilters
Filter
(Single
Connection)
protect
the blower
and the air distribution
SPECIFICATIONS:
system from dust, and other airborne particles and conminants. Normally used in pressure systems.
I
.
-
CI
c M
I
E
4T7411
I
D
.
FOR SPIRAL BLOWERS
FOR DR BLOWER MODELS
IRlerence
In
Connection
Part Nurou
Z Media Fifter
A
6
516486
535122
517865
517866
517B67
517 B68
515123
515124
515125
B
C. D
E
E
F
G
H
H
H
517869
Z45
51770
517871
517872
5
li
Outlet
BIow Model
47741
517609
155
-S5165
HOUSING-Steel
MEDIA-Polyester
EFFICIENCY-97-98% (8 to 10 micron particle size)
FILTER ELEMENT-Replaceable (see filter elements)
NOTE: "" MEDIA (i to 3 micron particle size) available
2L00 So
0 75 NPT
1.00 NPT
1 50 N PT
2 0IFT
P5133
2 00 NPT
2_50 NPT
3.00 NPT
4 00 NPT
6.00 NPT
8.00NPT
A
B
456
325
6.00
6.00
175
1000
5.06
Drenuions (lnches)
C
0
E
7.00
375
200
0.75
175
6.50
6.50
100
725
200
Sl
12.25
200
271078
517612
515132
515132
5
515134
10C0
12.50
250
515134
1000
13CC
303
515134
1000
% 00
1400
4 00
515135
1500
2.00
50
8 C5
22.50
1
Fier
150
tline Filter (Dual Connection)
I
SPECIFICATIONS:
line Filters protect the blower from harmful dust and other
articles that may be drawn into the blower through the air
distribution system. Normally used in vacuum systems.
HOUSING-Steel
MEDIA-Polyester
EFFII ENCY-97-98% (8 to 10 micron particle size)
FILTER ELEMENT-Replaceable (see filter elements)
5 80
s6~
O7SNSC
5188
B
.CNPS
4
4
NOTE:
O7SNC
50 10
.
lolis
" MEDIA (Ito 3 micron particle size) available
01
__1_438
250
65
0
4 075
51713
8.CCC
51734
F--
IC
PIEFIINC-7-8
,~
516463
5526
516465
517811
NOE
usedin
disriutonsysem5Nrmll
517610
51646
5152?54
(8beto 10dimicron particl
517886
517887
517888
517889
517890
517891
517892
B
B
C.D0
O 75 NPSC
1.0 ws
1.50 NPSC
2.00 NPSC
F
G
H
H
4t
m
Ns
2.50 NPSC
3_00 NPSC
400 NPSC
800 NP'!
0.75 NPSC
&oN
1.50 NPSC
2100 NPSC
2.50 NPSC
3.00 NPSC
4.00 NPSC
6.OONPSC
8.00NPSC
"Z"5S
MEDAo
MEDIA-Pol
55
7.25
7.00
8.00
8.00
14.00
14.00
18.00
L 2200
(1 to 3.2micron paricl
er
is
.8
07
&.50
10.25
10.25
26.50
2700
2.00
38.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
.75
10
1 50
200
2.50
300
400
8
600
(3
8,00
8 00
size)net"A
size) 2aial
517613
563
516434
516435
516435
515135
515135
516515
517348
With our moisture separator, you can protect your remediation system
while making the removal of hazardous vapors and gases more efficient.
As it becomes imperative to remove
known environmental hazards from
soils and below dwellings, the explosion-proof Rotron regenerative blower
has become a valuable tool in the
vapor extraction process. Our new
moisture separator is used in conjuncdon with the Rotron blower to make
vapor extraction methods safer and
more efficient for the entire process.
By separating and containing
entrained liquids which are extracted
during the removal process from the
gas flow stream, Rotron's moisture
separator helps protect the blower
from corrosion damage caused by
excess moisture and protects the
end treatment system from further
contamination. The moisture separator is positioned between the blower
Product Features.
Product Options.
El Large capacity ranges from
10 gallons to 40 gallons.
E High efficiency cyclonic separation
for all models.
El Inherently safe collection design.
El M.iny sizes available to suit application (see chart).
* Moisture separators are sized
to blower.
E No routine maintenance, except
to drain liquid.
E Epoxy coated interiors.
El Outfitted with drain for convenient
removal of fluid.
U Two safety features include a relief
valve and a liquid level float,
o A vacuum relief valve protects
the blower from overheating by
detecting blockage in the line.
C Site and vacuum gauges read fluid
levels and working vacuum point
available.
C Automatic draining systems
available.
C Private labeling is available.
E Insulation blanket available to
winterize separator.
o
A float system containing a cage,
float seat, and stainless steel ball
automatically seats to protect
the blower from flooding when
the moisture separator is full.
E
-
MODEL
A D1A.
CFM
B
MS200D
M-4S3000
2.00
2.50
200
300
3.00
MS350B
MS5008
3.00
350
500
6.00
MS600B
4.00
600
6.50
14.88
3.00
TOP VIEW
A oD
INLET
Selecting the right
moisture separator.
Select Moisture
For Rotron
separatorMode
BlowerModel
02404. D8454. OR505.
0R51 3.02R523.02R555 M52000
UQuid-hoiding
capacity
10 gallons
DR606. DR6. 0R707
MS3000
10 gallons
DR808
MS3508
40 gallons
OR8
MS500B
MS600B
40 gaions
40 gallons
DR12
C DIA. ID
and the extraction well and contains
two safeguards that help protect
your system during the vapor extraction process. Rotron can offer application assistance when installing the
moisture separator.' For more information, contact our Application
Engineering department.
I
EDIA.
24.66 36.786
DRAIN
IWEIGHT
3/4" NPT
30 LBS
1 NPT
65 LBS
4.50
46.50
2344
Hazardous Location Policy.
EG&G Rorron will not knowingly specify,
design, or build any product for installation
in a hazardous, explosive location without
the proper UL or NEMA enclosure. EG&G
Rorron does not recognize sealed components as a substitute for explosion-proof
5.00
34.37
54.50
6.63
components. Sealed units should never be
utilized where local, state, and/or federal
codes specify the use of explosion-proof
cquipmeit. Division I & 11,Class 1, Group
D; Class 2, Groups F & G requirements are
mer with these standard explosion-proof
blowers.
*EG& G Rotron offers general application guidance; however, the suitability of the particular
blower selection is uktimarely the responsibility of the user, nor the manufacturer of the blower.
Notes:
Dimensions: inches
Tolerance: XX ± .25
6.25
Specifications subject to change without
notice.
GENERAL PURPOSE PRESSURE SWITCHES
NEMA-4 ENCLOSURE
\11\O
I
c-
7
H-
* Ranges From 3to 3000 PS,
'
SPDT Switch Output
-.
Internal Reference Scales
and Adjustment Lock
Safe, Easy Wiring Access
UUITTED
MPT'L 316. t
Omega's affordable, general purpose
pressure switches offer distinct
advantages over most similar style
switches, including calibrated
reference scales and DPDT or
adjustable deadband switches, as
well as a wide selection of adjustable
ranges from 3 to 3000 psi.
vI
SPECIFICATIONS
Approval: UL listed, GSA certified
*
4; i
'$
Storage Temp:-65 to +1601F
Process Temp: SS 0-160*F; Buna-N
0- 150'F
Ambient Temperature: -40 to +1604F
(except models PSW-107 to 117; O to
160:). Setpoint typically shifts less than
1% of range for a 50SF (280 C) ambient
temoerature change.
Shock: Set porj repeats aIler i5G :
duraion
Vibration: Se, pont repeats after 2.50
S -500 CPS
Enclosure: NEMA 4 Classification
It~i
-
Set Point Repeatability: PSW-107 to 1
and 129 to 131 ii% of adjustable ranor.
PSW118 to 129 and 132 to 133 ±15% o
adjustable ranqe
*
Switch Output: 1 SPDT Switch may be
wired "normally open" or "normally
11,closed"
Electrical Rating: Std. 15 amp
125/250/480 V ac Resistive
External Manual Reset; 15A 1251250 V
ac Resistive
I*
,Models
Double Pole Double Throw: 10A
125/250 V ac Resistive
Enclosure: Die Cast Aluminum, (max
0.06% copper). Light grey aluminum
lacquer finish, gasketed
Weight: Approximately 2 lb
Electrical Connection: W" NF
11gdiameter
knockouts
Pressure connection:
(2)
4 NPTF (excec
118 to 126 1/2" NPTF).
2 YEAR
MADE IN
WARRANTY
IADJUSTAB LE RANGE
MODEL
PRICE
ENGLISH
m
DEAD BAND
METRIC
ENGLISH
PROOF
UNITS
PRESSURE SWITCH
Buna-N Diaphrci m, "0" Ring and %" NPTF Brass Pressure Connection
PSW-107
OPSI SA SPDT
1.to 2. PSI
60
20 to 210 kPa
3 to 30 PSI
600 PSI 15A SPDT
1. to 4. PSI
70 to 675 kPa
PSW-108
10 to 100 PSI
ADDED
FEATURE
4
-
10 to 100 PSI
70 to 675 kPa
-
600 PSI
10 to 100 PSI
70 to 675 kPa
4. to 10. PSI
600 PSI
10A DPDT
PSW-l1
10 to 100 PSI
70 to 675 kPa
0.5 to 12. PSI
600 PSI
15A SPDT
PSW-112
30 to 300 PSI
205 to 2000 kPa
1. to 5. PS1
600 PSI
15A SPDT
PSW-110
L
-PSW--113
30 to 300 PSI
205 to 2000 kPa
0.5 to 16. PSI
PSW-114
50 to 500 PSI
340to3400kPa
2 to 8 PSI
PSW-115
50 to 500 PSI
340 to 3400 kPa
1.5 to 24. psi
0 PSW-116
PSW-117
316SS Diapt
PSW-118
PSW-119
PSW-120
PSW-121
PJSW-122 J
2500PS1
2500 PSI ,5A SPOT
DPDT Switch
e
4
-
Adjustable
edan
Deadhand
External Manual
34Ot340k~a2500P51QMCLJI
0.7 to 6.89 MPa
3. to 20. PSi 2500 PSI 15ASPOT
100 to 1000 PSI
i and 1/2" NPTF Pressure Connection
2500 PSI 15A SPOT
1. to 3 PSI
5 to 30 PSI
I42 to 210 kPa
6 to 30 PSI
42 to 210 kPa
5. to 12. PSI
2500PSI 10AOPOT
10 to 100 PSI
70 to 675 kPa
3. to 5. PSI
2500 PSI 15A SPOT30 to 300 PSI
205 to 2000 kPa
3. to 6. PSI
2500 PSI I1ASPDT
205 to 2000 kPa 100 to 850 PSI 2SOOPSI iOADPbT
30 to 300 PSI
10 to 85 PSI
2500 PSI 15A SPLT
4. to 7. PSI
340 to 3400 kPa
50 to 500 PSI
10. to 25. PSI
1.35 to 11.7 MPa
200 to 1700 PSI
Bellow and " NPTF Brass Pressure Connection
Ito 2" Hg
-100 toO kPa
30" Hg Vac toO
30" HgVactoo
-100 toO kPa
3 to 6.5" Hg
140 to 1350 kPa
1 to 4. PSI
20 to 200 PSI
2500 PSI 15A SPOT
PDT,
30 to 300 PSi
m
SPOT
50 to 500 PSISIL1ACIT
PSWv-123
PSW-124
PSW-125
Phosher Bi
25OOPSI 15ASPDL
m
0
RestManual
15A SPDT External
PSW-109
C
205 to 2000 kPa
Reset
OPDT Switch
DPDTSwitch
Adhand
30_PSI__i5ASPDTI
30PSI 1OADT!DPDTSwitch
250PS1
5ASPITI
nd W" NPTF Pressure Connection
20 to 200 PSI
0to5 PSI
140 to 1350 kPa
1 to 3. PSI
1.5to5.2PSI
34to3400kPa
i l0. 9to23.PSI
a
250 PSI 15A SPOT
50PSI 15ASPDT
2500 PSI 15A SPDT-
and % " NPTF Pressure Connection with Buna-N 0-Ring
40 to 180. PSI 10000 PSI 15A SPDT
500 to 3000 PS I 3.5 to 20.7 MPa
11
)xygen Clean: Opt.
"X68
SS models only, add $35.
H-10
-
-
4
0n
k
U LS 2000 Level Switch
R-AtO0
BABBIIT INTERNATIONAL, INC.
CL CQU e MU-Y
UCL
}LL
cuO (TI-
Th
.1~
The LS 2000 is the one level switch for all material measurement. Improved perfornance over fioats, conductance probes, capacitance switches, rotating paddles and vibrating switches.
FEATURES
a Selectable fail-safe electroncs
Ignores significant product build-up
=
Solid state, no moving parts
=K
Simple installation and calibration
U Modular electronics easily replaced
B Probe length easily field modified
=B Explosion proof housing standard
Rugged construction ha ndies
the roughest products
=B
* LIQUIDS
Wastewater
Oils
Acids
Slurries
Fuels
Caustics
* INTERFACES
Oil/Water
. DRY/SOLIDS
Fly Ash
Cement
Plastics
Flour
Powders
Sand
Grains
Carbon Black
Wncr C*-
GENERAL OPERATIONS The LS 2000 can measure virtually any liquid, dry malerial or interface of electrically conductive or non-conductive products. The
proprietary radio frequency (RF) balanced impedance bridge has exceptionia temperature stability.
thus eliminating the need io recalibrate the unii
from season to season
When the probe is installed, it is calibrated in
absence of material touching the probe. When the
desired material comes in contact with the probe,
t S 2000 is activates n4 - '.s the desired output.
SIMPLE CALIBRATION All the necessary calibration
indicators are on-board so all you need to calibrate
the LS 2000 is a small screwdriver.
Fail-safe electronics provide peace of mind. The
modular electronics make trouble shooting and
repair a snap. The entire unit is backed by our two
year warranty.
CONSTRUCTIONThe probe ismade of solid 316 stainless steel rod; the insulator is made of UHMWIPE (UltraHigh Molecular Weight Polyethylene). UHMWPE has
excellent abrasion and impact resistance. The seals
are made with Viton "0" rinqs All the electronics are
1'
.UWAME
DRYBULKSOLIDSDETECTION
LIQUID LEVELCONTROL
LS203 WITH4' UHMWPE
PROBE
SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
Power
120 VAC ( 15%) 60 Hz, 2 watts,
standard (24 VDC optional)
Output:
1 Form C contact SPDT relay,
10 amp resistive at 125 VAC,
8A250VAC, 5A30VDC
Fail Safe:
Selectable high or low level
PF Frequency:
Approximately 1.3 MHz
ENVIRONMENTAL
Hazardous Area:
Cioss , Group C, D, Class 11,
Group E,F G, Crass IlIl
Temperature:
Probe -30*F to 180"F
Electronics: -30OF to 170*F
Pressure:
Probe 250 psi @750F Note: at
180*F pressure should not
exceed atmosphere.
Construction:
Probe. All wetted parts 316 SS,
UHMWPE and Viton.
Electronics: Housed in cast
WARRANTY The entire unit is warranted for two
years against defects in material or workman-
ship. See owners manual for complete details.
Distributed By-
aluminum explosion proof
enclosure.
Specifications subjecf to cuange withou notice.
APPLICATION PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE If within 60
days of purchase, the LS 2000 does not perform
according to our claims and was properly installed in
an approved application that does not exceed the
stated performance specifications, the LS 2000 may
be returned for full credit
COPYRIGHT
1968 by BABSITT INTERNATIONAL. INC,
D I G
I
T A L
P A N E L
M E T E FR
PROCESS
CONTROL
POSSO
41/2
DGIT
Microprocessor-Based
with SOS
* Microprocessor Power with Analog Simplicity
Easy Single Button Scaling (SBS)
* Steady, Accurate Display to ± 199,990
41/2 Digits + Extra Zero
+
4 Alarm Points with LED Status Indication
a NEMA 4 Front Panel
Isolated 24 V Transmitter Power Supply
* 4-20 mA, 1-5 V, 0-5 V or 0-10 V Field Selectable Inputs
Multi-point Linearization option
2 or 4 Alarm Relay options
Isolated 4-20 mA Transmitter Output option
2 or 4 Relays and 4-20 mA output available together
PRECISION OGI1TAL
CORPORATION
Model POD690Miicroproceaaor-Besed Digital Process Meter
SIMPLIFY LOOPS WITH P0690's 24 V SUPPLY
The PD690 is ideal for loops that consist of a transmitter and
a digital display because the P0690 provides the 24 V to
power the transmitter. This standard feature saves time and
money by simplifying wiring and elimInating the cost of an
external power supply. In addition, the isolated power supply
can be used to power 3 and 4 wire transducers with either
current or voltage output The 24 V power supply has a
ripple of less than 0.01 V pp that is ideal for powerIng smart
transmitters.
HIGH-PERFORMANCE/EASY TO USE
Preclsion Digital's Model P0690 puts the power of micrOprocessor technology to work In a high performance, easy to
use, industrial grade digital process meter with the features
customers want:
- Single Button Scaling
* (solated 24 V Transmitter Power Supply
* NEMA 4 Front Panel
* Steady, Accurate 4W Digit + Extra Zero Display
MuitI-point Linearization
* Powerful Options
SINGLE BUTTON SCALING (SS) MAKES SETUP A SNAP
Single Button Scaling means the P0690 can be completely
programmed using only one button. And you only do one
thing with that one button: press It once when the meter
displays what you want. For example, press the ENTER
button to initiate an automatic scan of the various
programming routines. CALlb, dEC Pt, ALArS, outPut and
no. PtS. To enter one of these routInes, press the ENTER
button as the routine name Is displayed. Once in the routine,
press the ENTER button when the meter reads the desired
values. It's that simple!!!
4-2
L co
4- 20-
-A
AL
Ac
coo
totre-Ott@
C
CL
S
him Lafnd 24? pew 2p9p
Po 4=141 rpn
wpp
an
Setup Instructions On Meter
NEMA 4 FRONT PANEL PROTECTION FOR HOSTILE
ENVIRONMENTS
Wet, dirty and dusty environments don: oother the PD690's
NEMA 4 front panel so it can be installec in almost any panel
in the plant. That means plant operators -an have the
important process nforrnaton right wne's they need it most.
on the shop floor. And the NEMA 4
-~ r--~
--
-trw'ei
t
.-
e
6en
O'
n
'rL
I
si
- topitfi"]Ada
4o-eeoe
&A.
"
,
-
The P0690 is so easy to cabibrate,
top of the me tert'!
1'w.1'.
1 EMa
hb-e'
.
',
^Calbe,
The
P0690 is so e'asy ("o=
L"
Pr'
pean
does not
BIG, BRtGHT, STEADY DISPLAY FOR BIG NUMBERS
The P0690's 4W digit plus extra zero cisplay is great for
displaying big numbers: like the volurne in a 100,000 galon
tank. And the P0690's large display does not sacrifice
stability fcr resolution. Even when displaying large numbers,
the P0690's display is steady and quick responding.
Operators wilt appreciate being able to display process
variables with such stability and resolunon and they'll have
confidence in the smooth, steady dispoay.
ma P.lE r ~ as
ree
-
=tAP
-
1-m
front
restrict access to the setup buttons.
pn
*
elnsfr~foi ~
rndr
to
the tnstructions are pon oed rigiu
on
One Button Does It AIIIII
To Calbrate Press ENTER when meter
reeds CALM.
To Prograin Alarms: Press ENTER when
meter reads ALArS.
2
ro Program 4-20 mA Output: Press ENTER
whle? meter reads ouftur.
Miodel PDGSO
Microprocessor-Saed Digital Process Meter
4 ALARM POINTS STANDARD
The P0690 comes with 4 independent alarms. Each alarm is
easily programmed for high or low set point and 0-100%
deadband. Front panel LEDs Indicate alarrn status and
assist in set pointireset point programming. Options are
available for 2 Relay and 4 Relay outputs.
Simple Alarm Programming
Pressing the ENTER button when the display reads ALArS
Initiates a scan of the alarm sot and reset points. First, the
display flashes Alan-n #1 Set Point and indicates this by
lighting up the #1 LED and the "S" LED. This Set Point may
be changed using the ENTER button, Next the display
flashes Alarm #1 Reset Point and indicates this by lighting
up the #1 LED and the R LED. This Reset Point may also be
changed using the ENTER button, The remaining Set and
Reset Points are programmed in a simllar fashion.
PD690 Alarm #2Set Point is adjufed to 80000.
POWERFUL RELAY, RE-TRANSMISSION &
LINEARIZATION OPTIONS
The PD690's wide array of options satisfy even the most
demanding appIlcations, And, unlike many competitors,
there are no restrictions on the combination of options a
meter can havelli A fully loaced Model PDO90-3-12-17 has a
24 V transmitter power supply (standard), NEMA 4 front
panel (standard) 4 relays, isolated 4-20 mA output, and 11
point linearization,
Relay Output Options
The P0690 is availabt e wih 2 or 4 relay outputs. The SPOT
relays are rated at 5 Amp at 240 VAC and can be
programmed for automatic or manual reset, The relays can
also be programmed for 0-100%/ deadband,
Isolated 4-20 mA Signal Output Option
The P0690 can be equipped with an isolated 4-20 mA output
signal option that can be programmed to produce a 4-20 mA
output for vinually any input The 420 mA output signal can
be powered either by an internal or an external power
supply. If the internal power supply is used for the 4-20 mA
output, it is not available to power the transmitter input. The
4-20 mA output provides 500 VOC or peak AC, in put-tooutput or inputloutputtOo-ower isolaiion.
Multi-point Lineafization Option
Displaying the volume in a round riorizontal tank or
measuring flow ty extracting Me square root Irom a OP
transminter is a snap with ine mli-point option. The user
can input up to 11 calibration pomts and corresponding
displays to handle a wide variety of non-inear signa
appicaions
-
A
L-
The P0690-XI 2-Z prXesses
PD690 Alarm #2 Re" f Point Is adjusted to 20000.
Alarm Status Indication
When an alarm occurs, an LED will illuminate to indicate
which channel is in alarm. This LED will stay Illuminated until
the meter returns to the nonilarm state.
fevel meesurments as made Dy
pressum, floa, sonar, etc in a
round honzonra tank to o)sp'v
Vhe volume of material in the
lank in en gineerng units
The PO690-X-12-Z tSkos
squaro root of the pressure
differuntial &cross an orifplate to dispiay fpow ;n
engineering units-
OPTION CARD PIN-OUTS:
,J2{
Pin
Function:
Transmirer -
2
Transmitter Relay #1 Common
2
3
Relay #1 NO
Relay #1 NC
4
Relay #2 Common
6
Relay #2 NO
Relay #2 NC
Relay #3 Common
2
P017S
Relay #3 NO
Relay #3 NC
R Olay #4 Co0mmon
Relay #4 NO
1
Relay #4 NC
Note- Alarm acknowledgement terminals (ACK and COM)
are located on the meter main board.
J3
P0690 rndicerig that Alarm t2 is in alarm condition
--
3
4
5
Modal P0690
Microprocessaor-Based Digital Process Meter
SPECIFICATIONS:
BASIC METER
E
INPUTS: Field selectable, 4-20 mA, 1-5 V. 0-5 V, 0-10 V.
DISPLAY: Orght. Large, 0.56" (14.2mm) high elf iciency red
LED. 4% digits + extra zero; ± 19999(0), (0) may be
switched on to display 199,990,
I
FRONT PANEL: NEMA 4, panel gasket provided.
I
I
U
3
CALIBRATION RANGE: 4 rnA (IV) input may oe set to
display anywhere in range of meter. 20 mA (5V) may be set
anywhere above or below 4 mA Input.
LOOP POWER: Up to 20 mA at 24 VDC regulated. Noise less
than 10 mV p-p. Max toop resistance of 1200 ohms. Available
for either signa input or 4-20 mA output, but not both.
HOLD READING: Connect terminals HLD and COM.
ACCURACY: 0.05% of calibrated span.
INPUT IMPEDANCE: Voltage ranges, greater than
100 Kohms: Current range. 100 ohms,
POWER: 117 VAC or 230 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 10 VA
ENVIRONMENTAL: Operating temperature range: - 10 to
+ 65 "C.
Storage temperature range: -40 to + 95*C.
Relative Humidity: 0 to 90% non-condensing.
ENCLOSURE: 1/8 DIN, ABS plastic.
CONNECTIONS: Removable Screw terminal block (provided).
ALARM POINTS: 4, any combination of high or low alarms
ALARM STATUS INDICATION: Front Panel LED.
ALARM DEADBAND: 0-100%, user selectable
RELAY OUTPUTS
RATING: 2 or 4 relays; 5 Amp SPDT (form C). The contacts
are rated at 5 Amp @ 30 VDC or 5 Amp @ 250 VAC resistive
load: 1/14 HP @ 125 V/250 VAC for NC contacts and
1/1OHP. 125/250 VAC for NO contacts, inductive load.
User Select
1. Manually at any time (via user supplied switch or front
panel ACK bution). Manual reset resets all manually
resetable relays.
2. Automatically when the input passes the reset point.
FAILSAFE OPERATION: The relay coils are energized in
the non-alarm condition. In the case of a power failure, tie
output relays will go to the alarm state.
AUTO INITIALIZATION: When power is applied to the
meter, the output relays will always reflect the state of the
Input to the meter,
ORDERING GUIDE:
PD690-X.Y-Z
POM P(N
(
Power: 117 VAC (- 3): 230 VAC (- 4)
Calibration: 2 Point (- N); Multi-point (- 12)
Options: None (- N)
PD174 2 Relays ( - 14)
P0175 Isolated 4-20 mA Output (-15)
P0176 2 Relays + 4-20 mA Output (--16)
PD177 4 Relays ( - 17)
PD 178 4 Relays + 4-20 mA Output (-18)
Example: A P0690 powered from 117 VAC, with 2 point
calibration, and 2 relays would be: PD690-3-N-1 4
WARRANTY: I year, pars and labor.
FnONT ViEw
4 25'
SIDE ViEW
HQ~mm)-
PIie
I3E3mn) Hei d ior nt4 1- stnnn
mInsu
Z0
Traczneeas
?A
3d575A
Mournlr g Doinonloe
NOT ES:
. Panel cutout reqirec -1.772
x 3 622 45mm x 92mm) 1/8 DIN
2 Paneil ihckness - .060* 250 j1 52r-m-E4nm)
3. Allow 6 nches (152mr) beNnd panel
4. WQhl -- 12 oz, or (340 g)
IRESET:
E
YOUR LOCAL DISTRIBUTOR IS:
ISOLATED 4-20 mA OUTPUT SIGNAL
CALIBRATION RANGE: May be set anywhere in the range
of the meter.
OUTPUT LOOP RESISTANCE: 1500 ohms max. using an
external loop power supply. 1200 ohms max. using the built-
U
in loop power supply. Available for either 4-20 mA output or
signal input, but not both.
EXTERNAL LOOP POWER SUPPLY: 35 V Max.
PRECISION
FGITAL CORPORATION
ISOLATION: 500 VDC or peak AC. input-to-output or
Input/output-to-power.
ACCURACY: ± 0.25%.
4.93 Butlelin RPD1355
MaR6
'IqA
SePies 840 Air Velocity IPsmitter
Four field selectable ranges from 0-200 to 0-12,000 FPM
- Linear, 4-20 mA output signal
-
*
,Rugged
-
± 2% accuracy at an affordable cost
steel NEMA
13 housing with 12"
stainless steel probe
on 6' connecting
cable. Liquid tight
cable entrances.
Patn N 4A6O,583
TYR4 PLcES
N. A-3949Probe Extenson
Adapter. Opin'a ifting
aI1os rouninn
12" pipe
I
up
proe
in
to we feel.
The Dwyer Series 640 air velocity transmitter is ideal for
a wide range of HVAC measurement and control applications, particularly in complete building control and energy
management systems. Designed for use in reasonably
clean and dry air streams, applications include multi-point
air velocity measurements, supply and exhaust fan trackindustrial hygiene and clean-room systems, air pollution studies and manufacturing or process control systems.
The Series 640 brings
2% accuracy (including linearity,
hysteresis and repeatability) to these types of demanding
applications at a surprisingly low cost. With four field se-
Ing,
lectabie ranges of u-2YU, 0-1000, 0-3000 and 0-12,000 FPM,
this single transmitter can be supplied off-the-shelf for a
variety of different air velocity measurement applications.
The Series 640 transmitter is
ly installed with the
mounting hardware supplied. including a split flange for
securing the sensing probe in the duct. Requiring only 18volts AC or 22-28 volts DC for power and having a twowire, 4-20 mA output. electrical connections are made
quickly and easily by means of a four-wire cable to a plug-
U24
ENEMA
Ethe
provide fast response to changes in air velocity. A temperature sensor in the probe tip compensates for a wide range
of air stream temperature variations. Each transmitrer is
individually calibrated at our factory in a computer con
trolled wind tunnel. During this calibration procedure, the
inherent non-linearity of the thermistor velocity sensor is
automatically correlted by appropriate programming of an
EPROM in a linearizer circuit of the electronics packagr
SPECIFlCATIONS:
GENERAL
Media: Air
Ranges: 0-200, 0-1000. 0-3000. 3-12 00
FPM (bild selecable. relerenceo
to slandaio condons)
ELEcTRICAL
Power Svppiy: 16 24 'vAC. 22-28 VOC
Output
Signal: 4-20 mA DC
Loop Resistance: 0-300 Onrns
Current Consumption
250 mA Masimunm
Warmup Time: 3 ro 5 mi.ni,;es
PERFORMANCE
Zero Outpu: 4 mA
Fuii Span Outpui 20 mA
ACCURACY: (% of F.S.)
0-200 fpm range
±5% @ 32-180OF
0
t9%
0-32 F or 180-2001
0-1000, 0-3000 or 0-12mfC :prn 'ngs
±2% @ 32-180 F
,6% @ 0-32 or 180-200-~
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temoerature Ranges:
-
ory Air Strearn -
0 !o 200'F
- Operaing - 32 to 160'F
- Siorage -0 to 200-F
MECHANICAL
Wigfl: 3 lbs.
onciudes probe and cab e)
P-oce length: r2~ insefimon , .-.1
Cab-e length: 6 feet
Range adjustwent:
protected switches
in terminal block through a liquid tight cable gland. The
I
13 housing is suitable for all indoor industrial,
institutional or commercial installations. An optional probe
extension is available for larger duct sizes.
The central components of the Series 640 transmitter are
velocity and temperature sensors located in the tip of
the probe. The velocity sensor is a constant temperature
thermistor which measures the air velocity, referenced to
tandard conditions, by sensing the cooling effect of the
oving air passing over the heated sensor. The power required to maintain the velocity sensor temperature, as pro-
vided by the control circuitry in the electronics package,
~s a function of the air velocity. The velocity sensor is ruged enough to tolerate particulate contamination and still
Durable thermal velocity and temperature sensors are mounted within
5/" dia. stainless steel probe with etched 12 insertion depth scale
Simple field ranging
by means of circuit
board mounting DIP
switch. Easy electrical connections
made by means of
four-wire cable with
plug-in terminal
connector